# 27 - PART 20 Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine

# 01 - 493 Point-of-Care Ultrasound

## 493 Point-of-Care Ultrasound

Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
PART 20
Wilma Chan, Nilam J. Soni, Paul H. Mayo

Point-of-Care Ultrasound
DEFINITION
Point-of-care ultrasound (POCUS) is defined as the acquisition, 
interpretation, and clinical integration of ultrasonographic views by a 
treating clinician in real time at the patient’s bedside. POCUS is distinct 
from consultative ultrasound where a clinician orders an ultrasound 
exam, a sonographer acquires a comprehensive set of images, an imag­
ing specialist (most often a radiologist or cardiologist) interprets the 
images, and the ordering clinician receives an ultrasound report and 
integrates findings into clinical decision-making (Fig. 493-1). The 
goal of POCUS is not to replace the imaging specialist or the highresolution data provided by computed tomography (CT) or magnetic 
resonance imaging (MRI), but rather to improve diagnostic and thera­
peutic decisions made by the treating clinician at the bedside.
POCUS became part of trauma care in emergency departments 
in the 1980s, and subsequently, many specialties began incorporat­
ing POCUS into patient care. The 1999 House of Delegates from the 
American Medical Association passed a resolution (AMA HR. 802) 
enabling each specialty to define its own scope and appropriate use of 
POCUS. Specialty-based guidelines emerged supporting credentialing 
processes and defining standard scanning protocols to answer focused 
diagnostic questions. Common clinical scenarios, such as acute dys­
pnea, abdominal pain, and shock, can be rapidly characterized using 
POCUS (Table 493-1).
In internal medicine, there has been expanding interest in POCUS 
since the 2000s. POCUS can enhance diagnostic accuracy, treatment, 
monitoring, and screening of patients, as well as improve patient and 
clinician confidence and procedural safety (Fig. 493-2).
Physical
Examination
Point-of-Care
Consultative
Ultrasound
Ultrasound
ask
select
acquire
interpret
act
Bedside Clinician
Sonographer
Radiologist or Cardiologist
FIGURE 493-1  Workflow schematic comparing point-of-care ultrasound to physical 
examination and consultative ultrasound. Medical decision-making begins with 
asking a targeted question, selecting the diagnostic modalities, acquiring and 
interpreting images or other data, and ultimately, acting to incorporate the new 
findings into the patient’s care. The three different shapes represent various 
personnel in this process, and curved arrows demonstrate the exchange of 
information among providers across different stages. (Reproduced with permission 
from NJ Soni, BP Lucas: Diagnostic point-of-care ultrasound for hospitalists. J Hosp 
Med 10, 2014.)

Portable ultrasound machines are categorized as cart-based 
machines versus handheld devices with wired or wireless probes con­
nected to a tablet or mobile phone. Linear, curvilinear, and phasedarray probes are commonly available, and multifunctional probes are 
emerging. Linear high-frequency probes have excellent image resolu­
tion but limited penetration, so they are used primarily to examine 
superficial structures. Deeper structures are visualized with curvilinear 
or phased-array probes, which have a lower frequency. Portable ultra­
sound devices offer two-dimensional or gray-scale imaging, and color 
flow and spectral Doppler imaging. Important considerations when 
purchasing an ultrasound machine include portability, image resolu­
tion, screen size, probe types, imaging modes, battery life, disinfection, 
image archiving capability, and warranty.
COMMON APPLICATIONS
■
■CARDIAC
In the 1990s, clinicians began to perform focused cardiac POCUS 
exams to guide immediate management, especially for urgent and 
life-threatening conditions. In intensive care units and emergency 
departments, cardiac POCUS is routinely used to rapidly categorize 
shock states and acute respiratory failure. In outpatient settings, it is 
often used for serial monitoring of stable patients with chronic forms 
of heart disease.
A limited or focused cardiac POCUS exam includes five core views: 
parasternal long-axis, parasternal short-axis (mid-ventricular or papil­
lary muscle level), apical four-chamber, subcostal four-chamber, and 
inferior vena cava views. Clinicians with comprehensive training in 
echocardiography, including cardiologists and intensivists certified 
by the National Board of Echocardiography, may perform advanced 
Doppler measurements of cardiac pressures and function. Cardiac 
POCUS and consultative echocardiography are complementary tech­
niques where the clinical situation and operator skill determine which 
approach is most appropriate.
Cardiac POCUS exams can guide immediate and ongoing clinical 
decision-making when performed serially. To categorize shock states, 
left ventricular systolic function can be qualitatively categorized as nor­
mal (Video 493-1), hyperdynamic (Video 493-2), moderately reduced 
(Video 493-3), or severely reduced (Video 493-4). Other findings 
detected by cardiac POCUS that can change immediate management 
include acute right ventricular failure (Video 493-5), cardiac tampon­
ade (Video 493-6), and gross valvular abnormalities, including severe 
regurgitation of the tricuspid (Video 493-7), mitral (Video 493-8), 
and aortic (Video 493-9) valves, as well as large valvular vegetations 
(Video 493-10).
Competence in basic cardiac POCUS has become a mandatory 
component of an increasing number of specialties, including emer­
gency medicine, pulmonary medicine, critical care medicine, and 
anesthesiology.
■
■LUNG AND PLEURA
Historically, thoracic ultrasonography, comprised of lung and pleural 
ultrasound, was established by clinicians specialized in critical care, 
pulmonary, and emergency medicine. The pleural surface can be 
imaged through the intercostal spaces using high-frequency probes, 
while low-frequency probes penetrate deeper, allowing visualization 
of structures in the thorax. Ultrasound is superior to chest x-ray for 
detection of pneumothorax, early interstitial processes, and small pleu­
ral effusions and is superior to chest CT for characterization of early 
complex pleural effusions.
Pleural fluid is seen as a relatively hypoechoic space bounded by 
the diaphragm, chest wall, and atelectatic lung (Video 493-11). Pleural 
effusions are quantified as small (Video 493-12), moderate (Video 
493-13), or large (Video 493-14), and qualitatively assessed as simple, 
homogeneously echogenic, complex nonseptated (Video 493-15), or 
complex septated (Video 493-16). Ultrasound guidance to identify an

Pleural effusion
Dullness to percussion

4.8
0.1
Visualization of pleural fluid

0.07
Pulmonary edema
Crackles
19–64
82–94
3.4
NS
Bilateral B-lines

10.4
0.06
Pneumonia
Bronchial breath sounds

3.3
NS
Consolidation pattern
94–95
90–96
13.5
0.06
Elevated CVP (>8 cmH20)
Neck vein inspection
47–92
93–96
9.7
0.3
CVP >10 mmHg (IVC size >2 cm)

4.9
0.32
Reduced ejection fraction
3rd heart sound (S3)
11–51
85–98
3.4
0.7
LV systolic dysfunction
84–91
85–88
6.5
0.14
 
FINDING
SENSITIVITY (%)
SPECIFICITY (%)
LR+
LR–
FINDING
SENSITIVITY (%)
SPECIFICITY (%)
LR+
LR–
Elevated LV pressure
4th heart sound (S4)
37–71
50–70
NS
NS
PCWP 17 if IVC >2.0

4.4
0.3
Pulmonary
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cardiac
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
PATHOLOGY
PHYSICAL EXAMINATION
POINT-OF-CARE ULTRASOUND
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
TABLE 493-1  Comparison of Physical Examination Versus Point-of-Care Ultrasound Findings for Common Pathologies
Egophony
4–16
96–99
4.1
NS
Decreased breath sounds

5.2
0.1
Crackles
19–67
36–94
1.8
0.8

Congestive heart failure
Rales
12–23
88–96
NS
NS
Bilateral B-lines

19.4
0.03
Abdominojugular test
55–84
83–98
8.0
0.3
CVP >10 mmHg (IVC size >2 cm)

4.9
0.32
Ascites
Bulging flanks
73–93
44–70
1.9
0.4
Visualized ascites

0.04
Urinary retention (>400 mL)
Palpation

1.9
0.3
Bladder volume (>600 mL)

3.84
0.05
Lower extremity DVT
Calf swelling >2 cm
61–67
69–71
2.1
0.5
Compression venous ultrasonography

0.04
Abbreviations: CVP, central venous pressure; DVT, deep-venous thrombosis; IVC, inferior vena cava; JVP, jugular venous pulse; LE, lower extremity; LR, likelihood ratio; LV, left ventricle or left ventricular; NA, not applicable; NS, not 
Abdomen
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Source: Reproduced with permission from A Bhagra et al: Point-of-care ultrasonography for primary care physicians and general internists. Mayo Clin Proc 91:1811, 2016.
probability)
38–87
71–99
6.3
NA
Elevated JVP
10–58
96–97
3.9
NS
LE edema

93–96
NS
NS
Homan’s sign
10–54
39–89
NS
NS
Flank dullness
80–94
29–69
NS
0.3
Shifting dullness
60–87
56–90
2.3
0.4
Fluid wave
50–80
82–92
5.0
0.5
significant; PCWP, pulmonary capillary wedge pressure.
Wells’ score (high 
Soft Tissue and Musculoskeletal

History &
Physical Exam
diagnostic
procedure
POCUS
diagnose
Consultative
imaging
Diagnosis
Labs
therapeutic
procedure
Treatment
treat
POCUS
POCUS
monitor
No improvement
Improvement
POCUS
screen
Follow-up
FIGURE 493-2  Clinicians can use point-of-care ultrasound (POCUS) as part of a 
patient’s diagnosis, treatment, monitoring, and screening. A patient encounter 
begins with the history and physical examination, followed by a focused bedside 
ultrasound exam to narrow the differential diagnosis and guide workup. Treatment 
plans can include bedside procedures that are performed with ultrasound guidance. 
Serial POCUS exams can monitor disease processes and guide ongoing treatment 
decisions. Screening POCUS exams can detect asymptomatic, potentially treatable 
conditions. (Reproduced with permission from NJ Soni, BP Lucas: Diagnostic pointof-care ultrasound for hospitalists. J Hosp Med 10:120, 2015.)
optimal site for pleural drainage reduces the risk of pneumothorax and 
bleeding complications.
Normal air-filled lung tissue reflects sound waves, thereby pre­
venting visualization of aerated lung parenchyma. Two hallmarks of 
normal aeration of lung on ultrasound include lung sliding (Video 
493-17), which results from respirophasic movement of the parietal 
and visceral pleural interface, and A-lines, which are horizontally ori­
entated reverberation artifacts seen deep to the pleural line of air-filled 
lungs (Video 493-18). Interstitial abnormalities manifest as B-lines, 
which are vertically orientated hyperechoic lines emanating from the 
pleural line to the bottom of the screen (Video 493-19). Depending 
on their density and distribution, B-lines can support a diagnosis of 
cardiogenic pulmonary edema, pneumonitis, acute respiratory distress 
syndrome, or interstitial lung diseases. Consolidation results in lung 
that is tissue dense on ultrasound. Mobile air bronchograms and blood 
flow detected by color flow Doppler are associated with pneumonia 
when seen in an area of consolidation (Video 493-20). Similar to chest 
x-ray and chest CT, identification of consolidation by lung ultrasound 
does not specify a diagnosis of pneumonia, and clinical correlation is 
required.
■
■ABDOMEN
Evaluation of peritoneal free fluid is a common abdominal POCUS 
application. POCUS cannot specify the type of fluid (i.e., ascites, blood, 
urine, bile, chyme) but can detect as little as 100–500 mL of peritoneal 
free fluid. When ascites is present (Video 493-21), POCUS can identify 
a safe site for paracentesis, improving procedural success and compli­
cation rates compared to landmark-based techniques. POCUS elimi­
nates attempts at paracentesis when an insufficient volume of ascites 
is present (Video 493-22). The best site, depth, and angle for needle 
insertion is determined using the ultrasound probe followed by color 
flow Doppler examination of the proposed trajectory of needle inser­
tion to avoid injury to abdominal wall blood vessels (Video 493-23).
POCUS is used in the initial evaluation of acute renal failure and 
decreased urine output. Bladder ultrasound can rapidly identify 
presence or absence of urine in the bladder and confirm appropriate 
placement and function of a urinary catheter (Videos 493-24 and 
493-25). Bladder ultrasound is more reliable than automated bladder 

scanners for urinary retention, as bladder scanners can falsely report 
pelvic free fluid (i.e., ascites, cysts, small bowel obstruction) as elevated 
bladder volume. POCUS is effective to evaluate kidney size and echo­
genicity; identify renal cysts, large stones, and masses; and detect and 
grade hydronephrosis (Videos 493-26 to 493-28), thereby identifying 
obstructive uropathy.

POCUS can diagnose an abdominal aortic aneurysm (AAA) with 
high sensitivity and specificity (Videos 493-29 and 493-30). A pro­
tocol that emphasizes complete visualization of the abdominal aorta 
from celiac trunk through the iliac bifurcation in both transverse 
and longitudinal planes can provide a reliable evaluation of the aorta. 
POCUS use for AAA screening may reduce morbidity and mortality 
among high-risk patients.
POCUS has utility for evaluation of small-bowel function. Normally, 
the small bowel is partially filled with air that obscures visualization 
due to scattering of sound waves. When a small-bowel obstruction 
(SBO) develops, the air-filled loops of bowel become fluid-filled, per­
mitting visualization of the bowel walls. Diagnostic criteria for SBO 
by ultrasound include dilation of the bowel (diameter >2.5 cm), fluidfilled small-bowel loops (confirmed by appearance of plicae circularis 
at the perimeter), and hyperactive to-and-fro peristalsis within loops 
of small bowel (Video 493-31). Combining patient history, physical 
examination, and a systematic survey of all four quadrants by ultra­
sound, clinicians can diagnose SBO rapidly and reliably. For a new 
diagnosis of SBO, POCUS can expedite early intervention and surgical 
consultation. For recurrent SBO, POCUS can reduce repeat radiation 
exposure by CT scans and expedite initiation of medical management.
CHAPTER 493
■
■LOWER EXTREMITY DEEP-VEIN THROMBOSIS
Two-dimensional compression ultrasound is a rapid and accurate diag­
nostic technique for deep-vein thrombosis (DVT) that clinicians can 
learn after brief training programs. A point-of-care lower extremity com­
pression ultrasound exam yields similar diagnostic accuracy for detec­
tion of DVTs as traditional duplex or triplex ultrasound exams. DVTs 
commonly form at venous junctions because of high turbulence, and 
hence, compression ultrasound is performed at major branchpoints of 
the venous system. A perpendicular compression technique is required 
to ensure complete venous compression with wall-to-wall touching. A 
noncompressible vein is diagnostic of DVT (Video 493-32), and visual­
ization of intraluminal clot is not required to diagnose a DVT.
Point-of-Care Ultrasound
■
■SKIN AND SOFT TISSUE
POCUS allows rapid differentiation between skin and soft tissue infec­
tions (SSTIs) and reactive lymph nodes, seromas, hematomas, hernias, 
thrombophlebitis, DVT, cysts, and bursitis. For SSTIs, POCUS can 
reduce unnecessary attempts at incision and drainage and avoid delays 
in surgical intervention. SSTIs range from cellulitis to phlegmon, 
abscess, and necrotizing fasciitis. POCUS can accurately distinguish 
abscess from cellulitis, but diagnostic accuracy is more variable for 
necrotizing fasciitis. To diagnose cellulitis, POCUS identifies subcuta­
neous edema described as “cobblestoning” (Video 493-33). Abscesses 
appear as irregular, enclosed areas superficially with compressible 
material and absent central flow on color Doppler (Video 493-34).
■
■VASCULAR ACCESS
Current evidence supports use of ultrasound guidance for insertion of 
central venous catheters (CVCs) in the femoral, internal jugular, and 
axillary veins. Ultrasound guidance for insertion of internal jugular 
CVCs improves procedure success rates and reduces complications, 
particularly pneumothorax and arterial punctures. A preprocedure 
ultrasound survey identifies potential vessels to cannulate and can 
reveal unsuspected venous thrombosis, atypical anatomy, and venous 
stenosis. During insertion, real-time visualization of the needle tip 
reduces procedure attempts and needle redirections, which reduces 
the risk of complications. Sonographic confirmation of the guidewire 
in the target vein provides a safety check prior to venous dilation and 
insertion of the CVC.
For peripheral intravenous (PIV) catheter insertion, ultrasound 
can increase cannulation success rates while reducing puncture 
attempts, time to cannulation, and trauma to surrounding structures,

particularly in patients with anticipated difficult PIV placement or 
after failed attempts using standard techniques. Ultrasound identifies 
peripheral veins that are large, linear, and superficial, and real-time 
ultrasound guidance allows visualization of the needle tip entering the 
vessel lumen.

TRAINING
■
■PATHWAYS
Ultrasound training is a longitudinal process for clinicians as they 
progress through medical school, residency, and fellowship and enter 
clinical practice. Training recommendations for POCUS have been 
developed for different stages of medical education but with varying 
definitions of competence. Regardless of the clinical rank of the learner, 
competence in POCUS requires mastery of ultrasound knowledge 
(e.g., clinical indications, applications, limitations, artifacts), image 
acquisition, image interpretation, and clinical integration. Image acqui­
sition and interpretation skills are learned at varying rates and require 
deliberate practice.
■
■CERTIFICATION
Currently, there is no widely accepted certification for POCUS. Some 
residency and fellowship training programs, such as critical care and 
emergency medicine, require comprehensive training in POCUS, and 
hospitals generally grant POCUS privileges to physicians with board 
certification in these specialties. In contrast, internal medicine resi­
dency training does not require comprehensive POCUS training, and 
board certification in internal medicine does not imply competence 
in POCUS. Several internal medicine residency programs and profes­
sional societies have developed POCUS training courses.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
■
■CREDENTIALING AND PRIVILEGES
Clinical privileges are governed by the rules and regulations of indi­
vidual hospitals. A hospital’s credentialing and privileging committee 
is responsible for developing criteria for granting privileges for POCUS 
use, which may be guided by specialty-specific guidelines. Some hos­
pitals will designate a local POCUS expert to assess competence in 
POCUS prior to granting privileges for POCUS use in patient care. 
Hospital credentialing and privileging bodies may designate POCUS 
as a core privilege of a specialty (e.g., emergency medicine privileges 
include POCUS use) or as add-on privileges separate from the primary 
specialty’s skills. Some well-established POCUS applications, such as 
ultrasound-guided CVC insertion, are commonly designated as core 
privileges when use of ultrasound guidance is standard of care. In 
contrast, less common POCUS applications, such as peripheral nerve 
blocks, may be designated as add-on privileges.
FUTURE DIRECTIONS
The increasing portability and affordability of ultrasound devices have 
allowed internal medicine clinicians to incorporate POCUS into front­
line patient care. Increasing POCUS use in internal medicine requires 
development of effective training programs during residency training 
and for internists in-practice. Tele-ultrasound has shown promise for 
training clinicians and delivering patient care remotely. In the coming 
years, artificial intelligence will facilitate both POCUS training and use 
in clinical care, and remote serial monitoring of common conditions 
like heart failure may be possible with patients’ use of POCUS.
■
■FURTHER READING
American College of Emergency Physicians Ultrasound 
Guidelines: Emergency, point-of-care, and clinical ultrasound 
guidelines in medicine. Available at: https://www.acep.org/siteassets/
new-pdfs/policy-statements/ultrasound-guidelines--emergency-pointof-care-and-clinical-ultrasound-guidelines-in-medicine.pdf. Accessed 
December 3, 2024.
Mayo PH et al: American College of Chest Physicians/La Societe de 
Reanimation de Langue Francaise statement on competence in criti­
cal care ultrasonography. Chest 135:1050, 2009.
Qaseem A et al: Appropriate use of point-of-care ultrasonography in 
patients with acute dyspnea in emergency department or inpatient 

settings: A clinical guideline from the American College of Physicians. 
Ann Intern Med 174:985, 2021.
Soni NJ et al: Point-of-care ultrasound for hospitalists: A position 
statement of the Society of Hospital Medicine. J Hosp Med 14:E1, 
2019.
Soni NJ, Arntfield R, Kory PD: Point-of-Care Ultrasound, 2nd ed. 
Philadelphia, Elsevier/Saunders, 2019.
Spencer KT et al: Focused cardiac ultrasound: recommendations from 
the American Society of Echocardiography. J Am Soc Echocardiogr 
26:567, 2013.
VIDEO 493-1  Normal cardiac function.
VIDEO 493-2  Hyperdynamic cardiac function.
VIDEO 493-3  Reduced cardiac function.
VIDEO 493-4  Severely reduced cardiac function.
VIDEO 493-5  Acute right heart failure.
VIDEO 493-6  Cardiac tamponade.
VIDEO 493-7  Tricuspid valve regurgitation.
VIDEO 493-8  Mitral valve regurgitation.
VIDEO 493-9  Aortic valve regurgitation.
VIDEO 493-10  Tricuspid valve vegetation.
VIDEO 493-11  Lung atelectasis.
VIDEO 493-12  Small pleural effusion.
VIDEO 493-13  Moderate pleural effusion.
VIDEO 493-14  Large pleural effusion.
VIDEO 493-15  Homogenous pleural effusion.
VIDEO 493-16  Loculated pleural effusion.
VIDEO 493-17  Pleural sliding.
VIDEO 493-18  A-Line artifact.
VIDEO 493-19  B-Line artifact.
VIDEO 493-20  Lung consolidation.
VIDEO 493-21  Large-volume ascites.
VIDEO 493-22  Small-volume ascites.
VIDEO 493-23  Abdominal wall vessels with color Doppler.
VIDEO 493-24  Urinary catheter balloon in empty bladder.
VIDEO 493-25  Malfunctioning urinary catheter.
VIDEO 493-26  Mild hydronephrosis.
VIDEO 493-27  Moderate hydronephrosis.
VIDEO 493-28  Severe hydronephrosis.
VIDEO 493-29  Abdominal aortic aneurysm.
VIDEO 493-30  Abdominal aortic aneurysm.
VIDEO 493-31  Small-bowel obstruction.
VIDEO 493-32  Deep-vein thrombosis.
VIDEO 493-33  Cellulitis.
VIDEO 493-34  Simple abscess.

# 03 - 495 Complementary and Integrative Therapies and Practices

## 495 Complementary and Integrative Therapies and Practices

seen as intractable, even the most effective drugs will not work if physi­
cians fail to prescribe them and if patients fail to take them. Although 
the dominant forms of investigation in medicine seek cellular or 
molecular therapeutic targets to modify disease, behavioral sciences 
have revealed cognitive pathways that operate nearly as predictably as 
the genetic code. The opportunity for behavioral economics to improve 
health and health care delivery derives from its recognition of these 
behavioral pathways and the growing empirical evidence about how to 
best make use of them.

■
■FURTHER READING
Asch DA et al: Automated hovering in health care—Watching over the 
5000 hours. N Engl J Med 367:1, 2012.
Chater N, Loewenstein G: The i-frame and the s-frame: How focus­
ing on individual-level solutions has led behavioral public policy 
astray. Behav Brain Sci 46:e147, 2023.
Loewenstein G et al: Asymmetric paternalism to improve health 
behaviors. JAMA 298:2415, 2007.
Thaler RH et al: Choice architecture, in The Behavioral Foundations 
of Public Policy, E. Shafir (ed). Princeton, NJ, Princeton University 
Press, 2013, pp 428–439.
Volpp KG et al: Financial incentive-based approaches for weight loss: 
A randomized trial. JAMA 300:2631, 2008.
Helene M. Langevin

Complementary and 

Integrative Therapies 

and Practices
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
The search for health and improved well-being includes many treatments, 
practices, and systems of care that may have originated outside conven­
tional medicine but are gradually being folded into mainstream health 
care. The current health care system is fragmented, often emphasizing 
the pharmacologic treatment of disease alone, while often neglect­
ing the promotion, support, and, importantly, restoration of health. 
Though the disease-focused model is dominant in our research and 
health care ecosystem, there has been a longstanding awareness that 
many chronic diseases, including pain conditions, can be prevented 
or better managed by incorporating nonpharmacologic interventions 
such as nutrition, exercise, and stress management into care, with an 
emphasis on understanding the person as a whole. Many complemen­
tary practices follow this model, and there is preliminary evidence 
indicating that these approaches lead to improved self-care, a better 
personal sense of well-being, and a greater commitment to a healthy 
lifestyle. Integrative health emphasizes not only the integration of 
complementary and conventional care but also an integrative approach 
to treatment of the whole person. This includes expanding our under­
standing of how physiologic systems interact with one another and of 
the connections between physical, psychological, and social aspects of 
health. Integrative health also includes striving for a better understand­
ing of “salutogenesis” or pathogenesis in reverse, meaning the process 
by which health is restored when recovering from an injury, acute ill­
ness, or the exacerbation of a chronic disease, or when a “predisease” 
condition such as prediabetes or prehypertension is reversed through 
changes in behavior rather than pharmacologic treatment.
DEFINITIONS AND SCOPE
Complementary health therapies and practices include a broad range of 
practices, interventions, and natural products that are not typically part 
of conventional medical care (Table 495-1). The term complementary 

refers to the use of these practices together with conventional therapies 
and is increasingly preferred to the term alternative, which denotes 
usage as a substitute for standard care.
The term integrative health care refers to conventional and comple­
mentary therapies and practices used together in a coordinated way. 
Integrative health also emphasizes care of the whole person that aims to 
improve health in multiple interconnected domains: social, psychologi­
cal, and physical, including multiple organs and systems.
The term whole person health involves looking at the whole person—
not just separate organs or body systems—and considering multiple 
factors that promote either health or disease. It means helping and 
empowering individuals, families, communities, and populations to 
improve their health in multiple interconnected biological, behavioral, 
social, and environmental areas. Instead of treating a specific disease, 
whole person health focuses on restoring health, promoting resilience, 
and preventing diseases across a lifespan.
The use of integrative approaches to health and well-being has 
grown within care settings across the United States. Researchers are 
currently exploring the potential benefits of integrative health in a 
variety of situations, including pain management for military person­
nel and veterans, relief of symptoms in cancer patients and survivors, 
and programs to promote healthy behaviors.
Although complementary therapies and practices vary widely, it is 
useful to classify them by their primary therapeutic input, which may be 
dietary (e.g., diet, herbs), psychological (e.g., meditation), physical (e.g., 
massage, acupuncture), or the combination of psychological and physi­
cal (e.g., yoga, tai chi). Although some complementary health practices 
are recommended or provided by a physician or a complementary 
health care provider such as a chiropractor, acupuncturist, or naturo­
pathic practitioner, many of these practices are undertaken as “selfcare.” Although some are reimbursed, most are paid for out of pocket.
PATTERNS OF USE
The first large survey of use of complementary health practices was 
performed by David Eisenberg and associates in 1993. It surprised 
the medical community by showing that >30% of Americans use 
complementary health products and practices. Many surveys since that 
time have extended those conclusions. The National Health Interview 
Survey (NHIS), a large, national household survey in which thousands 
of Americans are interviewed about their health- and illness-related 
experiences, is conducted annually by the National Center for Health 
Statistics, a component of the Centers for Disease Control and Preven­
tion. This survey, which addressed the use of complementary health 
practices in 2002, 2007, 2012, 2017, and 2022 uses methods that create 
a nationally representative sample and has a sample size large enough 
to permit valid estimates about some subgroups.
An analysis of data from 27,651 adults in the most recent survey, 
which was conducted in 2022, evaluated changes in the U.S. adult use 
of seven complementary health therapies and practices over a 20-year 
period (from 2002 to 2022): yoga, meditation, massage therapy, chiro­
practic care, acupuncture, naturopathy, and guided imagery/progressive 
muscle relaxation. Over 20 years, U.S. adults not only increased their 
overall use of complementary health approaches but were also more 
likely to use them specifically for managing pain. In 2022, 36.7% of 
people used at least one of the seven approaches, compared to 19.2% in 
2002. Use of yoga, meditation, and massage therapy increased the most 
from 2002 to 2022. Use of yoga increased from 5% in 2002 to 15.8% in 
2022, rising from the fifth to the second most-used practice. Medita­
tion increased from 7.5% in 2002 to 17.3% in 2022, and it remained the 
most-used complementary health practice over the 20 years. The 2012 
survey, for which there are data about use of natural products, yielded 
the estimate that nonvitamin, nonmineral dietary supplements are used 
by ~18% of adults and 5% of children.
Americans often pay out-of-pocket for complementary health 
products and practices; the estimated out-of-pocket expenditure for 
complementary health practices in 2012 was $30.2 billion ($28.3 bil­
lion for adults and $1.9 billion for children), representing 1.1% of total 
health expenditures and 9.2% of out-of-pocket costs. On visits to com­
plementary practitioners, Americans spent $14.7 billion out of pocket,

TABLE 495-1  Glossary of Complementary and Integrative Health Therapies and Practices
Acupuncture
A family of procedures involving stimulation of defined anatomic points, a component of the major Asian medical traditions; most 
common application involves penetrating the skin with thin, solid, metallic needles that are manipulated by the hands or by electrical 
stimulation
Ayurvedic medicine
The major East Indian traditional medicine system; treatment combines products (mainly derived from plants, but may also include 
animal, metal, and mineral), diet, exercise, and lifestyle
Biofeedback
The use of electronic devices to help people learn to consciously control body functions such as breathing or heart rate
Chiropractic
Chiropractic care involves the adjustment of the spine and joints to influence the body’s nervous system and natural defense 
mechanisms to alleviate pain and improve general health; primarily used to treat back problems, headaches, nerve inflammation, muscle 
spasms, and other injuries and traumas
Dietary supplement
A product that is intended to supplement the diet, is taken by mouth, contains one or more dietary ingredients (including vitamins, 
minerals, herbs, amino acids, or certain other substances), and is labeled as being a dietary supplement
Homeopathy
A medical system with origins in Germany that is based on a core belief in the theory of “like cures like”—compounds that produce 
certain syndromes, if administered in very diluted solutions, will be curative
Hypnosis
The induction of an altered state of consciousness characterized by increased responsiveness to suggestion
Massage
Manual therapies that manipulate muscle and connective tissues to enhance the function of those tissues and promote muscle 
relaxation and well-being
Meditation
A group of practices, largely based in Eastern spiritual traditions, intended to focus or control attention and obtain greater awareness of 
the present moment, or mindfulness
Mind and body practices
A large and diverse group of procedures or techniques that are administered or taught by a trained practitioner or teacher; examples 
include acupuncture, massage therapy, meditation, relaxation techniques, spinal manipulation, tai chi, and yoga
Natural products
A variety of products such as herbs (also known as botanicals), vitamins and minerals, and probiotics, which are widely marketed, 
readily available to consumers, and often sold as dietary supplements
Naturopathy
A clinical discipline that emphasizes a holistic approach to the patient, herbal medications, diet, and exercise; practitioners have 
degrees as doctors of naturopathy
Osteopathy
A clinical discipline, now incorporated into mainstream medicine, that historically emphasized spinal manipulative techniques to relieve 
pain, restore function, and promote overall health
Qigong
A mind and body practice originating in China that involves using exercises to optimize energy within the body, mind, and spirit, with the 
goal of improving and maintaining health and well-being
Relaxation techniques
A number of practices such as progressive relaxation, guided imagery, biofeedback, self-hypnosis, and deep breathing exercises, with 
the goal of producing the body’s natural relaxation response, characterized by slower breathing, lower blood pressure, and a feeling of 
increased well-being
Spinal manipulation, 
osteopathic manipulation
A technique where practitioners use their hands or a device to apply a controlled thrust (i.e., a force of a specific magnitude or degree in 
a specific direction) to a joint of the spine
Tai chi
A mind and body practice originating in China that involves slow, gentle movements and sometimes is described as “moving meditation”
Traditional Chinese medicine
A medical system that uses acupuncture, herbal mixtures, massage, exercise, and diet
which is almost 30% of what they spent out of pocket on services by 
conventional physicians ($49.6 billion). On natural products, such 
as dietary supplements, Americans spent $12.8 billion out of pocket, 
which was about one-quarter (24%) of what they spent out of pocket 
on prescription drugs ($54.1 billion).
Trends are even more striking for pain conditions. According to the 
NHIS surveys, painful conditions are the most common reasons why 
American adults use complementary health products and practices. 
About 40 million American adults experience severe pain in any given 
year, and they spend >$14 billion out of pocket on complementary 
therapies to manage their pain. A recent analysis of NHIS data showed a 
notable rise in the proportion of U.S. adults using complementary health 
approaches specifically for pain management. Among participants using 
any of the complementary health approaches, the percentage reporting 
use for pain management increased from 42.3% in 2002 to 49.2% in 2022.
Some patients seek out complementary health practitioners because 
they offer greater personal attention. For others, therapies and prac­
tices perceived as outside the mainstream reflect a “self-help” approach 
to health and well-being or satisfy a search for “natural” or less invasive 
alternatives. Since dietary supplements are labeled as “natural,” they are 
often believed, incorrectly, to be inherently healthy.
CATEGORIES OF COMPLEMENTARY 
AND INTEGRATIVE HEALTH THERAPIES 
AND PRACTICES BASED ON PRIMARY 
THERAPEUTIC INPUT
■
■PRIMARY DIETARY INPUT
Natural products, including plant and animal products, have a long and 
impressive history as sources of medicine and as important resources 

CHAPTER 495
Complementary and Integrative Therapies and Practices  
for biologic research. Whether as herbal supplements or as part of a 
diet, natural products are frequently consumed as a complex mixture 
of substances. This complexity can be further amplified by potential 
interactions with endogenous metabolic pathways, including those 
associated with the microbiome. The result is a collection of natural 
products and their metabolites that, individually and/or collectively, 
are associated with a network of biologic activity. Importantly, in addi­
tion to direct action on biologic targets, the activity of natural products 
can be influenced by an individual’s diet, health, and metagenomic 
background. Although much remains to be understood about mecha­
nisms of action, results of research on some natural products for a few 
conditions appear promising. In addition, in the 2012 NHIS, users of 
natural product supplements were twice as likely to report taking the 
natural product for a general well-being reason than for treatment of 
a specific health condition (88.9 vs 44.9%, respectively). Although to 
date, research on natural products has focused on their use for specific 
diseases as outlined below, a better understanding is needed about how 
natural products, including food, can be used most effectively to sup­
port health.
Cannabinoids 
An increasing amount of attention has been given 
recently to the nonpsychogenic effects of cannabinoids, such as can­
nabidiol (CBD), and terpenes found in the cannabis plant on chronic 
pain, particularly neuropathic pain; studies have found some limited 
evidence that these medicines produced better pain relief than place­
bos. Cannabinoids (cannabis extract, synthetic tetrahydrocannabinol 
[THC]) have been studied for therapeutic effects in multiple sclerosis 
(MS) and may relieve spasticity as well as pain in people with MS; how­
ever, no marijuana-derived medications are approved by the U.S. Food 
and Drug Administration (FDA) to treat MS. Sativex, an oral mucosal 
spray containing a mixture of THC and CBD, has received regulatory

approval in >25 countries outside the United States for the treatment 
of spasticity (muscle stiffness/spasm) due to MS. Sativex is currently 
licensed in the United Kingdom for use as an add-on treatment for 
MS-related spasticity when people have shown inadequate response 
to other symptomatic treatments. Importantly, the psychoactive prop­
erties and other potential adverse effects of preparations containing 
cannabinoids need to be considered, including interactions with other 
medications and natural products; more research is needed in this area.

Melatonin 
Melatonin has been shown to help reduce anxiety in 
patients who are about to have surgery and may be as effective as 
standard treatment with midazolam in reducing preoperative anxiety. 
Findings from clinical trials support the use of melatonin supplements 
for sleep problems caused by shift work or jet lag and for improving 
sleep-onset latency and daytime sleepiness in people with insomnia. 
However, there are safety concerns about the use of melatonin by chil­
dren and teenagers. U.S. sales of melatonin increased by about 150% 
during the COVID-19 pandemic, and the number of reports to U.S. 
poison control centers about pediatric melatonin ingestion increased 
from 8337 in 2012 to 52,563 in 2021. Further, according to a study pub­
lished in JAMA, a majority of melatonin “gummy” products were inac­
curately labeled, with most products exceeding the declared amount of 
melatonin and CBD.
Omega-3 Fatty Acids 
Clinical trials on rheumatoid arthritis (RA) 
have found that fish oil supplements can help alleviate tender joints and 
morning stiffness and reduce the daily nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory 
drug (NSAID) requirement of RA patients; however, data are not as 
definitive for other pain conditions. Gamma-linolenic acid (GLA) is 
an omega-6 fatty acid found in the oils from some plants, including 
evening primrose (Oenothera biennis), borage (Borago officinalis), 
and black currant (Ribes nigrum). Although oils containing GLA may 
have some benefit in relieving RA symptoms, only a few studies have 
been conducted on each of the oils. At present, it is uncertain whether 
omega-3 fatty acid supplementation is useful for depression. Some 
studies have shown small effects in adjunctive therapy in patients 
with a diagnosis of major depressive disorder (MDD) and in depres­
sive patients without a diagnosis of MDD; however, most trials have 
been adjunctive studies. Controlled trials of omega-3 fatty acids as 
monotherapy are inconclusive compared to standard antidepressant 
medicines, and it remains unclear whether a mechanism is present to 
suggest that a pharmacologic or biologic antidepressant effect exists. 
Furthermore, there is evidence that a high dosage of fish oil supple­
mentation is associated with a significant increased risk of atrial fibril­
lation (AF) compared with placebo.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
Antioxidants 
Findings from the Age-Related Eye Disease Studies 
(AREDS and AREDS2) suggest that dietary supplementation with 
antioxidant vitamins may slow the progression of age-related macular 
degeneration (AMD). Compared to the original AREDS formulation, 
the AREDS2 formulation replaced beta-carotene with lutein and zea­
xanthin due to increased risk of cancer in smokers taking high dose 
beta-carotene. Of note, in AREDS2, supplementation with lutein/
zeaxanthin only appeared to be beneficial in participants with low 
dietary lutein and zeaxanthin. In a similar vein, a study using baseline 
data from the AREDS cohort reported that individuals eating healthier 
diets, characterized by higher intake of vegetables, whole grains, and 
seafoods, compared to those eating less healthy “Western” diets, were 
less likely to show signs of early AMD. It is therefore unclear at present 
whether the AREDS formula should be recommended for the general 
population regardless of diet.
Challenges of Research on Natural Products 
One challenge in 
this area is the extremely varied doses of natural products that are sold 
over the counter and used without much guidance or evidence of effi­
cacy. We also know from research on vitamins that “more is not neces­
sarily better” and that taking a “natural” substance such as a vitamin 
in quantities that greatly exceed what is found in food can be harmful.
Additional challenges in the assessment of plant products include 
their complexity and variability, including possible instability of active 

components or the presence of impurities, conflicting or unreliable 
conclusions in the literature, and low statistical power of studies. Fur­
ther, there is a paucity of data on the safety of many products, including 
the safety of their use in a twenty-first-century context (e.g., if taken 
with modern prescription drugs) and their appropriate use in the con­
text of traditional or indigenous practices.
Regulation 
There is an important distinction between natural 
products sold as dietary supplements and drugs developed from 
natural sources that are used to treat specific diseases. The Dietary 
Supplement Health and Education Act (DSHEA), passed in 1994, gives 
authority to the FDA to regulate dietary supplements, but with expecta­
tions that differ in many respects from the regulation of drugs or food 
additives. Purveyors of dietary supplements cannot claim that they 
prevent or treat any disease. They can, however, claim that they main­
tain “normal structure and function” of body systems. For example, 
a product cannot claim to treat arthritis, but it can claim to maintain 
“normal joint health.”
Homeopathic products predate FDA drug regulations and are sold 
with no requirement that they be proved effective. Although homeo­
pathic products are widely believed to be safe because they are highly 
dilute, one product, a nasal spray called Zicam, was withdrawn from 
the market when it was found to produce anosmia, probably because of 
significant zinc content. In January 2017, the FDA warned consumers 
about homeopathic teething tablets containing belladonna that pose a 
serious risk to infants and children.
Regulation of advertising and marketing claims is the purview of 
the Federal Trade Commission (FTC). The FTC does take legal action 
against promoters or websites that advertise or sell dietary supplements 
with false or deceptive statements. Misleading marketing of dietary 
supplements, homeopathic products, and indeed other complementary 
health products and practices contributes to the very significant risk 
that individuals will use them instead of effective conventional modali­
ties. For example, in April 2020, the FTC sent warning letters to several 
companies allegedly selling unapproved products—some of which 
included high-dose dietary supplements—that may violate federal law 
by making deceptive or scientifically unsupported claims about their 
ability to treat or cure COVID-19.
Inherent Toxicity 
Although the public may believe that “natu­
ral” equates with “safe,” it is abundantly clear that natural products 
can be toxic. Misidentification of medicinal mushrooms has led to 
liver failure. Contamination of tryptophan supplements caused the 
eosinophilia-myalgia syndrome. Herbal products containing particular 
species of Aristolochia were associated with genitourinary malignan­
cies and interstitial nephritis. In 2013, dietary supplements containing 
1,3-dimethylamylamine (DMAA), often touted as a “natural” stimu­
lant, led to cardiovascular problems, including heart attacks. Among 
the most controversial dietary supplements is Ephedra sinica, or ma 
huang, a product used in traditional Chinese medicine for short-term 
treatment of asthma and bronchial congestion. The scientific basis for 
these indications was revealed when ephedra was shown to contain 
ephedrine alkaloids, especially ephedrine and pseudoephedrine. With 
the promulgation of the DSHEA regulations, supplements containing 
ephedra and herbs rich in caffeine sold widely in the U.S. marketplace 
because of their claims to promote weight loss and enhance athletic 
performance. Reports of severe and fatal adverse events associated with 
use of ephedra-containing products led to an evidence-based review of 
the data surrounding them, and in 2004, the FDA banned their sale in 
the United States.
A major current concern with dietary supplements is adulteration 
with pharmacologically active compounds. Multi-ingredient products 
marketed for weight loss, bodybuilding, “sexual health,” and athletic 
performance are of particular concern. Recent FDA recalls have 
involved contamination with steroids, diuretics, stimulants, and phos­
phodiesterase type 5 inhibitors.
Herb-Drug Interactions 
A number of natural products have 
potential impacts on the metabolism of drugs. This effect was illustrated 
most compellingly with the demonstration in 2000 that consumption

TABLE 495-2  Resources for Dietary Supplement–Drug Interactions
National Institutes of Health National Center for Complementary and 
Integrative Health (NCCIH)
https://www.nccih.nih.gov/health/know-science/how-medications-supplements-

interact
The National Institutes of Health NCCIH Know the Science initiative provides 
information for patients about complex scientific health topics such as drugsupplement interactions.
Medscape
http://www.medscape.com/druginfo/druginterchecker?cid=med
This website is maintained by WebMD and includes a free drug interaction 
checker tool that provides information on interactions between two or more 
drugs, herbals, and/or dietary supplements.
NatMed
https://naturalmedicines.therapeuticresearch.com/tools/interaction-checker.aspx
This website provides an interactive natural product–drug interaction checker 
tool that identifies interactions between drugs and natural products, including 
herbals and dietary supplements. This service is available by subscription.
of St. John’s wort interferes with the bioavailability of the HIV protease 
inhibitor indinavir. Later studies showed its similar interference with 
metabolism of topoisomerase inhibitors such as irinotecan and with 
cyclosporine and many other drugs. The breadth of interference stems 
from the ability of hyperforin in St. John’s wort to upregulate expression 
of the pregnane X receptor, a promiscuous nuclear regulatory factor 
that promotes the expression of many hepatic oxidative, conjugative, 
and efflux enzymes involved in drug and food metabolism.
Because of the large number of compounds that alter drug metabo­
lism and the large number of agents some patients are taking, identifi­
cation of all potential interactions can be a daunting task. Several useful 
Web resources are available as information sources (Table 495-2). 
Clearly, attention to this problem is particularly important with drugs 
with a narrow therapeutic index, such as anticoagulants, antiseizure 
medications, antibiotics, immunosuppressants, and cancer chemo­
therapeutic agents. Although there are many examples of substances 
of natural origin successfully used as pharmaceutical drugs, in general, 
natural products ingested as food or herbal teas, rather than concen­
trated extracts, are less likely to cause harm.
■
■PRIMARY PSYCHOLOGICAL INPUT
Therapies and practices whose primary therapeutic input is predomi­
nantly mental include conventional types of psychotherapy, such as 
cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), and complementary practices, 
such as meditation and mindfulness-based stress reduction (MBSR). 
Relaxation techniques, including biofeedback-assisted relaxation, also 
fall into this category. The boundary between conventional and com­
plementary can be blurred, as CBT programs, for example, frequently 
incorporate elements of MBSR and relaxation techniques. These 
therapies and practices are being gradually integrated into aspects of 
conventional care, such as cardiac rehabilitation programs, and are 
playing an increasingly recognized role in the management of pain, as 
well as stress and sleep disturbances.
Cognitive Behavioral Therapy (CBT) 
The American College 
of Physicians practice guidelines (2016) strongly recommend the use 
of CBT for insomnia (also called CBT-I) as the initial treatment for 
chronic insomnia. Although CBT-I often includes relaxation tech­
niques, it is not clear whether relaxation alone is beneficial. Various 
online applications are increasing the accessibility of these techniques 
at low cost.
Mindfulness-Based Stress Reduction (MBSR) 
Mindfulness 
meditation has been found to significantly reduce pain in experimen­
tal and clinical settings and to improve a wide spectrum of clinically 
relevant cognitive and health outcomes, including low-back pain and 
fibromyalgia. Recent findings from neuroimaging and randomized 
controlled trials confirm that mindfulness meditation reduces pain 
by engaging multiple, unique, nonopioidergic mechanisms that are 

distinct from placebo and that vary across meditative training level. 
There is some growing evidence that mindfulness meditation can have 
a beneficial effect on anxiety and help people recover from substance 
use disorders.

Hypnosis 
Findings from a few studies have demonstrated that train­
ing patients in the use of self-hypnosis significantly reduced their need 
for sedatives and analgesia when undergoing interventional radiologic 
procedures. Some studies also have suggested that hypnosis may be help­
ful for anxiety and health-related quality of life in people with irritable 
bowel syndrome (IBS). There is some evidence to suggest that hypno­
therapy may improve smoking cessation, but data are not definitive.
Relaxation Techniques 
Relaxation techniques, including biofeed­
back and progressive muscle relaxation, may be helpful in managing a 
variety of stress-related health conditions, including anxiety associated 
with ongoing health problems and in those who are having medical 
procedures. Diaphragmatic breathing exercises may modestly lower 
blood pressure, reduce levels of cortisol, and reduce glycemia in people 
with type 2 diabetes. The efficacy of biofeedback has been evaluated in 
numerous studies for tension headaches, with positive results. Several 
studies have shown that biofeedback decreased the frequency of both 
pediatric and adult migraines, with some showing an effect lasting 
over an average follow-up phase of 17 months. Evidence suggests that 
relaxation techniques may also provide some benefit for symptoms of 
posttraumatic stress disorder and help reduce occupational stress in 
health care workers. Clinical practice guidelines issued by the Ameri­
can Cancer Society on the evidence-based use of integrative therapies 
during and after breast cancer treatment recommend yoga for anxiety 
and stress reduction. For some of these conditions, relaxation tech­
niques are used as an adjunct to other forms of treatment.
CHAPTER 495
■
■PRIMARY PHYSICAL INPUT
A physical therapeutic input can be delivered manually (e.g., massage) 
or using a device (e.g., acupuncture) or can be generated by the patient 
(e.g., exercise).
Complementary and Integrative Therapies and Practices  
Acupuncture 
The role of acupuncture in pain management has 
been controversial for decades, with critics pointing out its “prescien­
tific” theoretical basis, and indeed, the rationale for the use of specific 
“acupuncture points” remains to be established. However, recent largescale meta-analyses have demonstrated acupuncture to be superior to 
both usual care and sham acupuncture for chronic musculoskeletal 
pain, headache, and osteoarthritis (OA), with beneficial treatment 
effects persisting for up to 12 months. Clinical practice guidelines 
issued by the American College of Rheumatology and the Arthritis 
Foundation conditionally recommend acupuncture for knee, hip, and/
or hand OA. The most recent (2017) American College of Physicians 
clinical guidelines recommend acupuncture as one of the initial treat­
ment options for patients with acute, subacute, and chronic low-back 
pain. Acupuncture may provide a modest reduction in symptoms of 
depression, particularly when compared with no treatment or a con­
trol. Acupuncture or electroacupuncture may be an appropriate addi­
tion to drug treatment for managing chemotherapy-induced nausea 
and vomiting in patients with cancer. Clinical guidelines issued by the 
Society for Integrative Oncology and the American Society of Clinical 
Oncology in 2022 found intermediate level of evidence (with moderate 
strength) to recommend that acupuncture, reflexology, acupressure, or 
massage may help relieve pain in people with cancer. Acupuncture may 
relieve symptoms of allergic rhinitis. Clinical practice guidelines from 
the American Academy of Otolaryngology–Head and Neck Surgery 
include acupuncture among the options that health care providers may 
offer to interested patients with allergic rhinitis.
Spinal Manipulation 
The role of both osteopathic and chiroprac­
tic spinal manipulative therapies (SMTs) in management of low-back 
pain also has been the subject of a number of carefully performed tri­
als and many systematic reviews. Conclusions are not consistent, but 
the American College of Physicians guidelines conclude that spinal 
manipulation has a small effect on improving function and pain com­
pared with control—either a sham manipulation or an inert treatment.

Although evidence for spinal manipulation for chronic low-back pain 
is graded as low quality, the recommendation for consideration of 
nonpharmacologic treatment including spinal manipulation is graded 
as a strong recommendation, reflecting increasing concern with the 
impact of chronic opioid use for low-back pain. The evidence of benefit 
of spinal manipulation for neck pain is not as extensive, and continued 
concern that cervical manipulation may occasionally precipitate vascu­
lar injury clouds a contentious debate.

Massage 
Low- to moderate-quality evidence suggests that massage 
therapy is superior to nonactive therapies in reducing arthritis pain 
and improving functional outcomes. Massage may provide short-term 
relief from low-back pain, but the evidence is not of high quality. There 
is some evidence that massage has a positive effect on migraine, tension 
headaches, and neck pain.
■
■COMBINED PSYCHOLOGICAL AND 

PHYSICAL INPUT
The primary therapeutic input for other mind and body practices is 
a combination of physical and psychological. Examples of practices 
in this category include yoga and tai chi, which combine movement, 
physical postures, and meditation.
Yoga 
Yoga can be beneficial for patients with fibromyalgia or 
chronic low-back pain, and yoga compared to nonexercise controls 
results in small to moderate improvements in back-related function 
at 3 and 6 months. There is overall evidence that yoga benefits people’s 
general well-being by relieving stress, supporting good health habits, and 
improving mental/emotional health and sleep. Yoga can also help with 
quitting smoking, anxiety or depressive symptoms associated with dif­
ficult life situations, and quality of life for people with chronic diseases.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
Tai Chi 
Clinical practice guidelines issued by the American College 
of Rheumatology and the Arthritis Foundation strongly recommend 
tai chi, along with other nondrug approaches such as self-management 
programs, for managing knee and/or hip OA. Tai chi has been shown 
to improve overall motor function, including balance and stability in 
older adults. Tai chi may help improve sleep quality in individuals with 
mild insomnia. Tai chi also has been shown to improve quality of life in 
people with heart disease, cancer, and other chronic illnesses.
MULTICOMPONENT THERAPIES 

AND SYSTEMS
Multicomponent approaches to health comprise two or more interven­
tions such as lifestyle changes, physical rehabilitation, psychotherapy 
complementary health practices, and conventional medicine in various 
combinations, with an emphasis on whole person health. Complemen­
tary health therapies and practices are often multicomponent in nature, 
both in traditional health systems (e.g., traditional Chinese medicine, 
naturopathy) and in modern integrative practice. The U.S. Veterans 
Health Administration uses a multicomponent model of pain care that 
emphasizes nonpharmacologic methods, both conventional (e.g., physi­
cal therapy, CBT) and complementary (e.g., yoga, acupuncture), and 
may also include nutrition consultations. Several medical systems, such 
as chiropractic, osteopathy, naturopathy, and homeopathy, that arose in 
the late nineteenth century continue to be practiced today. Osteopathic 
medicine is mostly integrated into conventional medicine, with the addi­
tion of specific osteopathic musculoskeletal manipulation techniques. 
While homeopathy and naturopathy have remained largely separate from 
mainstream medicine, chiropractic care is increasingly available in some 
conventional care settings. A number of multicomponent systems, often 
called “whole health” systems, such as traditional Chinese medicine, 
Ayurveda, and homeopathy, use a diagnostic and therapeutic framework 
that is different from that of conventional medicine, which has posed 
additional challenges to their rigorous investigation.
Naturopathy 
Naturopathy, or naturopathic medicine, is a multi­
component therapeutic system based on philosophical principles that 
guide practice. Naturopaths prescribe conventional and unconven­
tional diagnostic tests and medications, with an emphasis on relatively 
low doses of drugs, herbal medicines, healthy diet, and exercise.

Chiropractic 
The practice of chiropractic care, founded by David 
Palmer in 1895, is the most widespread practitioner-based comple­
mentary health practice in the United States. Although the scope of 
practice varies widely, chiropractic practice emphasizes manual thera­
pies for treatment of musculoskeletal complaints.
Osteopathic Medicine 
Founded in 1892 by the physician Andrew 
Taylor Still, osteopathic medicine was originally based on the belief 
that manipulation of soft tissue and bone can correct a wide range 
of diseases of the musculoskeletal and other organ systems. Over the 
ensuing century, the osteopathic profession has welcomed increasing 
integration with conventional medicine. Today, the postgraduate train­
ing, practice, credentialing, and licensure of osteopathic physicians are 
virtually indistinguishable from those of allopathic physicians. Osteo­
pathic medical schools, however, include training in manual therapies, 
particularly spinal manipulation, as well as diagnostic methods based 
on palpation of musculoskeletal tissues that are not part of conven­
tional medical education.
Homeopathy 
The theoretical framework of homeopathy is based 
on two unconventional principles: “like cures like,” the notion that a 
disease can be cured by a substance that produces similar symptoms 
in healthy people; and the “law of minimum dose,” the notion that 
the lower the dose of the medication, the greater its effectiveness. 
Although the current lack of biologic underpinning for these prin­
ciples has seriously limited the rationale for their use, the diagnostic 
framework of homeopathy could be the source of new insights that 
could be explored. As previously discussed, the regulatory framework 
for homeopathic remedies differs from that for dietary supplements, 
in that homeopathic products are regulated as drugs under the Federal 
Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act and are subject to the same require­
ments related to approval, adulteration, and misbranding as other drug 
products. There are currently no homeopathic products approved by 
the FDA. Homeopathic remedies are widely available and commonly 
recommended by naturopathic physicians, chiropractors, and other 
licensed and unlicensed practitioners.
Challenges of Clinical Research on Multicomponent Therapies 
and Systems 
Classic randomized controlled trial (RCT) designs 
may not be well suited for research on multicomponent complemen­
tary interventions and systems such as naturopathy and Ayurvedic 
medicine. The dynamic relationships among an array of factors that 
affect health and well-being is inherent to the philosophy of these 
systems of care and poses methodologic challenges to the effec­
tive application of conventional RCT design. Pragmatic comparative 
effectiveness designs with “usual care” comparators are widely used to 
study these types of interventions, and trials may need to take into account 
the individualization of interventions and the underlying theories of 
these multicomponent systems. Thus, a key component of research on 
multicomponent therapeutic systems is the development of validated 
and reproducible “manualized” treatment protocols allowing for some 
flexibility and individual patient care. Pragmatic studies that compare 
multicomponent treatments with usual care cannot determine which 
treatment components are responsible for benefits, but other kinds of 
translational studies can address this issue.
THERAPEUTIC OUTPUT—SYSTEMS 
IMPACTED AND CHALLENGES OF 
MECHANISTIC RESEARCH
Complementary and integrative interventions whose therapeutic input 
is dietary, psychological, and/or physical may exert their effects, or 
therapeutic output, through a variety of mechanisms and physiologic 
systems. For example, peppermint oil may relieve pain associated with 
IBS by directly relaxing gastrointestinal smooth muscle, probiotics 
may have effects on the nervous system as well as the gut, and some 
components of traditional Chinese medicine, as well as omega-3 fatty 
acids and their derivatives, have immune-mediated anti-inflammatory 
effects. Multicomponent interventions with psychological and/or phys­
ical therapeutic input such as meditation and acupuncture can have 
effects on the nervous system and may also target other body systems

affected by the pain condition; for example, tai chi may improve bal­
ance and stability by increasing flexibility and core strength, and the 
stretching involved in yoga may improve low-back pain by reducing 
connective tissue inflammation. For all types of therapeutic input, 
biopsychosocial interactions also may be important; for example, par­
ticipation in an integrative group therapy pain management program 
may provide tools to help relieve symptoms of anxiety and depression 
as well as pain.
Deepening the scientific understanding of the connections that exist 
across domains of human health is important to better understand 
how conditions interrelate, identify multicomponent interventions that 
address these problems, and increase the support of patients through 
the full continuum of their health experience, including the return to 
health. Studies of multicomponent interventions often require multi­
disciplinary expertise and use state-of-the-art techniques in areas such 
as neuroscience, immunology, pharmacognosy, proteomics, genetics, 
and epigenomics. Further, there are limited preclinical models for some 
complementary health interventions (e.g., no relevant animal model 
for meditative movement practices such as yoga or tai chi). Objective, 
validated measurement tools are essential, as are processes and proce­
dures to ensure quality control, whether the intervention is a mind and 
body practice or a natural product.
PATIENT AND PROVIDER RESOURCES
Physicians regularly face difficult challenges in providing patients with 
advice and education about complementary health therapies and prac­
tices. Of particular concern to all physicians are practices of uncertain 
safety and practices that raise inappropriate hopes. Cancer therapies, 
antiaging regimens, weight-loss programs, and products that claim to 
improve sexual function or athletic performance are frequently targeted 
for excessive claims and irresponsible marketing. A number of Internet 
resources provide critical tools for patient education (Table 495-3). 
TABLE 495-3  Internet Resources on Complementary and Integrative 
Health Approaches
The Cochrane Collaboration Complementary Medicine Reviews
This website offers rigorous systematic reviews of mainstream and 
complementary health interventions using standardized methods. It includes 
>800 reviews of complementary health practices. Complete reviews require 
institutional or individual subscription, but summaries are available to the public.
http://www.cochrane.org/evidence
MedlinePlus All Herbs and Supplements, A–Z List
MedlinePlus Complementary and Integrative Medicine
MedlinePlus Dietary Supplements
These National Library of Medicine (NLM) Web pages provide an A–Z database 
of science-based information on herbal and dietary supplements; basic facts 
about complementary and integrative health practices; and federal government 
sources on information about using natural products, dietary supplements, 
medicinal plants, and other complementary health modalities.
http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/druginfo/herb_All.html
https://medlineplus.gov/complementaryandintegrativemedicine.html
http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/dietarysupplements.html
National Institutes of Health National Center for Complementary and 
Integrative Health (NCCIH)
This National Institutes of Health NCCIH website contains information for 
consumers and health care providers on many aspects of complementary and 
integrative health products and practices. Downloadable information sheets 
include short summaries of complementary health approaches, uses and risks of 
herbal therapies, and advice on wise use of dietary supplements.
http://www.nccih.nih.gov
Resources for Health Care Providers: http://www.nccih.nih.gov/health/providers
NCCIH Clinical Digest e-Newsletter: http://www.nccih.nih.gov/health/providers/
digest
Continuing medical education lectures: http://www.nccih.nih.gov/training/
videolectures
Herbs at a Glance fact sheets: https://www.nccih.nih.gov/health/herbsataglance

Because many complementary health products and practices are used 
as self-care and because many patients research these interventions 
extensively on the Internet, directing patients to responsible websites 
can often be very helpful.

The scientific evidence regarding complementary therapies is frag­
mentary and incomplete. Nonetheless, in some areas, particularly pain 
management, it is increasingly possible to perform the kind of rigorous 
systematic reviews of complementary health therapies and practices 
that are the cornerstone of evidence-based medicine. A particularly 
valuable resource in this respect is the Cochrane Collaboration, which 
has performed >800 systematic reviews of complementary health prac­
tices. Practitioners will find this a valuable resource to answer patient 
questions. Practice guidelines, particularly for pain management, are 
also available from several professional organizations. Links to these 
resources are provided in Table 495-3.
SUMMARY
The frequent use of complementary and integrative health therapies 
and practices reflects an active interest among the public in improving 
health and well-being of the whole person. The current health care 
system is fragmented, with diseases and comorbid conditions mostly 
treated separately, sometimes with drugs that interact with one another. 
An important step in whole person health care is considering health 
and disease not as separate states but as a bidirectional continuum and 
understanding how complementary and integrative therapies and prac­
tices, which are often multicomponent in nature, consider a patient’s 
long-term recovery and overall health.
CHAPTER 495
Acknowledgment
Dr. Josephine Briggs contributed to this chapter in prior editions and 
some material from prior edition chapters has been retained here.
■
■FURTHER READING
Black LI et al: Use of complementary health approaches among children 
Complementary and Integrative Therapies and Practices  
aged 4–17 years in the United States: National Health Interview Survey, 
2007-2012. National health statistics reports; no 78. Hyattsville, MD, 
National Center for Health Statistics, 2015.
Eisenberg DM et al: Trends in alternative medicine use in the United 
States, 1990–1997: Results of a follow-up national survey. JAMA 
280:1569, 1998.
Gaston TE et al: “Natural” is not synonymous with “safe”: Toxicity 
of natural products alone and in combination with pharmaceutical 
agents. Regul Toxicol Pharmacol 113:104642, 2020.
Ijaz N et al: Whole systems research methods in health care: A scoping 
review. J Altern Complement Med 25:S21, 2019.
Nahin RL et al: Expenditures on complementary health approaches: 
United States, 2012. Natl Health Stat Rep 95:1, 2016.
Nahin RL et al: Use of complementary health approaches overall and 
for pain management by US adults. JAMA 331:613, 2024.
Paige NM et al: Association of spinal manipulative therapy with clini­
cal benefit and harm for acute low back pain: Systematic review and 
meta-analysis. JAMA 317:1451, 2017.
Qaseem A et al: Noninvasive treatments for acute, subacute, and 
chronic low back pain: A clinical practice guideline from the American 
College of Physicians. Ann Intern Med 166:514, 2017.
Skelly AC et al: Noninvasive nonpharmacological treatment for 
chronic pain: A systematic review up-date. Comparative Effective­
ness Review No. 227. AHRQ Publication No. 20-EHC009. Rockville, 
MD, Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality; April 2020.
Vickers AJ et al: Acupuncture for chronic pain: Update of an indi­
vidual patient data meta-analysis. J Pain 19:455, 2018.

# 04 - 496 Placebo and Nocebo Effects

## 496 Placebo and Nocebo Effects

Kathryn T. Hall, Alia J. Crum

Placebo and Nocebo 

Effects
Placebos are sham versions of drugs, devices, or surgeries that lack 
the active compound, function, or procedure they are designed to 
simulate (Table 496-1). Administration of these “inactive” treatments 
can have significant therapeutic benefits called placebo effects, which 
accounts for their use as controls in clinical trials as comparators for 
active drugs, devices, or surgical interventions. Key drivers of placebo 
effects include the patient’s expectation and conscious or subconscious 
conditioning. Psychological studies demonstrated that expectations are 
shaped by factors intrinsic to the patient, including their past experi­
ences and core beliefs or mindsets, and extrinsic factors including 
environmental cues (e.g., white coat), clinical practice (e.g., physi­
cal examination), and information received about a treatment (e.g., 
expected benefits or side effects). Neuroimaging studies have identified 
consistent changes in the brain in response to placebo treatment that 
suggest that placebo effects work by integrating incoming information 
about extrinsic factors with prior experience and mindsets to update 
expectations of treatment benefit. When expectations are negative, 
TABLE 496-1  Glossary of Terms commonly used in Placebo Studies
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
TERM
DEFINITION
Additivity in clinical trials The assumption that placebo and drug treatment responses are additive is a fundamental assumption in clinical trials. However, there are 
notable exceptions to this assumption in pharmacogenomic and brain imaging studies where subsets of the population have been reported 
to have differential effects in placebo and drug treatment arms of a trial.
Development and culture
Our caregivers and social environment influence the psychological processes that underlie the placebo effect. These processes are 
continuously shaped throughout life by the ideas, institutions, and interactions that constitute the culture in which we live.
Expectation
A specific belief about the future based on a prediction of what is most likely to happen. Examples: “This drug will relieve my pain”; “I will 
experience side effects.”
Gene-(drug/placebo) 
interaction
Pharmacogenomic analysis has identified clinical trials in asthma, depression, pain, chronic fatigue, and cognitive function in which there 
are subpopulations based on genotype that have differential associations in the drug and placebo treatment arms. These differential effects 
often result in significant gene-(drug/placebo) interaction effects.
Implicit learning
The nonconscious acquisition of knowledge. Classical conditioning, a form of implicit learning, is implicated in certain instances of the 
placebo effect (e.g., implicit association of sleepiness with the administration of blue pills).
Mindset
Core belief about a domain or category that orients an individual to a particular set of beliefs, associations, and expectations, and functions 
to guide attentional and motivational processes (e.g., “cancer is a catastrophe”; “symptoms are signs of efficacy”).
Neurobiological 
mechanisms
Dopamine, endogenous opioids, and endocannabinoids are three of the major neurotransmitter systems implicated in moderating the 
placebo effect. Placebo effects also work by activating biological properties of the body that facilitate healing, including homeostatic 
mechanisms and immune and inflammatory responses. These contribute to the natural history of a disease but can also be targets of 
placebo effects.
Nocebo effect
Sides effect or negative change in clinical outcome observed after exposure to negative information, interactions, or cues that can induce 
negative expectations.
Open-label placebos 
(OLPs)
OLPs are placebos administered to patients with their full knowledge that the treatment lacks the active pharmaceutical agent. OLP 
clinical trials have been conducted in irritable bowel syndrome, chronic back pain, allergic rhinitis, cancer-related fatigue, attention deficit 
hyperactivity disorder, major depression, and menopausal hot flushes. Meta-analysis of OLP trials found a significant overall effect.
Patient-clinician 
relationship
The patient-clinician relationship shapes the mindsets and expectations a patient holds about health, illness, and treatments, and affects 
the quality of care a patient receives. This relationship is influenced by the warmth and competence of the provider and is further shaped by 
characteristics like empathy and trust.
Placebo
Placebos are sham versions of drugs, devices, or surgeries that lack the active compound, function, or procedure they are designed to 
simulate. Placebos are often used in clinical trials as controls for placebo effects, natural history, regression to the mean, spontaneous 
remission, and Hawthorne effects (the tendency for people to change their behaviors when being observed).
Placebo effect
Positive change in clinical outcome observed after a placebo treatment; an exclusively attributed expectation mediated by psychological, 
neurological, or physiological placebo mechanisms.
Placebo response
Improvement observed among patients assigned to placebo treatment in a clinical trial.
Placebome
The genome-related products that modify placebo response. Several genes in neurotransmitter and other pathways have been implicated 
in modifying response to placebo treatment in clinical trials. The most well-studied of these is in the gene encoding catechol-Omethyltransferase (COMT).
Social and observational 
learning
Learning through direct observation of others undergoing treatment (i.e., other patients) and interactions with individuals who weild 
influence over the patient (i.e., physicians and nurses) both may powerfully drive placebo effects.
Treatment 
characteristics
The specific characteristics include factors like the shape, color, and labeling of the treatment; the method of administration; and the 
physical environment in which the treatment is administered.

they can result in negative outcomes, termed, “nocebo effects.” For 
many years, placebo effects were viewed as superfluous nuisance 
variables to be ignored, marginalized, and simply “controlled for” in 
clinical trials. With advances in psychology and neuroscience stud­
ies of placebo effects, the value of understanding their mechanism of 
action and harnessing these effects in clinical care and clinical trials has 
become increasingly apparent.
INTRODUCTION TO PLACEBO EFFECTS: 

A BRIEF HISTORY
The word “placebo,” derived from the Latin placere, “to please,” first 
appeared in medical literature in clinical lectures of William Cul­
len, a leading physician in the eighteenth century. In 1792 he wrote, 
“I prescribed therefore in pure placebo, but I make it a rule even in 
employing placebos to give what would have a tendency to be of use 
to the patient.” Cullen was describing placebos being used to please, 
rather than treat; however, use of placebos was commonplace at that 
time, especially when effective therapies were exhausted or unavailable.
From the late eighteenth through the early twentieth centuries, sham 
treatments were also used to expose some unorthodox treatments as 
frauds—or, at least, as no better than placebos. In his highly publicized 
1784 study of “animal magnetism,” a therapy developed by Austrian 
physician Anton Mesmer, Benjamin Franklin and a team of leading 
scientists in France simulated Mesmer’s elaborate rituals using fake 
practitioners and sham magnetism. This early placebo-controlled trial

demonstrated that the hugely popular and remarkably effective treat­
ment was no better than a placebo. Early trialists attributed the positive 
benefits of these therapies to the power of the “imagination,” reinforc­
ing the belief that placebo treatments were the product of wayward 
physicians, or “quacks,” who tricked gullible patients.
After World War II, advances in metabolism, physiology, and clini­
cal pharmacology created a growing need for clinical trials to evaluate 
novel compounds for their ability to kill pathogens and alter disease 
processes. By the 1960s, the Declaration of Helsinki and KefauverHarris Amendments, introduced to protect patient safety by requiring 
informed consent, rendered use of placebos and the deception histori­
cally thought to promote placebo effects unethical, institutionalizing 
the transformation of placebos from salve to epistemic tool. Together, 
placebo controls, double-blinding, and randomization are considered 
the gold standard for acquiring the strongest evidence of efficacy or 
lack of efficacy for novel treatments. Notably, placebos are rarely used 
in trials of serious illnesses like cancer or when an effective treatment 
already exists. Then their use is limited to comparing novel treatments 
to standard of care plus placebo.
In randomized placebo-controlled clinical trials, the effect of the drug 
is calculated by simply subtracting outcomes in the placebo treatment 
arm or placebo response from the drug response (Fig. 496-1A). Hence, 
in addition to controlling for placebo effects, placebos control for 
changes in the outcome of interest due to natural history (the tendency 
for a common cold to resolve on its own in 7–10 days), regression to 
the mean (a statistical phenomenon where extreme baseline measures 
tend to move toward the group mean), and the Hawthorne effect (the 
tendency for people to change behaviors when being observed). These 
variables, together with placebo effects, make up the placebo response. 
If the active treatment being tested significantly outperforms the pla­
cebo response, it is deemed efficacious and can progress through the 
U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approval process. However, 
if response to the drug is not statistically significantly greater than the 
placebo response, the active treatment is deemed lacking in efficacy.
Clinical trials’ limited view of placebos obscures the reality that 
the effects associated with placebos are not, in practice, superfluous. 
Indeed, the effects of patient psychology (e.g., expectations, mindsets) 
and the social and cultural context (e.g., a clinician’s demeanor and 
drug label and advertising information) have a meaningful impact 
on health outcomes that warrant a more complete understanding. In 
addition, the effects of these factors are difficult to isolate. In fact, the 
total response to drug is the product of both the drug and the social 
and psychological context interacting with patient biology to bring 
about change (Fig. 496-1B). This perspective propels us into a new 
era of understanding placebo effects: not as treatment alternatives or 
as something to subtract, but as psychological, social, and biological 
mechanisms that can be considered an integral component of the 
overall treatment effect in medicine. By understanding placebo effects 
in this manner, we can optimize their benefits to improving drug 
discovery, maximizing existing treatments, and minimizing nocebo 
consequences to reduce harm.
PLACEBO RESPONSE IN CLINICAL TRIALS
Placebo effects, although often thought of in the context of a placebo 
pill, extend to many other treatment modalities, including sham 
surgeries, placebo acupuncture, and placebo diets. They have been 
documented in numerous conditions and diseases, including pain, 
depression, Parkinson’s disease, anxiety disorders, cardiovascular dis­
orders, cancer-related fatigue, asthma, and gastrointestinal disorders. 
Not limited to patient-reported outcomes, placebo effects can affect 
objective physiologic outcomes, including blood pressure measure­
ments, immune biomarker levels, exercise endurance, and cognitive 
test scores.
Recently, clinical trial sponsors have invested considerable resources 
in reducing the impact of placebo response by adjusting patient-level 
variables, such as reducing patient-clinician interactions and reducing 
patient expectations by providing neutral information about expected 
benefits and side effects. In conditions like Alzheimer’s disease, trial­
ists have modeled placebo response over time and set the optimal 

treatment duration length to the time period beyond the 8-week 
period when placebo response is maximal. The placebo run-in design 
attempts to eliminate the influence of placebo responders by assigning 
all enrolled blinded patients to a placebo at the beginning of a study; 
patients who respond to placebo are subsequently excluded. Other 
more complex models, such as the sequential parallel comparison 
design (SPCD), randomize patients to placebo or drug at a ratio of 2:1. 
After a brief treatment period, placebo nonresponders are rerandom­
ized to placebo or drug. Unlike placebo run-ins, SPCD uses all patients 
and, thus, should have greater power to find an effect. Still, despite 
these and other considerable investments, no approach reliably reduces 
the impact of placebo response on clinical trial failure.

MECHANISMS OF PLACEBO EFFECTS
■
■PSYCHOLOGICAL MECHANISMS
Expectations 
Expectations, or beliefs about the likelihood of future 
events, are thought to be the key driver of placebo effects. Expecta­
tions can be conscious; for example, many patients expect nonsteroidal 
anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) will relieve pain, melatonin will 
improve sleep, and beta blockers will reduce anxiety. Expectations 
can also be consciously or subconsciously conditioned. Repeated use 
of blue sleeping pills can induce sleepiness by taking a blue placebo 
pill. Multiple sclerosis patients who received the immunosuppressant 
cyclophosphamide paired with flavored syrup later displayed drugconsistent immune responses to the flavored syrup alone. Obser­
vational learning can also play a role in eliciting placebo effects by 
altering expectations. Watching another person experience pain relief 
in response to a particular treatment can lead the observer to expect to 
experience similar relief, even if the stimulus is a placebo in both cases.
CHAPTER 496
Mindsets 
Mindsets are core beliefs about a broader domain or 
category, such as the meaning of side effects or the nature of a disease 
or treatment. Mindsets orient individuals to a set of associations, 
expectations, and goals. A mindset such as “cancer is a catastrophe,” 
“statins are harmful,” or “my body is permanently damaged” can shape 
a patient’s experience of pain or other side effects. While mindsets and 
expectations are related, they are not identical. For example, a patient 
in pain may have the specific expectation that a treatment will relieve 
their pain. But they also could have broader mindsets in which those 
expectations are operating, such as “injections don’t work,” “my condi­
tion is hopeless,” or “I am in good hands.”
Placebo and Nocebo Effects 
While specific expectations can be measured and assumed to influ­
ence placebo effects in studies, mindsets may be particularly powerful 
in the real-world practice of medicine where individual expectations 
do not exist in isolation. Mindsets may also be advantageous when con­
sidering how to harness placebo and minimize nocebo effects ethically.
■
■SOCIAL AND CULTURAL MECHANISMS
Language and Information 
Patients’ implicit or explicit pre­
existing mindsets, shaped by the broader culture in which they were 
raised and/or reside, can be updated and informed through verbal 
instructions. In “open-hidden design” studies, medication adminis­
tered openly by a health care professional who informs the patient 
that they will experience benefit (e.g., “I’m going to administer a dose 
of morphine, a powerful painkiller that will alleviate your pain”) has 
a significantly greater analgesic effect compared to administering the 
same dose from a hidden pump without the patient’s knowledge. Thus, 
even potent opioid analgesics lose as much as 30% of their efficacy if 
the patient is unaware that they received the treatment. Effects of openhidden paradigms are also seen with objective outcomes, such as heart 
rate. Information is conveyed not just by a clinician’s words but also 
through information in the health care context more broadly, such as 
advertising and media related to drugs and health.
Clinician Characteristics 
Beyond what the patient is told, trust in 
the source of information can also influence clinical outcomes. Socialpsychological research has shown that two qualities are key: patients’ 
perceptions of competence, or whether a physician “gets it” (i.e.,

Treatment Response
Drug
Effect

Placebo
Response

DRUG
PLACEBO
Clinical Trials
Clinical Practice
A
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine

Treatment Response

DRUG
a/a
PLACEBO
a/a
DRUG PLACEBO
DRUG PLACEBO
WHAT WE EXPECT TO
SEE
WHAT WE OFTEN SEE
WHAT WE SEE WITH PHARMACOGENETICS
B
FIGURE 496-1  A. Additivity of drug and placebo response in a clinical trial. B. (1) What we expect to see: Expected outcomes from the classic view of clinical trials in which 
the effect of the drug exceeds placebo response. (2) What we often see: Typical results from a clinical trial in which there is no significant difference between the drug 
and placebo responses. (3) What we can see with pharmacogenomics: Pharmacogenomic analysis demonstrating differential effects of a genetic locus in the drug and 
placebo arms of a trial such that the drug effect and placebo response of one version of a variant (patients who are homozygous for the “A” allele, A/A) are opposite that 
of homozygotes of the alternate allele at that locus (patients who homozygous for the “a” allele, a/a). The average effects of outcomes of the two subpopulations cancel 
each other to give the results we often see.
displays of efficiency, knowledge, and skill), and patients’ perceptions 
of warmth, or whether a physician “gets me” (i.e., displays of personal 
engagement, connection, and care for the patient).
Patients’ assessments of clinician warmth and competence shape 
their treatment expectations and impact their mindsets about illness 
and, therefore, can influence placebo effects. In one study, an allergic 

Drug Effects
Pharmaceutical or physical 
properties of drug or 
intervention
Placebo Effects
PSYCHOLOGICAL MECHANISMS
 
• Expectations
 
• Mindsets
 
• Implicit Learning
SOCIAL AND CULTURAL MECHANISMS
 
• Language and information
 
• Clinician characteristics
 
• Symbols
 
• Rituals 
 
• Environmental Cues
BIOLOGICAL MECHANISMS
 
• Genetic predispositions
 
• Neurobiological processes
Other Effects
OTHER EFFECTS THAT CAN 
INFLUENCE PLACEBO RESPONSE 
in TRIALS
 
• Statistical regression to mean
 
• Blinding and bias
 
• Informed consent and uncertainty
 
• Hawthorn Effects
TREATMENT
Placebo responder
Drug responder
(but drugnonresponder)
(but placebononresponder)
DRUG
A/A
PLACEBO
A/A
reaction was induced in participants via a histamine skin prick fol­
lowed by the administration of a placebo cream. The information about 
the cream was varied to create either positive expectations (“this cream 
will reduce your rash and irritation”) or negative expectations (“this 
cream may worsen your symptoms”). When the ensuing wheal was 
measured 10 min later, the difference in information alone produced

differences in the size of the allergic reaction. Interestingly, the effect 
of the information differed depending on perceived clinician warmth 
and competence. When the physician exhibited cues of both compe­
tence (e.g., wearing a white coat with a badge that read “Fellow at 
the Stanford Allergy Center”) and warmth (e.g., making eye contact 
with the patient), the effect of the spoken message was significantly 
enhanced. However, when social cues were changed to induce ques­
tions about the level of competence (e.g., badge read “Student Doctor”) 
and warmth (e.g., staring at a computer screen or making a personal 
connection), the information about the cream no longer mattered: both 
placebo and nocebo effects were minimized.
There is no one right way to signal warmth and competence, but 
there are many ways to fail to convey these qualities and, therefore, lose 
patients’ trust. Indications of warmth and competence are important 
for building patients’ trust not only with their medical providers but 
also with the broader clinic, hospital, or health care system. Trust in the 
social context can magnify placebo effects or minimize nocebo effects; 
it can also have a direct effect on patient care, influencing a wide array 
of outcomes, such as metabolic complications, immune response, 
symptoms, and adherence to medication.
Symbols, Rituals, and Environmental Cues 
Medical treat­
ment occurs within a rich context of environmental cues, symbols, and 
rituals. Many patients, for example, exhibit a transient (albeit substan­
tial) rise in blood pressure when in a medical setting, a phenomenon 
known as the “white coat” hypertension. Seemingly inconsequential 
characteristics of a drug, such as color, drug brand name, and cost, 
have been found to impact treatment efficacy. Patients tend to perceive 
capsules as stronger and more effective than tablets and tend to have a 
reduced response to placebos referred to as discounted or generic. In 
a within-subjects, repeated-measures study to examine drug labeling 
in migraine, patients were given either placebo or 10-mg rizatriptan 
labeled to create three information conditions ranging from negative 
(“placebo”), to neutral (“Maxalt or placebo”) to positive (“Maxalt”). 
While patients had significantly greater relief from Maxalt labeled as 
Maxalt compared to placebo labeled as placebo, there was no difference 
in the effect of Maxalt labeled as placebo compared to placebo labeled 
as Maxalt. These findings demonstrate the ability of labeling and brand 
names to influence the effect of a drug. Interestingly, drug companies 
have increased their use of the letters X and Z in drug names as stud­
ies show these visually distinct letters have fewer negative associations 
with other medications. Furthermore, marketing research has found Z 
is associated with efficacy, whereas T and S are associated with greater 
tolerability.
■
■BIOLOGICAL MECHANISMS
Pharmacologic evidence from the 1970s showing that naloxone, an 
opioid antagonist, could abrogate placebo effects in the experience of 
pain after molar tooth extraction laid the groundwork for demonstrat­
ing that psychological forces could affect patient physiology. Early 
neuroimaging studies revealed the release of endogenous opioids and 
dopamine signaling proportionate to the expectation and perception 
of how well a given placebo intervention worked. Using models of 
placebo analgesia, neuroscientists imaged the brains of healthy subjects 
exposed to various forms of thermal or mechanical pain-producing 
stimuli in the presence or absence of placebo treatments (e.g., inert 
creams or inactive transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation devices) 
to induce placebo effects using conditioning or suggestion. These stud­
ies revealed activation of regions in the spinal cord and descending 
pain-control regions in the brainstem and reduced signaling in the spi­
nothalamic tract. Later meta-analyses of 20 of these studies confirmed 
reduced signaling proportionate to reported placebo analgesia in painrelated activity in the thalamus, insula, and habenula, while increased 
signaling was observed in frontal-parietal regions.
Today, placebo treatments are hypothesized to influence brain sys­
tems involved in “meaning-making” by constructing internal models 
that guide our understanding of incoming signals and their source, 
as well as implications for anticipatory events. These internal models 
provide predictive signals that are incorporated with incoming sensory 

signals to produce the sensations and symptoms experienced. In turn, 
these models inform our perceptions (mindsets) and shape our reac­
tions, amplifying or attenuating perceptual and affective circuits. Thus, 
contextual information around placebo treatments, including the sug­
gestion of benefit, the visual and behavioral cues provided via the ritual 
of treatment, and prior experiences of benefit, can modify the neural 
construction of the experience and, in turn, downstream physiologic 
consequences in the nervous, immune, endocrine, and cardiovascular 
systems.

THE CHALLENGE OF IDENTIFYING 
“PLACEBO RESPONDERS”
In drug development, identifying and excluding placebo responders 
could lead to more precise, and potentially smaller and less expensive, 
clinical trials. Predicting which patients are likely to respond to pla­
cebos could allow clinicians to optimize patient interactions and even 
support gradual replacement of drugs with side effects with placebo by 
dosage titration.
Research into psychological predictors of placebo responders found 
several personality traits and constructs to be associated with placebo 
responders, including optimism, habitual desire for control, fun and 
sensation seeking, neuroticism, self-efficacy, and internal locus of 
control. Functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) has also been 
used to create brain-signaling profiles that are predictive of placebo 
responders. In a study of patients with chronic osteoarthritis pain, 
right midfrontal gyrus connectivity effectively identified placebo pill 
responders. Interestingly, in some subjects, the active drug in this 
study, duloxetine, appeared to enhance the placebo response, but in 
others, duloxetine reduced it. This finding suggests that while drug and 
placebo were additive for some patients, the interaction with placebo 
response diminished the drug effect for others.
CHAPTER 496
The observation that placebo effects are influenced by opioid and 
dopaminergic signaling suggested that genetic variation in the synthe­
sis, function, or metabolism of these neurotransmitters might influence 
the magnitude of placebo effects. This observation gave rise to the term 
“placebome” to describe the group of genome-related products that 
potentially influence individual response to placebo treatments. Mem­
bers of the placebome were identified in candidate and genome-wide 
association studies (GWAS) of the placebo control arms of clinical tri­
als. For example, there is evidence of differential effects associated with 
the genes COMT and MAO-A, which encode enzymes that metabolize 
dopamine; OPRM1, which encodes the opioid receptor; and TPH2 and 
HTR2A, which encode proteins involved in serotonin signaling. Of 
these genes, COMT has the strongest evidence for association with pla­
cebo response in clinical trials of irritable bowel syndrome (IBS) and 
pain. To date, there are 29 genes associated with response to placebo in 
the GWAS catalog.
Placebo and Nocebo Effects 
Although numerous psychological, neuroimaging, and genetic 
profiles of placebo responders have been proposed, these biomarkers 
were mostly derived from small studies and have not yielded consistent 
results in prospective studies. This is in large part due to the broad het­
erogeneity in variables intrinsic to patients, including their conditions 
and disease severity and duration, and extrinsic study variables, includ­
ing treatment duration, inclusion criteria, study location, number of 
study visits, outcome measures, and information about the study drug 
(e.g., possible side effects).
■
■ADDITIVITY IN CLINICAL TRIALS
The study of placebo responders has also led to important evidence 
of nonadditivity in clinical trials. Additivity between drug and pla­
cebo outcomes has been a universal and fundamental, but unproven, 
assumption in clinical trials. Based on additivity, the drug effect is 
determined by subtracting the outcome in the placebo arm from the 
outcome in the drug treatment arm (Fig. 496-1A). As reported in 
the study investigating brain connectivity of patients with depression 
described above, in some patients, duloxetine enhanced brain connec­
tivity seen in the brain region associated with placebo response. How­
ever, in other patients, this connectivity was reduced with duloxetine. 
Similarly, in clinical trials of chronic pain, chronic fatigue syndrome,

cardiovascular disease, and asthma, significant genetic associations 
observed in placebo arms were null or found to be in the opposite 
direction in drug treatment arms. These unexpected gene-by-(drug/
placebo) interaction effects suggest that, in some clinical trials, there 
are subsets of patients for whom the drug and placebo response is not 
additive (Fig. 496-1B). Thus, the potential for differential outcomes in 
the drug and placebo arms could confound outcomes in clinical trials, 
warranting further investigation.

NOCEBO EFFECTS
In part, because informed consent in clinical trials requires disclosure 
of all potential drug side effects, the side effects reported by patients 
randomized to placebo are often the same as those expected with ran­
domization to drug. When this phenomenon was first documented in 
1961, the word nocebo, coined from the Latin nocere, “to harm,” was 
used to describe production of negative effects from negative verbal 
suggestions, contextual cues, or associative learning.
Although the term nocebo was originally defined as an adverse effect 
from an inert treatment, nocebo effects, like placebo effects, are the 
product of underlying aspects of the patients’ psychology (in this case, 
negative expectations and mindsets) and the social context. In clinical 
trials, on average, 25% of participants randomized to placebo report 
side effects, and some studies (such as those of statins) show that the 
rates of side effects do not significantly differ between the active drug 
and placebo. Because they did not receive the active drug, we can 
assume the side effects arose, in part, due to expectation and not due 
to any active ingredients in the treatment.
Nocebo effects are not limited to clinical trials. While statins are effec­
tive cholesterol-lowering agents, the belief that they cause muscle pain is 
widespread, and treatment is often discontinued because of this reported 
side effect. This phenomenon has been extensively investigated. In one 
study, a “within-subjects” design was used in which each patient served 
as their own control. In this study, patients who reported side effects were 
blinded and randomized to take a placebo, statin, or no treatment on a 
monthly basis over a 1-year period. At the end of the study, there was no 
discernable difference between symptoms reported on placebo versus 
statin, and 50% of the patients in the trial were able to reinitiate statin 
therapy successfully. Negative expectations surrounding technology 
(e.g., wi-fi or cell phone signals), environmental agents (e.g., infrasound 
generated by wind turbines), or food (e.g., gluten) can also enhance the 
likelihood of negative symptoms related to their presence.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
Ethically, it is hard to test nocebo effects deliberately, but random­
ized studies in laboratory contexts show that people who are told to 
expect side effects are more likely to experience those side effects 
than those who are not told to expect side effects. Expectations and 
mindsets can deepen negative effects through physiologic activation 
or by heightening awareness of symptoms that may have already been 
present, resulting in misattribution of their cause. Nocebo responses 
can also occur because of conditioned learning. For example, patients 
receiving chemotherapy can develop nausea when they see or smell a 
stimulus associated with their treatment, such as the treatment room 
or even a staff member.
Key drivers of placebo and nocebo effects overlap with factors that 
create barriers to quality clinical care for black patients and other 
patients of color. Poor communication, perceived discrimination, and 
medical mistrust are all factors demonstrated to reduce the quality of 
care in racially discordant dyads. Prior experiences of discrimination in 
the health care setting may result in expectations of discrimination and 
suboptimal clinician communication, enhancing nocebo and reducing 
placebo effects during treatment encounters. Consequently, the pres­
ence of nocebogenic and absence of placebogenic influences associ­
ated with racially discordant dyads has the potential to generate and 
exacerbate racial and ethnic inequities in clinical outcomes and care.
ETHICALLY AND DELIBERATELY 
HARNESSING PLACEBO EFFECTS
If placebo effects are understood as an integral component of the overall 
treatment effect, mediated by neurobiological processes and social and 
environmental factors, they can be personalized and maximized in the 

practice of medicine. Administering placebos without full knowledge 
of the patient is no longer acceptable for important ethical reasons. 
Moreover, administering “impure placebos”—pharmacologically active 
treatments that are prescribed at too low a dose to be effective or are 
known to be ineffective for the condition being treated—is reportedly 
common practice but still controversial and ethically problematic. The 
use of impure placebos varies by country. In the United States, a survey of 
1200 internists and rheumatologists indicated that 62% of participants 
believed the practice of utilizing impure placebos—over-the-counter 
analgesics and vitamins—was ethically permissible. Notably, <5% 
reported using saline or sugar pills. The numbers are higher in Canada 
and the United Kingdom, where 80 and 77% respectively, of physicians 
surveyed reported prescribing impure placebos or treatments without 
proven or expected benefit. In Denmark, 86% of internists, 54% of 
hospitalists, and 41% of specialists in private practice report that they 
used placebo interventions at least one time within the previous year. 
Finally, the German Medical Association, after assessing placebos in 
medicine, published a report in 2011 acknowledging the complexity of 
the strong effects that placebos can have, supporting their limited use 
when no other therapies were available. In addition to using impure 
placebos, there are several other alternatives that deliberately leverage 
benefits of placebo effects.
■
■OPEN-LABEL PLACEBOS
One way that researchers have addressed the ethical and legal limita­
tions on placebos is to simply tell patients the facts about placebos. In 
honest or open-label placebo (OLP) studies, patients are fully informed 
about the absence of the active agent in the placebo, but are also told 
that placebo treatments can sometimes result in clinical improvement. 
The patients are also informed that trying a placebo might yield some 
benefit; even if they do not believe this to be the case, they could con­
sider suspending their belief. To date, the findings on the effects of 
OLP are promising. Improvements have been observed in IBS, cancerrelated pain and fatigue, depression, posttraumatic memory intrusions, 
allergic rhinitis, attention deficits, and hyperactivity; however, OLP has 
yielded no benefit in wound healing and did not enhance the cognitive 
abilities of healthy volunteers.
■
■DELIBERATELY LEVERAGING PATIENT 
EXPECTATIONS AND MINDSETS
When understood as being driven by the psychological and social 
context, placebo effects can be evoked without the use of sham 
pills or procedures by deliberately shaping patient expectations and 
mindsets. At their best, doctors and patients alike already harness 
the forces behind placebo effects through interactions, branding, and 
language that inspire patients’ trust, as well as useful mindsets and 
expectations about their condition. Once aware of this fact, health 
care practitioners can work ethically to leverage these forces to 
improve health outcomes.
In the PsyHEART trial, 124 patients undergoing coronary artery 
bypass surgery were randomized to standard care, supportive therapy, 
or an expectation of manipulation in which they were encouraged 
to develop clear expectations about how their life would improve 
after surgery (i.e., what activities they would be able to perform). Six 
months after surgery, patients who were randomized to the expectation 
manipulation showed significantly greater improvements in quality of 
life and reductions in disability. In the EMBRACE study, patients diag­
nosed with cancer were exposed to documentary-style films featuring 
experts in psychology and oncology and to cancer survivors who 
spoke about how their mindsets changed throughout and after their 
treatment, as well as challenges they faced along the way. Participants 
exposed to the films increased their health-related quality of life, such 
as their emotional well-being, physical health, and general functioning, 
by 10%, as measured by changes in industry-standard scales, compared 
to patients receiving treatment as usual. While these interventions were 
delivered directly to patients, trainings to help physicians and care 
teams more deliberately and effectively shape patients’ expectations 
and mindsets in the context of their care are being developed, evalu­
ated, and disseminated.

# 05 - 497 The Role of Epigenetics in Disease and Treatment

## 497 The Role of Epigenetics in Disease and Treatment

■
■ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS
In all of these applications, ethical considerations are of utmost impor­
tance; it is never acceptable to deceive or provide false information to 
the patient. Within these bounds, however, there is much we can do 
to improve patients’ mindsets and expectations. Consider the nocebo 
effects resulting from informing patients about side effects. While it 
is not ethical to withhold this information from patients, providers 
could either provide more realistic expectations about the likelihood 
of side effects and set more adaptive mindsets about their meaning. 
In one study of children undergoing oral immunotherapy treatment 
(OIT) for peanut allergies, half were randomized to receive a typical 
warning message: side effects are negative outcomes, unrelated to 
treatment efficacy, that need to be managed and endured. The other 
half were given messages aimed to instill the mindset that some mild 
symptoms are often a sign that the treatment is working and signal 
desensitization. Compared with families informed that symptoms are 
negative side effects, families informed that “symptoms are positive 
signs of treatment efficacy” experienced significantly less anxiety, fewer 
symptoms during the highest doses, and improved levels of IgG4, an 
immune marker of allergic tolerance. Similar effects of this messaging 
have proven to reduce anxiety and side effects for those receiving the 
COVID-19 vaccine.
THE FUTURE OF PLACEBO EFFECTS
We are entering a new era of understanding about placebo effects, one 
in which they are not viewed as treatment alternatives or as something 
to subtract, but as psychological, social, and biological mechanisms 
that can be considered an integral component of the overall treatment 
effect in medicine. Work in this field is proliferating, and translation of 
the findings to clinical trials and clinical care is important for optimiz­
ing placebo effects to improve existing treatments while minimizing 
nocebo effects to reduce harm.
■
■FURTHER READING
Colloca L et al: Placebo Effects through the Lens of Translational 
Research. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, 2023.
Evers AW et al: Implications of placebo and nocebo effects for 
clinical practice: Expert consensus. Psychother Psychosom 87:204, 

2018.
Hall KT et al: Systems pharmacogenomics: Gene, disease, drug and 
placebo interactions: A case study in COMT. Pharmacogenomics 
20:529, 2019.
Hall KT: Placebos. MIT Press Essential Knowledge Series. Cambridge, 
Massachusetts: The MIT Press, 2022.
Howe L et al: Changing patient mindsets about non-life-threatening 
symptoms during oral immunotherapy: A randomized clinical trial. 

J Allergy Clin Immunol Pract 7:1550, 2019.
Petrie KJ, Rief W: Psychobiological mechanisms of placebo and 
nocebo effects: Pathways to improve treatments and reduce side 
effects. Annu Rev Psychol 70:599, 2019.
Rief W et al: Preoperative optimization of patient expectations 
improves long-term outcome in heart surgery patients: Results 
of the randomized controlled PSY-HEART trial. BMC Med 15:4, 

2017.
Zion SR, Crum AJ: Mindsets matter: A new framework for harnessing 
the placebo effect in modern medicine. Int Rev Neurobiol 138:137, 
2018.
Zion SR et al: Changing cancer mindsets: A randomized controlled 
feasibility and efficacy trial. Psychooncology 32:1433, 2023.
Zunhammer M et al: Meta-analysis of neural systems underlying pla­
cebo analgesia from individual participant fMRIData. Nat Commun 
12:1391, 2021.

Brian C. Capell, Shelley L. Berger

The Role of Epigenetics 

in Disease and Treatment
The term epigenetics was coined by Conrad Waddington in 1942, as he 
sought to explain how changes in phenotype could occur throughout 
development independent of any changes to genotype. Appending 
the prefix epi- (Greek, meaning “over, outside of, around”) to genet­
ics aptly describes the numerous mechanisms by which gene expres­
sion and phenotypes are influenced—and sometimes even inherited 
through cell division—independent of any changes to the underlying 
DNA sequence. Today, epigenetics occupies one of the most exciting 
topics in biology and medicine, offering profound opportunities for 
discovery, as well as promise for the development of new therapies for 
disease. Interdisciplinary by nature, the field crosses virtually all areas 
of science and medicine: chemistry and genetics, development and dif­
ferentiation, immunology, cancer, aging, and neuroscience.
The continuous introduction of ever more powerful technologies 
for interrogating the epigenome has led epigenetics to become one of 
the most innovative fields within the biomedical sciences. Given the 
vast expanse of the topic and limitations of space, in this chapter, we 
provide a broad but brief overview of the field and then highlight key 
areas across the landscape of biomedicine where epigenetics has been 
revealed to play critical roles in physiology and disease, and impor­
tantly, where epigenetics-based therapies have demonstrated success 
in clinical medicine.
CHAPTER 497
■
■THE BIOCHEMICAL BASES OF EPIGENETICS
Fundamental to epigenetic regulation is the intricate organization into 
chromatin of each cell’s genome (Chap. 479). The fundamental unit 
of the packaging into chromatin is the nucleosome, consisting of 147 
base pairs of DNA wrapped around an octamer of 8 histone proteins 
(two copies of each of the four core histone proteins: H2A, H2B, H3, 
and H4), and nucleosome assembly into a regular repeating spaced 
array along the DNA polymer. The presence of nucleosomes and level 
of compaction of this basic chromatin array determine the accessibility 
of the DNA strand to transcription factors, to DNA repair machinery, 
and to other DNA-binding entities. Thus, compaction has a profound 
influence on gene expression levels and on local DNA mutation rates. 
Open regions of chromatin (euchromatin) tend to be transcriptionally 
active, whereas compacted chromatin (heterochromatin) tends to be 
transcriptionally repressed. Higher order three-dimensional chromatin 
architecture such as folding and looping further contribute to epigen­
etic gene regulation and cellular phenotypes.
The Role of Epigenetics in Disease and Treatment 
Histones include the four core histones, which are the most abun­
dant and most frequently found throughout the genome, and the vari­
ant histones of H2A, H2B, and H3. The individual protein structures of 
both core and variant histones include amino- and carboxyl-terminal 
“tails,” which are extended and unstructured, and highly conserved 
globular domains. The x-ray crystal structure of the nucleosome par­
ticle has illuminated the dynamic alterations of chromatin by an aston­
ishing range of regulatory mechanisms, summarized below.
The three main processes that regulate chromatin compaction, and 
thus access to the DNA template, include direct methylation modifi­
cations (and oxidized derivatives of methylation) of the DNA strand 
itself, posttranslational modifications of histones, and remodeling 
of nucleosomes to alter their location and composition with variant 
histones (Fig. 497-1). The major modification of DNA is cytosine 
methylation of CpG dinucleotides (5-mC), associated with gene repres­
sion and catalyzed by the DNMT1, DNMT3A, and DNMT3B enzymes. 
DNMT3A and 3B catalyze the addition of methyl groups on unmeth­
ylated DNA de novo at CpG dinucleotides that are typically located 
throughout transcribed genes and in intergenic regions, but lacking at 
promoters, while DNMT1 is critical for the maintenance of the meth­
ylation state after DNA replication and after transcription during the

Tonsils
Thymus
Bone
marrow
Lymph nodes
Spleen
Appendix
IMMUNE SYSTEM
Chromosome
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
DEVELOPMENT
AGING
METABOLISM
CANCER
FIGURE 497-1  Epigenetic pathways influence multiple physiologic and disease pathways. As depicted in the center of the illustration, epigenetics refers to the chemical 
modifications of DNA and histones, which influence chromatin structure, gene expression, and susceptibility to mutations. These molecular pathways, in turn, play important 
roles in development, cancer, metabolism, aging, neural function, and behavior, and in the immune system. ETC, electron transport chain; TCA, tricarboxylic acid.
S phase of the cell cycle. To further alter and to remove methylation, 
the TET enzymes (TET1–3) progressively oxidize 5-methylcytosine 
(5-mC) to 5-hydroxymethylcytosine (5-hmC), to 5-formylcytosine 
(5-fC), and to 5-carboxylcytosine (5-caC), which are unable to be 
recognized by DNMT1 but can be removed by additional enzymes. 
Hence, these are mechanisms to passively lose 5-mC following DNA 
replication or to actively remove 5-mC, both potentially returning to 
unmethylated cytosine.
Histone posttranslational modifications (hPTMs) are rich sources of 
diverse signaling to, and marking of, the chromatin template, includ­
ing at least 60 different covalent chemical modifications on the histone 
N- and C-terminal tails and within the globular domains. The hPTMs 
are added (written) and removed (erased) by enzymes and also serve as 
sequence- and PTM-specific binding surfaces for effector proteins and 
complexes (readers) to carry out a wide range of downstream actions 
including transcription, replication, DNA repair, and recombination. 

BRAIN AND BEHAVIOR
DNA
methylation
Histone
methylation
Histone
acetylation
DNA
Nucleosome
Glucose
TCA
ATP
ETC
One key point is that the staggering numbers of writers, erasers, and 
readers provide unlimited potential for diagnostic and therapeutic 
pharmacologic discovery.
Throughout this chapter, we focus on histone acetylation and 
methylation, the most abundant and the most well-studied hPTMs 
(Fig. 497-1), although a wealth of additional modifications, such 
as serine/threonine/tyrosine phosphorylation, lysine ubiquitination, 
lysine SUMOylation, and lysine ADP-ribosylation, among others, 
play important roles in transcriptional and chromatin regulation. 
For instance, histone phosphorylation targets histone H2A at Ser139 
(γH2A.X), which marks DNA double-strand breaks immediately fol­
lowing DNA damage and is critical for the recruitment of the DNA 
repair machinery. Histone mono-ubiquitination functions similarly 
to other hPTMs, in signaling and marking the chromatin template, 
in particular serving to mark the initiation region or elongation of 
transcribed genes for future rounds of transcription, whereas histone

SUMOylation plays a role in transcriptional repression. Polyubiq­
uitination serves to tag proteins for degradation by the proteasome, 
and dysfunction in this system may play a role in the pathogenesis of 
neurodegenerative diseases, including Alzheimer’s, Parkinson’s, and 
Huntington’s. ADP-ribosylation involves a class of enzymes, the polyADP-ribose polymerases (PARPs), which transfer ADP-ribose units 
from NAD+ to a variety of nuclear proteins. This PARylation alters the 
chromatin environment through the recruitment and modification of 
chromatin-associated proteins. In general, future studies of the profuse 
types and functions of hPTMs will enhance our understanding of these 
chromatin-based mechanisms and processes and will illuminate new 
opportunities and targets for therapies.
In contrast, there is extensive understanding of histone lysine acetyl­
transferases (KATs) and methyltransferases (KMTs). KATs, previously 
known as HATs, were among the first identified histone modification 
enzymes. They attach acetyl groups on the lysine residues of histone 
tails and other proteins, resulting in both a novel side chain (acetyllysine) and an increase in negative charge (from positive charged 
lysine to neutral acetyl-lysine). This alteration results in loosening of 
chromatin structure to become more permissive to the binding of tran­
scription factors, and acetylation also creates a novel binding surface 
for the association of reader proteins. Acetylation on core histones, 
such as lysine 9 on histone H3 (H3K9ac) or lysine 27 (H3K27ac), 
is typically associated with transcriptional activation. Acetylation is 
very dynamic and can be rapidly removed by histone deacetylases 
(HDACs), of which there are multiple classes, including HDACs and 
sirtuins (NAD-dependent deacetylases), acting to return the lysine to 
unmodified ground state.
Methylation of histone tails by KMTs provides more nuanced 
regulation, in that particular methylated lysines are associated with 
transcriptional activation (e.g., H3K4me3, H3K36me3, H3K79me3), 
transcriptional repression (e.g., H3K27me3), or DNA repeat and cen­
tromeric silencing (e.g., H3K9me3). The output is strictly determined 
by effector protein binding, as methylation of lysine does not alter side 
chain electrostatic charge. Lysine methylation is also a more stable 
chemical modification than is acetylation and turns over more slowly. 
Lysine demethylases have been identified for several of the specific 
methylated sites (H3K4, H3K9, H3K36, H3K27, H3K79).
In addition to their impacts upon local chromatin structure through 
electrostatic alterations and through recruitment of reader effector 
proteins, some histone modifications can influence other epigenetic 
processes. For example, H3K36me3 is involved in a variety of tran­
scriptional processes including elongation and splicing. However, 
through its recruitment and interaction with other methyltransferases, 
such as DNMT3B and METTL14, H3K36me3 impacts both DNA and 
RNA methylation, respectively.
Frequently coordinating with histone modification enzymes are 
nucleosome remodeling enzymes, which use the energy derived from 
the hydrolysis of ATP to reposition and remove nucleosomes along 
the DNA template and to exchange core histones and variant histones 
(including variants that are located at the transcriptional initiation 
sites [H2AZ] and over the transcribed genes [H3.3]). The nucleosome 
remodeling complexes can activate or repress transcription. The SWI/
SNF family creates nucleosome-free regions for transcriptional activa­
tion, the ISWI family evenly spaces nucleosomes to repress transcrip­
tion, and the INO80 family exchanges H2A with H2AZ at transcription 
start sites to poise transcriptional activation. Other remodeling com­
plexes play key roles in the DNA damage response and apoptosis, 
among additional genomic processes.
As alluded to above, RNA can also be methylated, and “RNA epi­
genetics” is now an emerging area of gene regulation beyond the direct 
methylation of DNA and hPTMs. Methylation of RNA, such as mes­
senger RNAs (mRNAs), has been known to exist for over half a century. 
However, in the last decade, the discovery of enzymes that perform 
reversible methylation of RNAs led to an explosion of this new field, 
called epitranscriptomics. Indeed, RNA methylation leads to mRNA 
degradation or facilitates translation. However, mRNA methylation 
itself occurs co-transcriptionally. Notably, the writer methyltransferase 
enzymes (METTL3, METTL14) and the demethylases (ALKBH5, FTO) 

have important roles in a variety of disease pathologies, and drugs target­
ing their clinical activities are currently in human clinical trials.

Because multiple enzymes redundantly and synergistically write, 
erase, and recognize these modifications on DNA, RNA, and histones, 
there is great complexity and the potential for fine-tuning of gene 
regulation. While extensive knowledge gaps remain to fully explicate 
these mechanisms of gene regulation, epigenetics has become a fully 
established discipline within biomedical research. In the coming years, 
it is likely that the basic understanding of these processes will be fur­
ther harnessed for further betterment of human health.
■
■TOOLS FOR THE STUDY OF EPIGENETICS
Central to the rapid pace of epigenetic discovery has been the continual 
development of new cutting-edge epigenetic technologies. Chromatin 
immunoprecipitation (ChIP), developed over three decades ago, has 
been a mainstay across epigenetics and molecular biology research 
more broadly (Fig. 497-2). ChIP involves using formaldehyde to cross­
link proteins to DNA and then fragmenting the DNA and reversing 
of the crosslinks in order to analyze the DNA. The linking of ChIP to 
next-generation sequencing (ChIP-seq) provided a major leap forward 
in allowing researchers to probe the entire genome-wide landscape 
of histone modifications and DNA-binding transcription factors and 
chromatin-modifying enzymes. This has led to fundamental discov­
eries regarding the role of the epigenome in the regulation of gene 
expression and cellular phenotypes in development and disease.
More recent refinements in these methods have expanded the appli­
cability of these methods. Studying chromatin accessibility has become 
possible through the assay for transposase-accessible chromatin using 
sequencing (ATAC-seq) (Fig. 497-2). Through ATAC-seq, a Tn5 trans­
posase can be utilized to insert sequencing adapters into open regions of 
chromatin, allowing for the identification of DNA regulatory elements 
such as promoters and enhancers even at the single-cell level. Building 
upon both ChIP-seq and ATAC-seq, the tethering of an antibody of 
interest to micrococcal nuclease (MNase) allows for the cleavage of the 
DNA on either side of the target, sidestepping the need for any formal­
dehyde fixation step, significantly scaling down the signal-to-noise ratio, 
and reducing the number of cells and DNA required in comparison to 
standard ChIP-seq. This method, referred to as CUT&RUN (cleavage 
under targets and release using nuclease), offers the ability to obtain his­
tone and chromatin-binding information in systems and models where 
cell numbers were previously rate limiting. A further modification of the 
CUT&RUN protocol replaces the MNase with a Tn5 transposase fused 
to sequencing adapters (CUT&Tag), offering the ability to profile histone 
modifications at the single-cell level.
CHAPTER 497
The Role of Epigenetics in Disease and Treatment 
While ATAC- and ChIP-seq and their derivatives have provided 
tremendous insights into how chromatin accessibility and histone modi­
fications play a role in gene regulation, they did not provide information 
on how the physical organization and folding of the genome might con­
tribute to gene expression. This was only able to begin to be understood 
by techniques that could elucidate the three-dimensional architecture 
and structure of chromatin. Here, techniques such as HiC (Hi-C is 
a high-throughput form of 3C (chromosome conformation capture) 
technology to study 3D genome organization) and Hi-ChIP (Hi-ChIP 
combines Hi-C with ChIP-sequencing to study the relationship of 
DNA-binding proteins to 3D genome organization) have emerged to 
reveal nuclear architecture and how it can either inhibit or facilitate gene 
expression. Collectively, these studies have revealed a model whereby 
enhancer state drives gene regulation. Once enhancer-promoter loops 
have formed, these topologically associated domains (TADs) are rein­
forced and can ultimately help to constrain motion of the genome and in 
turn increase the likelihood of further promoter-enhancer connections 
forming to facilitate transcription.
More recently, the latest frontier in biomedical research is spatial 
technologies that allow the capture of molecular data at subcellular 
resolution within their native tissue context. While techniques such as 
spatial CUT&Tag are still in development, as they continue to advance 
in resolution, throughput, and accessibility, they are certain to offer 
unprecedented insights into how tissue and disease pathology corre­
lates with alterations in the transcriptome, epigenome, and proteome.

ChIP–seq
ATAC-seq
Epigenome editing
UV
Tn5 transposase
Peaks (kb)
Sequencing peaks corresponding
to open chromatin
Purified DNA
Adapter
Data collection
Sequencing
library
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
Reads:
…GTTCCTTCAGCATTTGCAGCGT…
Reads:
Reference Genome
Peak identification
NGS Sequencing
Motif 1
Motif 2
FIGURE 497-2  Core experimental techniques for the study of epigenetics. The explosion of interest and research in the past few decades has been fueled by fundamental 
advances in the experimental approaches and ability to profile the epigenome. Chromatin immunoprecipitation–next-generation sequencing (ChIP-seq) allows for the ability 
determine the genome-wide binding of a histone modification or DNA-binding protein of interest. In contrast, assay for transposase-accessible chromatin using sequencing 
(ATAC-seq) provides a method for determining chromatin accessibility genome-wide even down to the single-cell level. More recently, the development of CRISPR-based 
epigenome-editing technologies has offered a way to directly deposit histone modification in order to activate or repress specific genes. NGS, next-generation sequencing.
Finally, another major technological breakthrough, and one with 
tremendous therapeutic potential, is development of CRISPR-based 
epigenome editing approaches (Fig. 497-2). By fusing a nucleasedeactivated Cas protein to an epigenetic modifying enzyme, one can 
use guide RNAs to precisely target gene regulatory effectors to turn on 
and turn off specific genes by changing the gene’s histone acetylation or 
methylation levels. For example, using CRISPR to guide the mRNA of 
an epigenetic repressor to the oncogene MYC is one strategy currently 
being tested for cancer treatment. These advances promise to not only 
elucidate new knowledge regarding principles of gene regulation but 
also to offer new therapeutic opportunities for disease.
■
■EPIGENETICS IN DEVELOPMENT 

AND DIFFERENTIATION
Epigenetic processes are critical to organismal development and to 
cellular differentiation and reprogramming of cell fate (Fig. 497-1). 
Transcription factors establish the epigenomic landscape that enables 
and stabilizes cell-type-specific gene expression while simultane­
ously ensuring stable repression of alternative cell fates. This results 
in chromatin profiles that display remarkable cell-type specificity in 

dCas9
Effector
domain
Epigenetic
modifications
Repressed locus
dCas9
Activated locus
Epigenetic
editing
differentiated cells, particularly at the key regulatory nodes of gene 
enhancers, which are gene-distal DNA elements that control transcrip­
tion. In fact, epigenome profiling of the chromatin landscape in tumors 
of unknown cell origin can provide a better index of the origin tissue 
than does DNA sequencing of gene mutations within the tumor.
The cell-type-specific epigenetic program is first derived from the 
template of embryonic stem cells, where numerous genes required for 
differentiation exist in a “bivalent” state, marked by both the activat­
ing histone modification, H3K4me3, and the repressive modification, 
H3K27me3. Due to this unstable epigenetic state, the genes are “poised” 
for activation or for repression, depending on their subsequent cell fate. 
Critical genes directing toward a specific cell fate will be turned on, with 
maintained H3K4me3 and erased H3K27me3, whereas genes leading 
toward alternative fates will be repressed, with maintained H3K27me3 
and removed H3K4me3. Once differentiated, an epigenetic barrier will 
prevent the cells from returning to the stem cell state. For example, con­
stitutive heterochromatin in the form of H3K9me3 can serve as a barrier 
to cellular reprogramming when attempting to create induced pluripo­
tent stem cells, and inhibiting the enzymes that catalyze H3K9me3, such 
as SUV39H1, can enhance reprogramming efficiency.

DNA methylation contributes to the specification of cell fate and 
to other developmental pathways. DNA methylation alterations are 
involved in critical processes ranging from sex chromosome dosage 
compensation to coordinating expression of imprinted genes. Disrup­
tion of this latter process can lead to imprinting disorders including 
Prader-Willi syndrome, Angelman syndrome, and Beckwith-Wie­
demann syndrome. Recent discoveries have served to highlight the 
tremendous amount of interplay between epigenetic modifications 
and, in particular, between DNA methylation and various histone 
modifications.
Beyond embryonic development, epigenetics can provide the neces­
sary coordination and balance between adult stem cell self-renewal 
compared to cell differentiation. This epigenetic control is critical, as 
impaired self-renewal can lead to stem cell exhaustion and premature 
aging, while excessive self-renewal may promote cancer. Key epigenetic 
regulators tend to play conserved roles across diverse tissue types. For 
instance, BMI1, a component of the polycomb repressive complex 1 
(PRC1), is required for stem cell proliferation and self-renewal, and 
its ablation leads to stem cell depletion in hematopoietic, epidermal, 
muscle, intestinal, and mammary stem cells. Similarly, the DNA meth­
yltransferase DNMT1 is required for stem cell self-renewal in hemato­
poietic, epidermal, and mammary stem cells. HDACs 1 and 2 possess 
some overlapping functions and are required for normal epidermal 
differentiation. Likewise, a loss of these HDAC enzymes in hematopoi­
etic stem cells can lead to failure of differentiation and severe anemia. 
In a similar fashion, inhibition or loss of histone lysine demethylase 
1 (LSD1), a repressor of transcription, is known to promote differ­
entiation across multiple cellular contexts. These factors represent 
repressive chromatin regulation, leading to the general concept that 
restraining specific transcription pathways related to differentiation is 
crucial to maintaining undifferentiated self-renewing stem cell pools.
The epigenetic regulation of the tumor suppressor p16 (CDKN2A) 
locus during differentiation provides a prime example of this finely 
tuned system. For example, as mentioned above, DNMT1 is necessary 
for self-renewal in human epidermal stem cells. Levels of DNMT1 are 
high in the basal undifferentiated layer of the epidermis, decreasing 
progressively with epidermal stratification, leading to de-repression 
of the tumor suppressors p16 and p15, thereby promoting cell cycle 
arrest and full differentiation. BMI1 displays a similar phenotype in 
both hematopoietic and epidermal stem cells, repressing key genes that 
promote differentiation, such as p16 and p19ARF. Consistently, a loss 
of BMI1 leads to premature differentiation and defective self-renewal. 
In addition to the repression provided by DNMT1 and BMI1, the p16 
locus is highly decorated with the repressive H3K27me3 catalyzed by 
EZH2 in epidermal stem cells. Then, during epidermal differentiation, 
H3K27me3 is removed by the KDM6B (JMJD3) histone demethyl­
ase. Loss of this control over programmed p16 expression occurs in 
epithelial cancers, such as squamous cell carcinoma (SCC), where 
EZH2 is overexpressed and KDM6B expression is lost. Breast cancer 
is another example where progesterone can increase levels of EZH2 to 
promote mammary epithelial cell proliferation, and excessive EZH2 
expression can occur in cancer. This exemplifies how epigenetics can 
integrate environmental signals and have a profound influence on the 
fine balance between stem cell maintenance and overt carcinogenesis. 
In general, a recurrent theme in cancer is loss of key chromatin regula­
tion that promotes cell differentiation, combined with gain of activities 
that promote stemness.
Chromatin-modifying enzymes also play a major role in influenc­
ing cell-type specificity. High levels of EZH2 that modify H3K27me3 
promote adipogenesis while simultaneously inhibiting osteogenesis. In 
contrast, the H3K27me3 demethylases, KDM6A (UTX) and KDM6B, 
derepress those same genes, driving stem cells toward osteogenesis. 
Through interactions with tissue-specific master regulators, epigenetic 
modifiers also shape cell-type specificity. In the epidermis, p63, the p53 
family member that is a master regulator of the epidermal compart­
ment, interacts with several chromatin regulators including HDAC1 
and HDAC2, SATB1, MLL4 (KMT2D), and BRG1 to orchestrate 
epidermal differentiation. Similarly, the gene-activating H3K4 histone 
methyltransferases, MLL3 (KMT2C) and MLL4, are required for 

adipogenesis by forming a complex with the transcriptional activator 
ASC2 and the transcription factor PPARγ to induce adipogenic genes. 
Overall, loss of epigenetic regulation can reduce cell differentiation and 
increase stem cell specification to drive diseases encompassing devel­
opment, cancer, and, broadly, diseases associated with aging.

■
■EPIGENETICS OF METABOLISM
One of the fascinating aspects of epigenetics is that it represents a 
mechanism for direct connection between the environment and gene 
expression. Numerous studies in the field of metabolism have identi­
fied a complex interplay between diet, metabolism, and the epigenome 
(Fig. 497-1). Seminal findings in Drosophila and mice have shown that 
changes in diet, particularly the paternal diet, and other environmental 
factors, can influence the metabolism of offspring, ultimately promot­
ing obesity in later generations. Epidemiologic studies in humans have 
supported these results, as the nutritional status of grandparents has 
been correlated with phenotypic effects in grandchildren. In fact, diet 
can directly affect the levels and activity of chromatin modifiers.
For instance, high-fat diets reduce histone acetylation through their 
ability to inhibit the enzymes ACLY and ACSS2, which produce acetylCoA. Levels of acetyl-CoA, in comparison to all measured metabolites, 
are indeed the best predictor of histone acetylation levels. Consistent 
with this, increased acetyl-CoA correlates with rising levels of total 
histone acetylation, including at the promoters of growth-associated 
genes. This increase in nuclear acetylation is associated with cell cycle 
progression and proliferation, and it can have clinically relevant down­
stream effects. For example, high levels of acetyl-CoA can delay stem 
cell differentiation and suppress autophagy. The oncogenes MYC and 
AKT can both hijack metabolic networks to enhance nutrient uptake 
by cancer cells, thus promoting acetyl-CoA production and resulting 
in both the initiation and progression of tumorigenesis. Additional 
evidence suggests that dietary intake of alcohol can directly contribute 
to acetate levels and therefore histone acetylation in the brain, with 
effects on the transcription of genes involved in learning and memory.
CHAPTER 497
The Role of Epigenetics in Disease and Treatment 
Contrary to convention that metabolic enzymes are strictly mito­
chondrial or cytosolic, certain metabolic enzymes can be present in the 
nucleus and can thereby directly regulate histone acetylation enzymes. 
This is the case for several enzymes that generate acetyl-CoA, includ­
ing ACLY, PDH, and ACSS2, which generate acetyl-CoA from citrate, 
pyruvate, and acetate, respectively. Further, ACSS2 can be chromatinbound to regulate gene expression, leading to physiologic responses 
such as autophagy in the liver and mammalian hippocampal func­
tion in learning. This direct metabolic-epigenetic enzyme cross-talk 
illuminates a crucial local role of the acetyl-CoA metabolite to effect 
rapid gene transcription and represents a fertile intersection for future 
therapeutics.
Methylation is also altered by metabolism. S-Adenosylmethionine 
(SAM) is the key metabolic cofactor for histone and DNA methyla­
tion. Dietary factors are estimated to explain 30% of the variation in 
human serum methionine concentration and hence can alter SAM 
levels and histone methylation. For example, dietary methionine avail­
ability and intracellular production of SAM affect the levels of histone 
H3K4me3 associated with transcriptional activation. Furthermore, 
these fluctuations can have critical physiologic consequences: DNA 
methylation levels in rectal mucosa and colonic polyps are increased by 
higher levels of dietary folate, and a diet low in methyl donors reduces 
the formation of gastrointestinal cancers in mice predisposed to these 
tumors. Methionine metabolism and the availability of SAM regulate 
stem cell differentiation and contribute to carcinogenesis. For instance, 
cancers with mutations in metabolic regulatory genes such as IDH1/2, 
FH, and SDH lead to the accumulation of by-products (2-hydroxy­
glutarate, fumarate, and succinate, respectively), which all inhibit 
α-ketoglutarate (α-KG)–dependent histone demethylases and thus pro­
mote hypermethylation and lead to impaired cellular differentiation. 
Notably, some of the α-KG–dependent demethylases, which are highly 
mutated in numerous cancers (i.e., KDM5A, KDM6A), also serve as 
cellular oxygen sensors, thus linking environmental oxygen levels to 
epigenetic control of methylation levels. In contrast to hypermethyl­
ated states, loss of the MTAP gene, which is part of the 9p21 locus

containing p16 and one of the most frequent events in human cancer, 
disrupts normal methionine metabolism. This both lowers methyla­
tion levels, and, interestingly, also sensitizes cancer cells to inhibitors 
of the PRMT5 methyltransferase, therefore opening a therapeutic 
opportunity. These observations illustrate how connections between 
epigenetics and metabolism can generate unanticipated advances in 
medicine. Furthermore, these data highlight the tight interconnections 
between environmental inputs, metabolism, and epigenetics.

■
■CANCER EPIGENETICS
Cancer is now understood to be a mixed genetic and epigenetic disease, 
as epigenetic dysregulation is pervasive in human cancers (Fig. 497-1). 
Beyond simple activation of oncogenes or reduced expression of tumor 
suppressors, epigenetic mechanisms can contribute to chemotherapy 
resistance and to failure of antitumor immunity. Accordingly, the 
development of drugs targeting epigenetic pathways is one of the most 
active areas of clinical and pharmaceutical development, with several 
compounds already approved for human use and shown to be effec­
tive in a variety of cancers. Epigenetic perturbations in cancer largely 
affect chromatin-regulating enzymes, which represent robust targets 
for development of novel small-molecule inhibitors, especially as com­
pared with canonical oncogenic transcription factors (e.g., MYC) and 
tumor suppressors (e.g., p53).
Epigenetics can contribute to carcinogenesis in a variety of ways. 
First, on a global scale, chromatin organization is the single most influ­
ential factor in determining local mutation rate across the genome. 
Analysis of abundant tumor sequencing data has demonstrated that 
heterochromatic regions of the genome contain a higher frequency of 
mutations compared with more open euchromatic regions. This differ­
ence is due to the improved accessibility of the DNA repair machinery 
to less compact, more open regions of chromatin.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
The first discovery of an epigenetic mutation was found in 1998 
when the chromatin remodeler SMARCB1 was shown to drive the for­
mation of malignant rhabdoid tumors. Extensive sequencing of human 
tumors from the majority of cancer types has been performed by The 
Cancer Genome Atlas (TCGA) consortium, and remarkably, 25–30% 
of identified cancer driver mutations occur in chromatin regulatory 
proteins. Similar to SMARCB1, numerous other chromatin modifi­
ers (e.g., methyltransferases MLL3 and MLL4, and acetyltransferases 
EP300 and CBP) and nucleosome remodeling enzymes and associated 
complex components (e.g., SMARCA4, SMARCA2, ARID1A) are heav­
ily mutated and inactivated in many cancers. The majority of these 
mutations are loss-of-function mutations, and indeed, enzymes like 
MLL4 and demethylase KDM6A possess tumor-suppressive activ­
ity across a variety of tissues and cellular contexts. In contrast, the 
H3K27me3 histone methyltransferase EZH2 is an oncogene, and 
accordingly, it is overexpressed in many advanced-stage or metastatic 
solid tumors such as breast cancer, prostate cancer, and melanoma. 
Mechanistically, EZH2 represses the p16 tumor suppressor and other 
cell cycle genes required for cell cycle exit via H3K27me3 deposition. 
Consistent with a broad growth regulatory role, EZH2 inhibitors are 
therapeutically successful for a number of cancers in preclinical models 
and are being actively studied for B-cell lymphoma, melanoma, and 
other solid tumors.
In addition, provocative evidence has emerged for a direct tumori­
genic role of histones based on the discovery of causative mutations, 
such as histone H3 mutations identified in pediatric high-grade glio­
mas. Specifically, the majority of these mutations are in the H3 variant 
H3.3, where lysine 27 is replaced by methionine (K27M). Similarly, 
>90% of chondroblastomas replace lysine 36 with methionine (K36M) 
in histone H3.3. These effects appear to be dominant negative because 
(1) in H3.3, these are heterozygous mutations, and (2) the mutations 
also occur in the canonical H3, which exists in ~30 orthologous genes 
in the human genome. Thus, a minority of H3/H3.3 mutant protein 
leads to global defects in the associated histone modifications (K27 or 
K36 methylation), possibly via irreversible inhibition of the cognate 
enzymes by the mutant histones. These “oncohistone” mutations pro­
mote resistance to apoptosis and failure of normal differentiation in a 
number of pediatric and adult cancers.

Beyond mutations, genetic translocations involving chromatin 
modifiers also implicate chromatin pathways as direct drivers in 
cancer. MLL1 (KMT2A), the H3K4 histone methyltransferase, is a 
frequent translocation partner occurring in adult and pediatric acute 
myeloid leukemia (AML) and in ~80% of infant acute lymphoid leuke­
mia (ALL) cases. MLL1 can fuse with >70 translocation partners, and 
these mutant proteins prevent normal hematopoietic differentiation. 
Consistent with a causative role of MLL1 in these gene fusions, drugs 
inhibiting the catalytic activity of MLL1 are effective in preclinical 
models of AML and are currently being evaluated in human clinical 
trials.
Given the abundance of epigenetic abnormalities in cancer com­
bined with the inherent reversibility of epigenetic changes, extensive 
efforts are underway to develop epigenetic drugs. The first epigenetic 
therapeutic involved the use of DNA methylation inhibitors (DNMTi) 
to reactivate tumor-suppressor genes. Interestingly, the mechanism of 
traditional chemotherapeutics, such as azacitidine and decitabine, is 
to inhibit DNMT1, thereby promoting global hypomethylation; these 
are currently in clinical use for myelodysplastic syndrome (MDS) and 
AML. In a second broad mechanism, loss of acetylation occurs in 
many cancers, and thus, HDAC inhibitors (HDACi) are under inten­
sive development. HDACi are effective and approved for treatment in 
cutaneous T-cell lymphoma and multiple myeloma. Bromodomain 
(BRD)-containing proteins bind to lysine acetylated target proteins, 
including histones, and rationally designed BET inhibitors (BETi) 
block their binding. BETi reduce the amplified expression of oncogenes 
such as MYC in hematologic cancers. Current studies are now focused 
on optimizing combinatorial epigenetic therapies with conventional 
chemotherapies and immunotherapies, particularly given the ability 
of epigenetic therapeutics to promote re-expression of tumor antigens 
and interferon (IFN)-mediated antitumor immunity. Indeed, the 
development of a new generation of more specific epigenome-targeted 
inhibitors, combined with our increased knowledge of the underlying 
epigenetic mechanisms contributing to tumorigenesis, has enabled 
a precision medicine–based approach to harnessing the potential of 
these drugs. This may be particularly valuable in the context of improv­
ing patient responses to a variety of therapies beyond chemotherapies 
and immunotherapies, such as radiation and hormone therapies.
There are several hundred chromatin enzymes and binding proteins 
in the human genome, and the current focus is to identify more specific 
inhibitors. Indeed, targeted inhibitors of numerous mutated chroma­
tin regulators have been developed, with >30 compounds currently 
in various stages of development and preclinical trials. Some notable 
examples showing early clinical success include EZH2 inhibitors for 
lymphomas, sarcomas, and melanoma; IDH inhibitors for AML and 
gliomas carrying mutant IDH1 or IDH2 genes; LSD1 inhibitors for 
AML and small-cell lung cancer; and DOT1L and MLL1 inhibitors for 
leukemias with activated MLL1. Given the broad potential effects of 
epigenetic regulators, it is perhaps not surprising that there have been 
some dose-limiting toxicities, particularly among those that are less 
target-specific. Collectively, the emerging picture is that the most effec­
tive and robust use of epigenetic drugs in cancer will be fine-tuning 
and potentiating the effects of other therapies that are either incom­
pletely effective or marked by widespread resistance.
■
■EPIGENETICS OF AGING
Like many diseases of aging, human aging itself results from the 
complex interplay between genes and the environment. Evidence 
that the epigenome may be the key link between these processes 
derives from observations that numerous environmental stimuli and 
stressors—ranging from diet and exercise to hormones and circadian 
rhythms—contribute to both aging and epigenetic alterations (Fig. 
497-1). Thus, a lifetime of exposures progressively disrupts the chro­
matin landscape. These age-dependent changes in chromatin organi­
zation increase the susceptibility of the genome to mutations and also 
reduce transcriptional fidelity. Further, provocative findings in model 
systems demonstrate that stress-induced epigenetic changes can be 
transmitted over several generations and can even affect the life span 
of later generations. Among these global epigenetic alterations, there

is dysregulation of histone modifications and a general loss of histone 
proteins with aging across taxa. Amazingly, experimental increases in 
histone levels, particularly histones H3 and H4, but not H2A or H2B, 
can reverse these age-related changes in mammalian cells and in the 
yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae model.
Thus, the sum of current evidence suggests a model of aging via a 
general increase in activating epigenetic modifications along with a loss 
of repressive modifications. Together these changes create a state of 
transcriptional instability and “noise” that inhibits accurate transcrip­
tion. Cells from patients with Hutchinson-Gilford progeria syndrome 
(HGPS), the most severe form of human premature aging, display 
reduced levels of both H3K9me3 and H3K27me3 repressive chromatin. 
In another premature aging disease, Werner syndrome, DNA damage 
induces global loss of H3K9me3 and H3K27me3 due to the inherent 
absence of the Werner syndrome ATP-dependent DNA helicase, which 
is critical for DNA repair. Such heterochromatin loss is not limited to 
premature aging conditions, as aged cells derived from healthy older 
humans display age-dependent loss of H3K9me3 leading to aberrant 
expression of normally repressed transposable elements. Activation 
of these mobile elements correlates with neurodegenerative disorders 
and may also promote other aging-related phenotypes such as cancer. 
Human fibroblasts undergoing cellular senescence (exit from cell cycle 
due to replicative or other stress) undergo destabilization of compact 
heterochromatin adjacent to the nuclear periphery, in so-called laminassociated domains (LADs). At LADs, in addition to a reduction of 
repressive histone modifications as discussed above, there are broad 
new regions of the euchromatic histone modification H3K4me3. This 
general loss of heterochromatin can promote the activation of cytosolic 
DNA and RNA sensing pathways that promote innate immune signal­
ing and “inflammaging.”
In addition to age-associated alterations of histone modifications, 
direct manipulation of chromatin-modifying enzymes that control 
these marks affects the balance between heterochromatic and euchro­
matic regions, and it alters the lifespan of model organisms. Inhibiting 
the H3K27me3 histone demethylase KDM6A results in increased 
repressive H3K27me3 and extended lifespan in Caenorhabditis elegans. 
Consistent with this, genetic reduction of enzymes (ash-2, set-2, wdr-5) 
that add the activating H3K4me3 histone modification also extends 
lifespan in C. elegans. The consequences of these genetic manipulations 
nicely correspond to the observed changes in histone modifications as 
described above. Beyond histone-modifying enzymes, dysregulation of 
the levels or function of chromatin remodelers can also affect lifespan 
in model organisms. This dysregulation occurs in humans as well, as 
in the nucleosome remodeling deacetylase complex (NuRD), which is 
reduced in HGPS fibroblasts and in aged healthy donors.
In addition to age-related changes in histone methylation, histone 
acetylation also contributes to aging phenotypes. Dysregulation of his­
tone acetyltransferases (HATs) and HDACs is associated with reduced 
longevity across model organisms. Further, sirtuin deacetylases (class 
III NAD+-dependent HDACs) promote health span and lifespan across 
species as key mediators of pro-longevity effects of caloric restriction. 
Indeed, loss of Sirt6 results in premature aging in mice, while caloric 
restriction–induced increases of Sirt1 and Sirt6 expression can delay 
aging. As discussed previously, metabolism and acetylation are intri­
cately linked, and the sirtuins, via NAD+ levels, and other HDACs 
may play key roles connecting the environment, gene expression, and 
physiologic output. For instance, exercise in humans reduces activity 
of HDACs 4 and 5, leading to increased H3K36ac in skeletal muscle, 
which likely promotes beneficial gene expression.
Epigenetic alterations with aging are not limited to histone modifi­
cations and extend to DNA methylation. Consistent with the histone 
patterns, DNA methylation data support the model described above—
that is, general decompaction of the epigenome with aging. Specifically, 
levels of 5-mC are reduced in senescent human cells, and global DNA 
hypomethylation occurs across the human genome with aging. Con­
current with this overall hypomethylated state, there are local regions 
of hypermethylation focused near CpGs at gene promoters, particu­
larly at genes that maintain cellular differentiation and cell identity. 
This epigenetic disruption during aging thus leads to profound changes 

in transcription. For example, in hematopoietic stem cells, DNA hyper­
methylation blocks proper binding of transcription factors, resulting 
in dysregulation of normal gene expression with aging. Importantly, 
these patterns are not merely stochastic alterations in response to 
environmental stressors throughout aging. Indeed, the methylation 
status of a defined number of CpG sites is a highly accurate predictor of 
chronologic age in human tissues. This work reveals that DNA meth­
ylation status with aging outperforms previous standard biomarkers of 
aging, such as p16 expression levels and telomere length, and will be 
highly valuable in the near future to gauge effects of treatment aiming 
to ameliorate diseases of aging.

■
■EPIGENETICS OF THE BRAIN AND BEHAVIOR
Brain disorders are among the greatest clinical challenges to under­
stand and to treat. Most neurologic and psychiatric disorders result 
from complex dysregulation of numerous genes and pathways. In 
this interplay between underlying genetic predisposition and external 
environmental factors, aberrant epigenetic regulation is increasingly 
recognized as a potentially key modulator (Fig. 497-1).
More directly, however, several progressive neurodevelopmental 
disorders are caused by germline mutations in chromatin regulators. 
Mutations in methyl CpG binding protein 2 (MECP2), a protein 
important for binding to methylated DNA and contributing to gene 
repression, are the major cause of Rett syndrome. MeCP2 loss leads 
to overactive gene transcription in neurons and impaired presynaptic 
excitatory functions. Similarly, Kabuki syndrome, another progres­
sive neurodevelopmental disorder, is caused by germline mutations in 
either the H3K4me1 histone methyltransferase, MLL4 (KMT2D), or 
the H3K27me3 demethylase, UTX (KDM6A). This disorder may derive 
from dysregulation of transcriptional enhancers, a major class of gene 
regulatory elements, as both MLL4 and UTX play a key role in activa­
tion of enhancers. Finally, the acetyltransferase CBP (CREBBP) also is 
important for gene enhancer function and, when mutated, can lead to 
Rubinstein-Taybi syndrome, a cause of intellectual disability.
CHAPTER 497
The Role of Epigenetics in Disease and Treatment 
Beyond germline mutations, altered methylation dynamics can 
drive disorders of neural development and of neurodegeneration. 
Fragile X syndrome, characterized by learning disabilities and cogni­
tive impairment, is caused by mutations in the FMR1 or FMR2 gene or 
by hypermethylation of the transcriptional promoters regulating FMR1 
or FMR2. Similarly, Prader-Willi syndrome and Angelman syndrome, 
neurodevelopmental conditions caused by abnormal imprinting of the 
paternal or maternal chromosomal region (15q11-13), respectively, 
are frequently caused by aberrant DNA methylation. Further, DNA 
hypomethylation is implicated in some neurodegenerative condi­
tions. For instance, in Parkinson’s disease, several genes involved in 
pathogenesis are hypomethylated due to DNMT1 depletion, includ­
ing the α-synuclein gene (SCNA). In Alzheimer’s disease (AD), DNA 
hypomethylation occurs at promoters of key pathogenic genes such as 
amyloid precursor protein (APP). Indeed, APP promoter methylation 
is responsive to environmental factors, including aging, a major risk 
factor for AD. Likewise, presenilin-1 (PSEN1) is implicated in AD 
and displays altered DNA methylation in response to variations in 
metabolic stimuli. Recent evidence from human AD brains demon­
strated significant enrichment of H3K9 and H3K27 acetylation and 
provided evidence that this dysregulation of the epigenome promotes 
gene transcription pathways involved in AD pathogenesis. Studies of 
Huntington’s disease (HD) have demonstrated DNA hypomethylation 
and decreased histone acetylation, in part due to altered function of 
the acetyl transferase CBP, leading to transcriptional dysregulation. 
Together, these observations underscore altered epigenetic regulation 
as a crucial feature of neurodegeneration.
Additional gene regulatory proteins in the nervous system interact 
with and are regulated by chromatin modifiers. REST (repressor ele­
ment 1–silencing transcription factor) is important in neuronal homeo­
stasis through its ability to recruit chromatin regulatory enzymes, such 
as histone deacetylases and histone methyltransferases, and via its 
control over gene expression. REST levels increase with aging and 
serve a protective function in neurons against age-associated stressors 
and loss of cognitive function associated with AD. Similar to REST,

brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF), another important media­
tor of neural development and homeostasis, is implicated in a variety 
of neurologic and psychiatric disorders including HD, depression, 
schizophrenia, bipolar disorder, and autism. Knockdown of BDNF in 
the dentate gyrus leads to depression-like behavior in mouse models, 
and BDNF mediates effects of antidepressant therapies. Chromatin 
pathways, including DNA methylation/MeCP2 and H3K27me3, play a 
key role in BDNF regulation as observed in brains from patients with 
schizophrenia.

Finally, addiction medicine is another frontier where epigenetics 
holds great promise to reveal connections between environmental 
exposure and phenotypes. Although still in its early stages in terms of 
mechanistic understanding, emerging evidence demonstrates disrup­
tion of epigenetic homeostasis as a consequence of addictive substances 
ranging from alcohol to cocaine. For example, the acetylation of regula­
tory elements in the FOSB gene by the histone acetyltransferase CBP is 
associated with behavioral effects of cocaine. Opioid exposure appears 
to promote a generally more open and permissive state of chromatin 
marked by increases in histone acetylation and reductions in histone 
methylation, which may allow for a more hyperresponsive state and 
reinforce reward-seeking behaviors. Ethanol also induces histone 
acetylation and a decompacted chromatin structure with direct effects 
on learning and memory function.
■
■EPIGENETIC INFLUENCES ON INFECTION, 
IMMUNITY, AND INFLAMMATION
Alterations in gene expression patterns are important determinants of 
immune-mediated disease, and in turn, epigenetics regulates infection, 
immunity, and inflammation (Fig. 497-1). Treatment with immunestimulating agents such as lipopolysaccharide (LPS) and tumor necrosis 
factor α activates expression of numerous inflammatory genes within 
hours, with precise gene pathways and activation kinetics determined by 
the cellular epigenetic state. HATs and HDACs are critical components 
of this response, coordinating with proinflammatory transcription fac­
tors, such as AP-1 and NF-κB, to either activate (in the case of HATs) or 
repress (in the case of HDACs) inflammatory genes. For example, cor­
ticosteroids recruit HDAC2 to promoters of NF-κB–stimulated inflam­
matory genes to prevent activation during asthma treatment.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
Type 1 IFN responses are exceptional examples of regulatory com­
plexity governed by epigenetic control. In an unstimulated state, the 
H3K9 methyltransferases G9a (EHMT2) and EHMT1 suppress expres­
sion of IFN and IFN-induced genes. Upon induction of IFN-stimulated 
genes, STAT transcription factors recruit chromatin remodeling com­
plexes, such as BAF (SMARCA4), and recruit HATs including p300, 
CBP, and GCN5 (KAT2A). In turn, chromatin remodeling and acetyla­
tion recruit chromatin binding proteins including the bromodomain 
protein, BRD4, which promotes transcriptional elongation and full 
activation. Beyond the DNA level, METTL3-mediated m6A methyla­
tion on mRNAs also is a critical regulator of IFN signaling in a variety 
of distinct cellular contexts.
Major regulators of adaptive immunity pathways are similarly epige­
netically regulated. CD4+ and CD8+ T cells undergo extensive changes 
in histone modification profiles during differentiation to distinct 
subsets of effector T cells. For example, genes associated with effector 
T-cell functions in CD8+ memory T cells (e.g., PRDM1, KLRG1, IFNG) 
display enrichment of H3K4me3 and low levels of H3K27me3 com­
pared with those genes in naïve T cells. DNA methylation also plays an 
important regulatory role and may contribute to disease. For example, 
CD4+ T cells from individuals with rheumatoid arthritis (RA), sys­
temic scleroderma, and latent autoimmune diabetes in adults display 
hypermethylation of the FOXP3 gene, which activates regulatory T 
cells that dampen immune responses. In addition, hypermethylation of 
the CTLA4 locus occurs in regulatory T cells from RA patients, impair­
ing their immunosuppressive abilities.
During infection, epigenetic processes can play critical roles in both 
the immune response and defense against pathogens, as well strategies 
exploited by microorganisms to co-opt the host cellular machinery to 
advantage of the pathogen. Respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) infection 
promotes the expression of the histone demethylase KDM5B, which 

removes H3K4 methyl groups from antiviral genes such as type 1 
IFNs, driving a switch from T helper 1– to T helper 2–type immune 
responses, thereby contributing to chronic infection. Similarly, influ­
enza upregulates the repressive H3K9me3 methyltransferase SETDB2 
to block expression of CXCL1 and a variety of NF-κB target genes 
involved in attracting neutrophils and host defense, both serving to 
lengthen the infection and contributing to bacterial superinfection. 
Regarding the host response to infection, studies have revealed that 
differences in host tissue-, age-, and sex-biased epigenetic profiles 
might shape susceptibility and responses to infection. For example, 
differential DNA methylation at the ACE2 gene may impact expression 
levels of this key cellular receptor and ultimately the ability of SARSCoV-2 to infect hosts, while alterations in antiviral IFN signaling may 
lead to more severe COVID-19 infection and disease. These findings 
are all supported by new discoveries demonstrating that epigenetics is 
a key component for the inflammatory memory that has been observed 
now across a wide variety of contexts. Numerous perturbations ranging 
from infections and vaccination to skin wounding and Western diets 
have now been shown to elicit an epigenetic memory that is maintained 
and propagated. This epigenetic memory extends beyond just the 
immune system to the involved tissues.
These findings have suggested a potential for epigenome-modifying 
drugs for the treatment of inflammatory and immune-related condi­
tions. For example, the DNA methylation inhibitors azacitidine and 
decitabine have immunosuppressive effects possibly mediated by 
enhanced expression of FOXP3, which generally suppresses immune 
responses. HDACi upregulate and downregulate immune genes, and 
they inhibit cytokine production in macrophages from patients with 
RA. Further, the HDACi vorinostat and panobinostat inhibit primary 
B-cell responses and antibody production in vitro and in vivo. Given 
these broad effects, it is not surprising that the HDACi trichostatin 
A (TSA) has efficacy in various model systems for treatment of RA, 
systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), asthma, acute kidney injury, 
sepsis-induced lung and cardiac damage, and acute pancreatitis. Simi­
larly, BETi also display broad effects in blocking antigen presentation 
and T- and B-cell activation and thus beneficial protective effects in 
a variety of inflammatory settings including autoimmunity, sepsis, 
atherosclerosis, psoriasis, periodontitis, and arthritis. Beyond these 
“broad-spectrum” epigenetic inhibitors, GSK-J4, which is a specific 
inhibitor of the H3K27me3 demethylases KDM6A and KDM6B, 
has anti-inflammatory activity, presumably by preventing loss of 
H3K27me3 repression over inflammatory genes. Similarly, inhibition 
of the H3K4me3 histone methyltransferase MLL1 blocks the induction 
of proinflammatory cytokine gene expression in a variety of contexts.
CONCLUSION
Due to the enormity and complexity of the chromatin and epigenetics 
fields and their reach into all areas of biology and medicine, it is not 
possible to cover such a broad scope in a single chapter. Thus, here 
we provide a concise snapshot highlighting key areas of development 
in medicine. We hope to have conveyed the tremendous excitement 
and promise that pervades the discipline. Indeed, given the expo­
nential growth in uncovering the interface between the epigenome 
and epigenetic therapies with the environment and disease, there is 
little doubt that the coming years will bring important additions to 
this field.
■
■FURTHER READING
Bates SE: Epigenetic therapies for cancer. N Engl J Med 383:650, 2020.
Carter B, Zhao K: The epigenetic basis of cellular heterogeneity. Nat 
Rev Genet 22:235, 2021.
Dai Z et al: The evolving metabolic landscape of chromatin biology 
and epigenetics. Nat Rev Genet 21:737, 2020.
Dinardo AR et al: Postinfectious epigenetic immune modifications—
a double-edged sword. N Engl J Med 384:261, 2021.
Hwang JY et al: The emerging field of epigenetics in neurodegenera­
tion and neuroprotection. Nat Rev Neurosci 18:347, 2017.
Janssen SM, Lorincz MC: Interplay between chromatin marks in 
development and disease. Nat Rev Genet 23:137, 2021.

# 06 - 498 The Role of Circadian Biology in Health and Disease

## 498 The Role of Circadian Biology in Health and Disease

Millán-Zambrano G et al: Histone post-translational modifica­
tions—cause and consequence of genome function. Nat Rev Genet 
23:563, 2022.
Sendinc E, Shi Y: RNA m6A methylation across the transcriptome. 
Mol Cell 83:428, 2023.
Vandereyken K et al: Methods and applications for single-cell and 
spatial multi-omics. Nat Rev Genet 24:494, 2023.
Zhang W et al: The ageing epigenome and its rejuvenation. Nat Rev 
Mol Cell Biol 21:137, 2020.

The Role of Circadian 

Biology in Health 

and Disease
Jonathan Cedernaes, Kathryn Moynihan Ramsey, 
Joseph Bass
Circadian rhythms are anticipatory, circa 24-h, autonomous cycles 
of physiology and behavior. These evolutionarily conserved rhythms 
have evolved at both the cell and tissue level to synchronize organismal 
function in anticipation of the 24-h rotation of the Earth. A common 
feature of modern “24/7” life is the routine disruption of these endog­
enous circadian cycles due to the rise in shift work, jet travel across 
time zones, exposure to blue light–emitting devices at night, and dis­
rupted sleep-wake behavior. In-depth characterization of the molecular 
basis of circadian disorders has generated novel avenues for research on 
how sleep-wake disruption has been associated with aging, metabolic 
disease, inflammation, and cancer. This chapter provides an overview 
of (1) the basic biology of the circadian system; (2) primary circadian 
rhythm and interrelated sleep disorders; and (3) the role of the circa­
dian system in both normal human physiology and disease states. We 
also include an overview of how the emerging field of chronobiology 
may impact drug action. A glossary of terms used in circadian biology 
is summarized in Table 498-1.
■
■BASIC EVOLUTION AND STRUCTURE 

OF THE CIRCADIAN SYSTEM
Long before the emergence of multicellular life, the Earth’s constant 
rotation around its axis gave rise to a daily cycle of light and darkness. 
At the emergence of the first prototypal gene involved in biological 
clock regulation—3.4 billion years ago in photosynthetic cyanobacteria—
the period of Earth’s rotation along its own axis was only 8 h. The 
co-occurrence in molecular evolution of the biological clock and 
photosynthesis hints at an interrelated and selective advantage of the 
clock in the regulation of energetic processes. Indeed, biological clocks 
coordinate oxygenic reactions with periods of sunlight each day, and 
perturbation of clock cycles reduces fitness, reproduction, and survival. 
Additionally, clocks protect photosynthetic organisms from the DNAdamaging effects of sunlight by timing the production of DNA repair 
processes, such as photolyase-mediated repair, to the nighttime. Across 
billions of years of evolution, as day length has gradually extended 
to today’s circa 24 h, highly conserved circadian clocks (from circa 
diem, meaning “about a day”) have been found in all photosensitive 
organisms, governing a wide range of biochemical, physiologic, and 
behavioral processes. A defining property of the circadian clock system 
is that it enables organisms to anticipate, rather than simply react to, 
daily changes in the external environment that are tied to the day-night 
cycle. In mammals, circadian systems are organized hierarchically with 
a light-responsive “master” circadian pacemaker located within the 
suprachiasmatic nucleus (SCN) of the anterior hypothalamus, which in 

turn presides over a network of both extra-SCN and peripheral clocks 
(see “Anatomic Organization of the Circadian Clock Network” below). 
Daily light exposure signals to the SCN and entrains the circadian 
system to the 24-h day (see “Entrainment and Measurement of the 
Circadian System,” below). In turn, the SCN maintains synchrony of a 
diverse network of both central and peripheral clocks via a variety of 
signals that have as of yet to be fully identified. These signals involve 
direct physiologic rhythms (core body temperature), the autonomic 
nervous system, and neuroendocrine signals, such as cortisol, which is 
part of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis.

■
■MOLECULAR ORGANIZATION OF THE 
MAMMALIAN CIRCADIAN CLOCK
At the molecular level, mammalian circadian rhythms are generated by 
a transcription-translation autoregulatory feedback loop. The forward 
limb of the clock is composed of the basic helix-loop-helix transcrip­
tion factors (TFs) CLOCK (or its paralogue, NPAS2) and BMAL1. 
These drive expression of their own repressors (PERs and CRYs) in the 
negative limb in a cycle that repeats itself every 24 h (Fig. 498-1). A 
second short feedback loop involves CLOCK/BMAL1-mediated tran­
scription of the retinoic acid–related orphan nuclear receptor families 
ROR and REV-ERB, which activate and repress Bmal1 transcription, 
respectively. Rhythmic posttranslational regulation of the stability 
and degradation of core clock TFs occurs via events such as phos­
phorylation by casein kinase 1 epsilon (CK1ε) and casein kinase 1 delta 
(CK1δ) and ubiquitination by FBXL3 and FBXL21. In addition to the 
circa 24-h oscillation of core clock genes, a wide array of downstream 
clock-controlled genes (CCGs) exhibit broad rhythmic amplitude in 
expression, ultimately giving rise to rhythmic physiologic processes.
CHAPTER 498
The importance of localized clock gene expression has been dem­
onstrated by genetic animal studies, such as with targeted ablation 
of Bmal1, the only clock gene that lacks a known functional paralog. 
Deletion of Bmal1 either in the whole brain or in regions that span the 
brain region that coordinates circadian rhythms—the SCN—causes 
behavioral arrhythmicity, even when genetic ablation occurs in adult 
life. Conversely, restoring Bmal1 expression specifically in brain 
in global adult Bmal1 mutant mice rescues behavioral locomotor 
rhythms. Of note, whereas the protein CLOCK normally heterodimer­
izes with BMAL1, the paralogous protein NPAS2 can functionally 
substitute for CLOCK within the pacemaker neurons. Thus, while mice 
lacking either Clock or Npas2 genes maintain rhythmicity, mutants 
lacking both CLOCK and NPAS2 lack circadian rhythms in locomotor 
activity. Further, mutations in many of the clock genes are associated 
with impaired circadian rhythms and physiology in both experimental 
animal models and humans (see “Primary Pathologies of the Circadian 
System” below).
The Role of Circadian Biology in Health and Disease  
A major transformation in our understanding of circadian biology 
came with the discovery that the molecular clock network is present 
not only in the SCN but also within most peripheral tissues, as well as 
in extra-SCN neurons in the brain. In primates, ~82% of all proteincoding transcripts exhibit daily 24-h rhythms in some tissue or other. 
In rodents studied under constant conditions, ~3–16% of the transcrip­
tome in each tissue exhibits 24-h rhythms in mRNA expression levels, 
even though the repertoire of such genes varies substantially between 
tissues, in accordance with tissue-specific functions. The core clock 
feedback loop and the induction of transcriptional CCG rhythms also 
involves epigenetic mechanisms such as conformational chromatin 
dynamics, histone acetylation, and DNA methylation. Conversely, 
posttranscriptional events such as RNA polyadenylation, nucleocy­
toplasmic shuttling, alternative splicing, and mRNA translation also 
exhibit circadian variation, further increasing the repertoire of rhyth­
mic regulation at a cellular level.
■
■ANATOMIC ORGANIZATION OF THE 

CIRCADIAN CLOCK NETWORK
The molecular circadian feedback loop is synchronized with sunrise 
each day by photosensitive melanopsin-expressing neurons within 
the retina. These neurons provide input to the SCN via the retino­
hypothalamic tract (RHT), allowing mammals to maintain coherent

TABLE 498-1  Glossary of Terms Used in Discussion of the Circadian System
TERM
DESCRIPTION
ASPD
Advanced sleep phase disorder (see text for description).
CBT
Core body temperature. Often used as an indicator of the circadian rhythm but can be masked by sleep and exercise.
CCGs
Clock-controlled genes; output of the molecular clock.
Chronotype
Internal circadian rhythm of an individual determined by phase of entrainment, determining sleep propensity and timing of maximum 
alertness over a 24-h period.
Circadian period
Time required for one complete cycle or oscillation. Calculated by the time distance between two consecutive peaks or troughs of a 
circadian variable.
Circadian phase
Timing of the circadian rhythm. Defined by comparing, e.g., the peak (acrophase) or trough (bathyphase) to a fixed event, e.g., to a point 
in time. Synonymous with phase angle.
Circadian rhythm
A biological process that exhibits an endogenous, entrainable oscillation of ~24 h.
Circadian rhythm sleep 
disorders
Disorders of multiple etiology that have in common that they result in maladjustment of the biological clock with respect to the 
environment.
Constant routine
An experimental paradigm designed to study endogenous circadian rhythms in humans, by keeping behavioral and environmental 
factors constant. These paradigms thereby typically entail a combination of constant dim lighting, evenly distributed isocaloric energy 
intake, semirecumbent posture, and forced extended wakefulness.
Desynchrony
Loss of synchrony occurring either between a rhythm and its zeitgeber (external, “time giver” signal) or between two or more rhythms 
within an organism (internal).
Diurnal rhythm
An oscillation synchronized with the day/night cycle that repeats itself with a 24-h period. The rhythm does not have to persist when time 
cues (e.g., light) are absent.
DLMO
Dim-light melatonin onset; a marker of melatonin rhythm.
DSPD
Delayed sleep phase disorder (see text for description).
Entrainment
Synchronization of a circadian rhythm or other self-sustaining oscillation by a factor—zeitgeber—that enforces the oscillator. Constant 
entrainment between the zeitgeber and the oscillator results in a stable phase relationship between these entities.
Infradian rhythm
A recurrent cycle or period with a period length significantly greater than 24 h.
Melatonin
Hormone produced primarily by the pineal gland (chemical name N-acetyl-5-methoxytryptamine); derived from L-tryptophan. Various 
forms of melatonin can be prescribed for circadian rhythm sleep disorders or sleep disorders.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
Non-24-h rhythm disorder
A syndrome in which there typically are chronic 1- to 2-h daily delays in sleep onset and wake times in an individual living in society, e.g., 
due to complete blindness.
Peripheral clocks
Clocks presiding outside of the suprachiasmatic nucleus, the circadian system’s master pacemaker.
PRC
Phase response curve; visual representation of how a particular manipulation (e.g., light) produces phase shifts as a function of the 
phase (i.e., circadian time) at which the manipulation occurs. Defining the PRC to light has enabled researchers to understand and 
predict how entrainment to light cycles is accomplished.
SCN
The suprachiasmatic nucleus or nuclei, also known as the master pacemaker in mammalian species. A bilateral set of nuclei positioned 
in the anterior ventral hypothalamus. Essential for entraining extra-SCN central and peripheral oscillators to the prevailing light-dark 
cycle via photic input from the retina.
Shift work
Work scheduled so that it occurs outside of the traditional work schedule of 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., or 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., depending on 
definition. Various forms of shift work exist, such as early morning, evening, or night shifts, as well as rotating shifts.
Ultradian rhythm
A recurrent cycle or period with a period significantly shorter than 24 h—e.g., a 2-h rhythm would exhibit 12 cycles within a circadian 
(24-h) rhythm.
RRE
Bmal1
CK1ε/δ
PERs
P
CRYs
P
CLOCK
BMAL1
E-box
RORα/γ
FIGURE 498-1  Central clock molecular mechanism. The core molecular clock machinery in mammals is encoded by interlocking transcription-translation feedback loops 
that oscillate with ~24-h periodicity. The transcription factors CLOCK and BMAL1 heterodimerize to drive transcription of downstream clock-controlled target genes 
containing E-box enhancer elements. Among these, the PER and CRY proteins multimerize and inhibit CLOCK/BMAL1, while RORs and REV-ERBs activate and inhibit, 
respectively, Bmal1 transcription, resulting in rhythmic oscillations of clock-controlled and downstream target genes.

Stabilization
FBXL21
CRYs
CRYs
P
FBXL3
Degradation
Clock-controlled genes
Rev-erbα/β

Environmental inputs and 
internal circadian organization
Brain Clocks
SCN
Environmental
light/dark
cycle
SCN
Extra-SCN
LHA
PVN
ARC
PIT
Non-autonomous
circadian control
Peripheral Clocks
Vasculature
Liver
Adrenals
Pancreas
Muscle
Environmental
nutrient cycle
fasting/feeding
Fibroblasts
Intestine
Hematopoetic
Adipose
Autonomous
circadian control
FIGURE 498-2  Central and peripheral clocks coordinate environmental cues with behavior and physiologic outputs. Light entrains the master pacemaker neurons in 
the suprachiasmatic nucleus (SCN), which subsequently synchronizes extra-SCN and peripheral clocks. Brain clock output includes sleep-wake, fasting-feeding, and 
energy expenditure cycles, while peripheral clock output includes a wide range of physiologic processes, including glucose homeostasis, oxidative metabolism, cytokine 
production, and stress response. The right column indicates different ways that circadian disruptors, such as diet, shift work, or other circadian rhythm sleep disorders, may 
impact the clock—i.e., by changing circadian period, phase, or amplitude.
organismal rhythms in line with the external light/dark cycle. Under­
standing the circuit organization of the circadian clock within the brain 
is increasingly relevant in understanding how the master circadian 
pacemaker center within the SCN regulates feeding, sleep-wake activ­
ity, endocrine processes, energy expenditure, and metabolism (Fig. 
498-2). Identification of the SCN as the master pacemaker was first 
established by the observation that SCN lesioning induced complete 
loss of rhythms of locomotor activity, drinking behavior, and endo­
crine hormone secretion. The ventral “core” region of the SCN, which 
is composed of neurons producing vasoactive intestinal polypeptide 
(VIP), receives photic information directly from the retina through the 
RHT. At the molecular level, circadian gene transcription is induced 
within the SCN through the initial activation of immediate early genes, 
such as Per1, Per2, c-fos, and jun. Cells within the “core” region of the 
SCN then signal primarily via γ-aminobutyric acid (GABA)-ergic neu­
rotransmitter release to synchronize the cells within the “shell” region 
of the SCN, which produce arginine vasopressin (AVP), the most 
important neuropeptide for maintaining intra-SCN synchronicity.
The SCN communicates to extra-SCN and peripheral clocks 
through both secreted factors and neuronal projections. The former 
was elegantly proven by the ability of SCN grafts to partially restore 
locomotor rhythms in SCN-lesioned animals. Efferent nerve outputs 
arise both from the AVP-producing shell region of the SCN and the 
VIP-predominated core. The SCN projects to several hypothalamic 
and thalamic regions, including the median preoptic nucleus (MPO), 
the subparaventricular zone (SPZ), the dorsomedial hypothalamus 
(DMH), the paraventricular nucleus of the hypothalamus (PVH), and 
the paraventricular nucleus of the thalamus (PVT). Some of these 

Behavioral and 
physiologic outputs
Circadian
disruptors
Sleep/wake
Feeding/fasting
Energy expenditure
Glucose homeostasis
∆ Period 
(High fat)
Original phase
New phase
period
amplitude
Environmental
light cycle
Internal
circadian time
phase
∆ Phase 
(Shift work)
∆ Amplitude 
(Night eating, insulin resistance)
Glucose homeostasis
Lipogenesis
Oxidative metabolism
Mitochondrial respiration
Xenobiotic detoxifixation
Cytokine production
Vascular tone
Hemostasis
Stress response
Thermogenesis
Incretin production
DNA damage/repair
CHAPTER 498
The Role of Circadian Biology in Health and Disease  
regions, in turn, regulate output to both sleep- and wake-promoting 
regions, as well as to regions involved in regulation of autonomic, body 
temperature, and hormonal rhythms, as well as feeding. The SCN is 
thereby thought to promote sleep in part through the transmission 
of neural signals that terminate in the sleep-promoting ventrolateral 
preoptic nucleus (VLPO), i.e., one of the brain regions that is active 
during sleep. In contrast, the SCN promotes wakefulness during the 
active phase by transmission of neural signals that—by passing through 
regions such as the SPZ and the DMH—terminate in wake-promoting 
regions, including the locus coeruleus, lateral hypothalamic nucleus, 
ventral tegmental area, and dorsal raphe nucleus.
The SCN also signals via noradrenergic fibers to the pineal gland to 
regulate the circadian production of the hormone melatonin. SCN con­
trol of the nighttime rise in pineal melatonin release (in both diurnal 
and nocturnal animals) is mediated through a pathway involving the 
PVH. Of note, artificial light at night delays the secretion of melatonin, 
ultimately affecting sleep (see “Endocrine Systems Regulated by the 
Circadian Clock” below). Melatonin plays a complex role in the circa­
dian system since the MT1 and MT2 melatonin receptors are expressed 
in the SCN itself; thus, melatonin feeds back to modulate circadian 
outputs to other cells in the brain and body.
Neuronal output from the SCN also reaches peripheral tissues such 
as the adrenal glands, liver, and pancreas. The SCN produces rhythmic 
variation in multiple neuroendocrine axes, producing daily rhythms 
of gonadotropin, thyrotropin, and somatotropin. Prominent HPA axis 
rhythms ultimately give rise to daily variation in diverse pathways 
essential for hemodynamic stability, metabolism, and inflammation. 
These rhythms originate with SCN control of corticotropin-releasing

hormone (CRH)–producing cells in the PVH, which may regulate 
sleep as well as induce daily oscillations of both pituitary adrenocor­
ticotropic hormone (ACTH) and adrenal cortisol. Highlighting the 
importance of SCN output for peripheral rhythms, there is a dramatic 
reduction in the number of transcripts that exhibit circadian rhythms 
in the liver following SCN ablation in mice. Nonetheless, when the 
autonomous clock in the liver is ablated in mice, some key clock 
transcripts such as Per2 still cycle provided the core body temperature 
rhythm persists. Whereas the SCN is exclusively entrained by light, 
meal timing can signal circadian time directly to peripheral tissues 
such as the liver. Thus, shifted meal timing as occurs during shift work 
or jetlag can uncouple peripheral clocks from the central pacemaker. 
Temperature can also phase shift peripheral tissue clocks, but not the 
SCN clock. This is an important phenomenon because, at the organis­
mal level, the SCN generates the core body temperature rhythm as one 
of the major mechanisms to signal circadian time to peripheral clocks.

■
■ENTRAINMENT AND MEASUREMENT 

OF THE CIRCADIAN SYSTEM
Under normal light-dark cycles, the circadian system is corrected or 
“entrained” on a daily basis, producing diurnal rhythms of 24 h. Such 
signals of entrainment are called zeitgebers (German for “time-giver” 
signals) and include light exposure, meal timing, and activity patterns. 
Light serves as the dominant zeitgeber for the circadian system, and a 
breakthrough in understanding photoentrainment in mammals came 
with the discovery of the melanopsin system, which is composed of a 
specialized class of photosensitive retinal ganglion cells that expresses 
the blue light–sensitive photopigment melanopsin in the inner retina, 
separate from the photoreceptive rods and cones. Blue light around 
this wavelength (~480 nm) suppresses melatonin, such that melatonin 
levels are normally low during the day, promoting subjective and objec­
tive (electroencephalography assessed) wakefulness.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
The ability of light to entrain the circadian system functions accord­
ing to a so-called phase response curve (PRC). When light exposure 
occurs prior to the critical phase of the core body temperature (CBT), 
defined by the CBT’s minimum, light produces a phase delay in the 
circadian rhythm. Conversely, light exposure after this critical period 
causes phase advances. The circadian system can respond even to 
small changes in light intensity (e.g., dim light at ~100 lux can produce 
half of the phase delay compared with an almost 100-fold greater light 
exposure). This responsiveness has been found to be highly individual 
and varies widely. This is in part due to genetic variation, as variants in 
clock genes can modulate the responsiveness of the human circadian 
system to light.
When an organism is placed in an environment without zeitgebers, 
the circadian rhythm is said to free-run, as it relies on the endogenous 
rhythm of the circadian system. In humans, the study of endogenous 
circadian rhythms can be achieved by using a so-called constant rou­
tine that eliminates the risk of masking by factors such as sleep. In 
these paradigms, subjects are kept awake in a constant semi-recumbent 
posture, meals are provided on an hourly basis, and light is constantly 
kept below the level that can phase shift the SCN. Concurrently, circa­
dian rhythms are assessed by frequently measuring CBT, melatonin, or 
peptidergic hormone rhythms over the course of more than 24 h. In ani­
mals, endogenous circadian rhythms are instead studied by examining 
behavior, physiologic responses, and voluntary locomotor activity fol­
lowing 30–36 h of complete darkness. From these measurements, key 
properties of the circadian system can be ascertained, such as period 
length (peak-to-peak or trough-to-trough time), amplitude (peak-totrough difference), and phase (timing of peak or trough in relation to a 
reference point) (Fig. 498-2).
These studies have revealed that the endogenous human circadian 
clock runs with a period length of ~24.2 h, while that of mice runs 
at ~23.5 h, with some variability across strains. In humans, evidence 
further indicates that females may have a slightly shorter circadian 
clock than males (24.1 vs 24.2 h), and many circadian parameters have 
been found to exhibit differences that are dependent on biological sex. 
Notably, interindividual variability in the endogenous circadian period 
length is further diversified by the existence of genetic polymorphisms in 

clock genes (see below). These gene variants can confer extremes in the 
endogenous circadian period as well as phase; the latter can be advanced 
or delayed by ~3–4 h in each direction. This is due both to altered cir­
cadian rhythms at the cellular level and to altered SCN responsiveness 
to entrainment by light. For instance, PER3 gene contains a variablenumber, tandem-repeat polymorphism. Individuals homozygous for a 
PER3 5/5 genotype have been reported to be more responsive than PER3 
4/4 homozygous individuals to the melatonin-suppressing effect of eve­
ning blue light exposure. By analyzing genetic variation across ~700,000 
individuals, the number of genetic loci that have been identified that 
contribute to variability in chronotype is in the hundreds.
Using specifically developed questionnaires to establish preferred 
sleep-wake timing, individuals can be categorized into so-called 
morningness-eveningness types or chronotypes. The most commonly 
used questionnaires are the Horne-Östberg Morningness-Eveningness 
Questionnaire (MEQ) and the Munich ChronoType Questionnaire 
(MCTQ). A composite MEQ score allows grouping into five categories 
that range from definite morning-type to evening-type individuals 
based on preferred waking time. In contrast, the MCTQ centers on 
the midpoint of sleep as a circadian marker, queries age and sex across 
a range of geographical locations, and can be used to ascertain differ­
ences between socially imposed sleep patterns (e.g., on working days) 
and sleep patterns on free days (the difference constituting so-called 
social jetlag). According to MCTQs obtained from primarily European 
populations, ~1% of the general population goes to bed before 10:00 
p.m. and ~8% after 3:00 a.m. Differences in chronotype are linked to 
altered circadian timing, including peak levels of melatonin, which 
can vary by up to 4 h between extreme morning and evening types. 
Extreme chronotypes have also been shown to be linked to various 
traits; i.e., low morningness scores have been associated with greater 
tolerance to night shift work.
Melatonin is one of the most commonly used peripheral markers of 
an individual’s circadian rhythm, reflecting the rhythmic function of 
the SCN. Circadian rhythms of melatonin can be measured in saliva 
or plasma, whereas 6-sulphatoxymelatonin (aMT6S), a metabolite 
generated from the breakdown of melatonin, can also be measured in 
urine. Accurate estimations of melatonin rhythms are often obtained 
by analyzing the dim light melatonin onset (DLMO). As the name 
implies, this involves evening/nighttime sampling of melatonin as 
opposed to 24-h sampling. This makes DLMO quantification useful 
in both the clinical and research settings. In normally entrained indi­
viduals, the DLMO can be used to ascertain whether an individual’s 
circadian rhythm is phase advanced or delayed, and this onset typically 
occurs ~2 h before the onset of sleep. The midpoint of sleep—the main 
marker used by the MCTQ—correlates more strongly with melatonin 
onset than the MEQ score. In the morning hours, the offset of mela­
tonin (“DLMoff”) can be used as a marker of circadian alignment or 
misalignment with the light-dark cycle. When individuals are exposed 
only to the natural light-dark cycle dictated by the sun, such as in 
an outdoor natural lighting environment, DLMO and DLMoff occur 
earlier. In contrast, exposure to artificial light has the overall effect of 
delaying the biological night and contributes to widening differences 
between chronotypes in modern society.
The CBT is also often utilized as an indicator of the circadian 
rhythm. Even though CBT is more variable than DLMO, it usually 
correlates well with the phase obtained using the melatonin rhythm. 
The CBT, however, can be masked by factors such as sleep, food intake, 
and activity. CBT can be recorded and registered wirelessly with rela­
tive ease. In humans, CBT can be recorded via rectal thermometers or 
probes that are swallowed to pass through the gastrointestinal tract. 
When humans are studied under normal conditions with normal light­
ing and sleep duration from 2300 to 0700 h, the CBT reaches around 
37.2°C by 0900 h, and from there, it continues to rise slowly until it 
reaches 37.4°C around 11 h later. The CBT then drops to the daily low 
of 36.5°C in the early morning (0400 h). The minimum in body tem­
perature also corresponds to the trough in the 24-h rhythm in resting 
energy expenditure.
Given the interrelationship between the circadian system and sleepwake systems, researchers have developed paradigms that uncouple

the circadian system from sleep-wake states, enabling the study of the 
contribution of the circadian system to investigated parameters across 
the entire sleep-wake cycle. These paradigms are known as “forced 
desynchrony” protocols and involve enforcing a significantly shortened 
(e.g., 20 h) or prolonged (e.g., 28 h) day length upon individuals. These 
protocols thus attempt to approximate what occurs during rotating 
shift work or “jetlag,” e.g., when travel across several time zones sud­
denly shifts the light-dark and behavioral cycles drastically away from 
the entrained 24-h rhythm. As described below, forced desynchrony 
protocols have contributed to uncovering how the circadian system 
regulates parameters such as cognitive performance, subjective alert­
ness, and metabolic and cardiovascular health.
■
■PRIMARY PATHOLOGIES OF THE 

CIRCADIAN SYSTEM
An overarching term for disorders of the circadian system is circadian 
rhythm sleep disorders (CRSDs), where there is a mismatch between 
subjective behavioral and physiologic rhythms with the environmental 
light-dark or social activity-rest cycles (i.e., the body clock is out of 
sync with the external light-dark cycle). CRSDs can arise either due to 
misalignment of an exogenous environmental factor, such as light, or 
misalignment of the activity-rest cycle, such as occurs with shift work 
or jetlag, in relation to endogenous circadian timing. Mutations in the 
core clock genes themselves can also alter intrinsic circadian timing in 
relation to the external environment, which makes it difficult for these 
individuals to properly realign themselves. These disorders often result 
in adverse effects such as excessive sleepiness or depressed mood, often 
causing individuals to be unable to maintain a job or attend school at 
regular hours. The criteria for CRSDs based on the International Clas­
sification of Sleep Disorders (ICSD) are shown in Table 498-2.
Animal models have greatly advanced our understanding of how 
core molecular clock components contribute to maintaining normal 
sleep-wake/rest-activity cycles (Table 498-3). For example, Clock∆19/∆19 
mice have reduced total sleep duration and less induction of rapid 
eye movement (REM) sleep in response to sleep deprivation. Further, 
TABLE 498-3  Animal Models of Genetic Circadian Disruption
 
AVERAGE CIRCADIAN TIME OF PEAK TRANSCRIPT LEVEL
 
GENE
MUTANT PHENOTYPE
SCN
PERIPHERY
Bmal1 (Arntl)
15–21
22–2
Bmal1−/−
Arrhythmic
CK1δ (Csnk1δ)
No rhythm
No rhythm
Csnk1δ+/–
0 to 0.5-h shorter period
CK1ε (Csnk1ε)
No rhythm
No rhythm
CK1εtau
4-h shorter period
CK1ε
—
—
CK1ε−/−
0.2- to 0.4-h longer period
Clock
No rhythm
21–3
Clock−/−
0.5-h shorter period
—
—
—
ClockD19/D19
4-h longer period/arrhythmic
Clock/Npas2
—
—
Clock−/−/NPAS2−/−
Arrhythmic
Cry1
8–14
14–18
Cry1−/−
1-h shorter period
Cry2
8–14
8–12
Cry2−/−
1-h longer period
—
—
—
Cry2A260T
0.2-h shorter period
Dbp
—
—
Dbp−/−
0.5-h shorter period
Npas2
N/A
0–4
Npas2−/−
0.2-h shorter period
Per1
4–8
10–16
Per1−/−
0.7-h shorter period
—
—
—
Per1brdm1
1-h shorter period
—
—
—
Per1ldc
0.5-h shorter period/arrhythmic
Per2
6–12
14–18
Per2brdm1
1.5-h shorter period/arrhythmic
—
—
—
Per2ldc
Arrhythmic
Per3
4–9
10–14
Per3−/−
0 to 0.5-h shorter period
Rev-erbα (Nr1d1)
2–6
4–10
Rev-erbα−/−
0.5-h shorter period/disrupted photic entrainment
Rorα
6–10
Arrhythmic/various
staggerer
0.5-h shorter period/disrupted photic entrainment
Rorβ
4–8
18–22
Rorβ−/−
0.5-h longer period
Rorγ
N/A
16–20/various
Rorγ−/−
Normal behavior
Note: Normal circadian rhythms of circadian clock and related genes, with description of circadian phenotype in mutant mice.
Abbreviation: N/A, not applicable.
Source: Adapted from Hum Mol Genet 15:R271, 2006, and Adv Genet 74:175, 2011.

TABLE 498-2  Criteria for Circadian Rhythm Sleep Disorders
CRITERIA
DESCRIPTION
A
A persistent or recurrent pattern of sleep disturbance due 
primarily to one of the following:
• Alterations of the internal circadian timekeeping system.
• Misalignment between endogenous circadian rhythms and 
exogenous factors that affect the timing or duration of sleep.
B
A circadian-related sleep disruption that leads to insomnia, 
excessive daytime sleepiness, or both.
C
A sleep disturbance that is associated with impairment of social, 
occupational, or other areas of functioning.
mice that lack Bmal1 have increased total sleep time, but it is more 
fragmented and lacks clear 24-h sleep-wake rhythms, and mice lacking 
the repressors Cry1 and Cry2 are arrhythmic and spend more time in 
non-REM sleep. Finally, while ablation of the circadian gene Dbp does 
not alter the specific duration of sleep stages, it does lead to an altered 
circadian sleep-wake distribution, with more sleep during the normal 
wake period and vice versa. Consistent with a key role of clock genes 
in regulating sleep-wake behavior, human genetic studies of twins have 
found that up to half of the variation in diurnal preference is heritable. 
Established genetic variants associated with diurnal preference and cir­
cadian sleep disorders are listed in Table 498-4. The following briefly 
mentions the most common CRSDs, but readers should refer to the 
chapter on sleep disorders (Chap. 33) for a more detailed description.
Delayed Sleep Phase Disorder 
Delayed sleep phase disorder 
(DSPD; or delayed sleep-wake phase disorder [DSWPD]) is one of 
the more common circadian rhythm sleep disorders, ranging from 
0.2–16% of the population depending on definition used, and is most 
common in adolescence and early adulthood. DSPD is characterized 
by chronic and significant delays in both sleep onset and wake times 
compared to “socially acceptable” sleep-wake hours (i.e., “extreme 
night owls”). Rhythms of CBT and melatonin levels are also often 
CHAPTER 498
The Role of Circadian Biology in Health and Disease  
 
ALLELE

TABLE 498-4  Mutations and Gene Variants Linked to Sleep-Wake Disorders and Diurnal Preference
GENE
POSITION
POPULATION
SYNDROME/SLEEP PREFERENCE
hCKIε
S408N
Japanese
Protection against DSPS
hCKIγ
T44A
Pedigree
FASPS
hCKIΔ
H46R
Pedigree
FASPS
hCLOCK
T3111C (3′-UTR)
European
Eveningness
hCRY2
A260T
Pedigree
FASPS
hPER2
S662G (missense mutations in CKIε binding region)
Pedigree
FASPS
hPER2
C111G (5′-UTR)
British
Extreme morningness
hPER3
P415A/H417R
Pedigree
FASPS and seasonal affective disorder
hPER3
G647
Swedish/Finish/Austrian/German
Morningness
hPER3
G647, P864, 4-repeat, T1037, R1158
Japanese
DSPS
hPER3
Increased repeats (exon 18, 54 bp)
Brazilian
DSPS
hVIP
rs9479402 (gene variant 54 kb upstream of VIP)
European (>97% European ancestry)
Morningness
Abbreviations: DSPS, delayed sleep phase syndrome; FASPS, familial advanced sleep phase syndrome.
delayed. DSPD is associated with polymorphisms within the circadian 
clock genes CLOCK, PER3, and CRY1, and the circadian period (tau) of 
these individuals may be longer. The most effective treatment includes 
bright-light therapy after waking in the morning (and/or dark-room 
therapy in the evening) in combination with melatonin administra­
tion in the evening several hours prior to the onset of sleep. These 
approaches attempt to realign endogenous circadian rhythms with 
the desired sleep-wake schedule, though often face challenges because 
individuals suffering from DSPD also phase delay more rapidly.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
Advanced Sleep Phase Disorder 
Another CRSD whereby one 
gets the correct amount and quality of sleep but at a shifted time is 
advanced sleep phase disorder (ASPD; or advanced sleep-wake phase 
disorder [ASWPD]). The prevalence of this disorder may be <1%, but 
the condition may be underreported, given that it may cause fewer 
conflicts with societal demands (i.e., 9-to-5 schedules) compared with 
DSPD. Individuals with ASPD experience an advance in their major 
sleep episode in relation to the desired sleep-wake times. Thus, this 
disorder typically results both in very early evening bedtimes and 
morning awakenings (e.g., “extreme early birds”), resulting in reduced 
quality of life due to excessive sleepiness during the early evening, even 
in social situations. Individuals with ASPD also have phase-advanced 
temperature and melatonin rhythms. ASPD occurs more often in 
older individuals, although early-onset autosomal dominant familial 
variants (familial advanced sleep phase syndrome [FASPS]) have also 
been associated with mutations in either the PER2 or the casein kinase 
1δ (CK1δ) gene. PER2 is critical for SCN resetting by light, and these 
PER2 mutations have been found to shorten the endogenous circadian 
period to ~23.3 h compared with the normal 24.2-h period length. 
Treatment includes bright light or blue-enriched phototherapy in the 
evening hours to delay the phase of the circadian clock to a later hour.
Shift Work Sleep Disorder 
Given the increased prevalence of 
shift work in today’s 24/7 society and the accumulating evidence for 
increased incidence of sleep and metabolic disorders, including obesity, 
type 2 diabetes, cardiovascular disease, and cancer, in shift workers, 
the need to develop effective treatments for shift work sleep disorder 
(SWSD) is increasingly important. SWSD is at its core defined by the 
primary symptom of either insomnia or excessive sleepiness arising 
due to work scheduled during regular sleeping hours or at irregular 
times. The symptoms may arise because recovery sleep consumes a 
large proportion of the individual’s free time, potentially leading to 
negative social consequences such as difficulties maintaining social 
relationships. Older individuals are typically at an increased risk of 
SWSD due to the age-associated decline in the ability to maintain sleep 
during the time of day that would normally constitute the wake period. 
Therapeutic approaches include optimizing the sleep environment at 
home to minimize disruptions, melatonin prior to sleeping, and timed 
bright-light therapy. For example, for night workers, intermittent 
bright-light exposure during the night and avoidance of bright light 

during the morning, even on days off, have been shown to improve 
sleep and feelings of alertness. Genetic screening combined with 
chronotype questionnaires may become useful tools for determining 
whether a given individual is suited for shiftwork. For instance, a twin 
study indicated that a genetic variant of the circadian gene DEC2 was 
associated with reduced sleep duration and shorter recovery sleep fol­
lowing extended sleep deprivation. More studies may reveal additional 
genetic variants that confer an advantage to repeated phase advances 
and phase delays as typically occurs in shift work.
Irregular Sleep-Wake Rhythm 
Damage to the SCN can produce 
arrhythmicity in animals and is thought to be one of the possible 
underlying reasons for the temporally disorganized sleep-wake pattern 
that characterizes the disorder known as irregular sleep-wake rhythm 
(ISWR). Other contributing factors may be reduced responsiveness 
to entraining signals such as light and physical activity, as well as 
decreased exposure to such signals, as often occurs with increasing 
age. Despite normal total sleep time, there is a relative absence of a 
circadian pattern to the sleep-wake cycle such that sleep occurs in 
several distinct randomly distributed bouts. ISWR is often associated 
with neurologic impairment, foremost Alzheimer’s disease in older age; 
however, ISWR can also occur in individuals with poor sleep hygiene. 
Treatments involve multimodal interventions such as increased light 
exposure, improved sleep hygiene, and promotion of social and physi­
cal activities.
Non-24-h Sleep-Wake Rhythm Disorder 
Individuals with 
non-24-h sleep-wake rhythm disorder (“non-24”), otherwise known 
as free-running disorder (FRD), have endogenous circadian rhythms 
that are not synchronized with the external 24-h day-night cycle due 
to an inability to readjust the circadian clock to the 24-h day on a daily 
basis. This most commonly occurs in individuals who are completely 
blind (i.e., lacking all photoreceptors) since they are unable to respond 
to daily light cues that normally would reset the endogenous circa­
dian clock (although the condition has also been reported in sighted 
individuals). Instead, the sleep-wake period length corresponds to 
the individual’s endogenous circadian rhythms, which are typically 
slightly longer than 24 h, thereby shifting sleep and wake cycles over 
time in relation to the light-dark cycle. Instead of sleeping at the same 
time each day, their sleep time would gradually be delayed each day 
until their sleep period literally goes “around the clock.” Depending 
on the individual’s endogenous rhythm, the individual will take a 
given number of days to realign their endogenous phase (in a 360° 
phase plot) with the zero time point in the exogenous 24-h light-dark 
cycle. Because of this chronic cycling, prominent symptoms of non-24 
include sleep-wake cycle disruption (insomnia and daytime sleepi­
ness), impaired alertness and mood levels, and severe difficulties par­
taking in normally scheduled work, school, or social activities. Non-24 
can be diagnosed following diurnal analysis of an individual’s melato­
nin or cortisol rhythms, in combination with analyses of sleep diaries

where the sleep onset and offset can be visualized over time to identify 
the free-running period. Treatments for sighted non-24-h patients 
include a combination of bright-light therapy with appropriately timed 
melatonin administration, whereas melatonin and dual melatonin 
(MT1 and MT2) receptor agonist administration in completely blind 
non-24-h patients has been shown to entrain free-running rhythms 
and improve symptoms.
Jetlag 
Most have experienced symptoms associated with jetlag, 
including insomnia, daytime sleepiness, and fatigue, when traveling 
from one time zone to another, as one’s endogenous circadian rhythms 
are not yet aligned, or entrained, to the new external light-dark cycle. 
This is due to the slowness of the circadian system to adapt to the new 
time zone. Typically, the human circadian system can shift up to ~1.5 h 
a day in the westward direction (i.e., a phase delay), whereas it shifts 
more slowly (up to ~1 h daily) with eastward direction of travel (i.e., 
achieving a phase advance). Usually, symptoms of jetlag abate within 
the first couple of days after traveling and may present themselves after 
a first night of good sleep (which is more dependent on a high buildup 
of homeostatic sleep pressure). Older individuals (age >50) appear to 
be more at risk. While symptoms are transient, therapeutic approaches 
aim to hasten the synchronization of internal and external circadian 
cycles. Behavioral treatments include appropriately timed bright-light 
exposure and avoidance of bright light during the nighttime in the new 
destination, while pharmacologic approaches include timed melatonin 
administration before bedtime both prior to and following travel, 
resulting in improved sleep quality and decreased night waking.
Social Jetlag 
Individuals with a late chronotype are prone to suffer 
from “social jetlag,” a phenomenon in which individuals are forced to 
awaken at a point at which their bodies are entrained to be asleep due 
to discrepancy between alignment of social and biological time. Social 
SLEEP
FASTING
WAKE
FEEDING
CNS
Inhibition of hunger
Melatonin and GH secretion
Neurotoxic substance clearance
Memory consolidation
Muscle
Oxidative metabolism
Adipose
Lipid catabolism
Leptin secretion
Liver
Gluconeogenesis
Glycogenolysis
Mitochondrial biogenesis
Cholesterol synthesis
Pancreas
Glucagon secretion
FIGURE 498-3  The circadian clock partitions behavioral, physiologic, and metabolic processes according to time of day. The partitioning of metabolic processes to 
appropriate times of day is critical for the maintenance of health from cellular to mammalian organisms. This figure highlights which processes peak within the central 
nervous system (CNS), muscle, adipose, liver, and pancreas during either the sleep/fasting or wake/feeding cycle in humans. GH, growth hormone.

jetlag can be estimated using questionnaires, such as the MCTQ, to 
compare sleep timing on working or school days compared with free 
days. This has established that a large proportion of the European 
population suffers from 2 or more hours of social jetlag. Chronic 
social jetlag is associated with an increased risk of developing obesity 
and metabolic syndrome, as well as with greater alcohol consumption, 
smoking, and poorer academic performance in students.

The aforementioned categories of defined clinical circadian disor­
ders have been traditionally established based on consideration of the 
endogenous behavioral and physiologic cycles (primarily of melatonin 
and temperature) with the external 24-h light-dark cycle. In the fol­
lowing sections, we build on the concepts of circadian behavioral dis­
orders to consider new and emerging insight into the role of circadian 
disruption in organismal homeostasis (Figs. 498-3 and 498-4) and the 
availability of genetic strategies to dissect the interrelationship between 
clock function, health, and disease.
■
■ROLE OF THE CLOCK SYSTEM IN PHYSIOLOGY
Endocrine Systems Regulated by the Circadian Clock 
In 
addition to regulation of behavioral rhythms such as sleep-wake and 
fasting-feeding cycles, the circadian clock also regulates rhythms of the 
endocrine system. Cortisol rhythms are regulated through a feedback 
loop known as the HPA axis. Hypothalamic secretion of CRH and 
AVP promotes secretion of pituitary ACTH, which in turn regulates 
rhythmic cortisol secretion from the adrenal cortex. Cortisol release 
increases toward the morning, and this increase is believed to prepare 
the brain and peripheral tissues for daytime activity and food intake. 
AVP secretion in mice occurs prior to sleep to promote water intake, 
thereby preventing dehydration during the sleep period. Several hor­
mones, such as growth hormone (GH), cortisol, and melatonin, are 
influenced not only via circadian regulation, but also by sleep. For 
CHAPTER 498
The Role of Circadian Biology in Health and Disease  
CNS
Hunger signals
Foraging behavior
Cortisol secretion
Neuronal activity
Muscle
Fatty acid uptake
Glycolytic metabolism
Adipose
Lipogenesis
Adiponectin production
Liver
Glycogen synthesis
Bile acid synthesis
Pancreas
Insulin secretion

Circadian
desynchrony
CNS
Depression
Cognitive decline
Pancreas
Hypoinsulinemia
Muscle
Insulin resistance
Sarcopenia
Vasculature
Adrenals
Hematopoetic
Chronic stress
Disrupted HPA axis
Autoimmunity
FIGURE 498-4  Pathologies resulting from circadian desynchrony. Circadian rhythm sleep disorders, including advanced/delayed sleep phase disorder, jet lag, social 
jet lag, and shift work, result in a desynchrony between the environmental light-dark cycle “time” and the endogenous clock “time.” Pathologies can thus arise through 
misalignment imposed by exogenous (e.g., altered light cycle and/or feeding rhythm) and endogenous factors (e.g., mutations in core clock genes). Such desynchrony results 
in a host of wide-ranging pathologies across multiple tissues, including hypoinsulinemia (pancreas), disrupted hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis, autoimmunity, 
hypertension, obesity, and metabolic syndrome. CNS, central nervous system; IBD, inflammatory bowel disease.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
instance, both GH secretion and the cortisol awakening response 
(CAR, i.e., the peak in cortisol soon after waking) are profoundly 
blunted by acute overnight wakefulness. GH secretion is primarily 
dependent on the occurrence of slow-wave sleep, which is a homeo­
statically driven sleep stage that occurs primarily in the first part of 
the sleep period. Both the CAR and daytime cortisol levels are also 
modulated by light exposure levels. Sleep also influences melatonin 
amplitude, such that sleep deprivation can increase melatonin levels. 
As sleep deprivation is often accompanied by artificial nighttime light 
exposure, the effect on melatonin can be combinatorial. In working 
environments, the effects of curtailed sleep are often confounded by 
mistimed exposure to light. The sensitivity to light levels that suppress 
melatonin can vary by an order of magnitude or more in individuals. 
This partly explains how even low levels of light can potently suppress 
melatonin secretion. Together with altered timing in light exposure, 
perturbed hormonal levels likely represent a mechanism through 
which altered timing and duration of sleep can impact central and 
peripheral circadian oscillators.
Centrally controlled rhythms of melatonin and cortisol are con­
sidered key regulators of extra-SCN and peripheral oscillators. Glu­
cocorticoid receptors exist in both the central nervous system and in 
peripheral tissues such as skeletal muscle, liver, and adipose tissue. 
Upon acute shifts in light-dark or feeding cycles, rhythmic levels in 
cortisol appear to modulate the rate at which behavioral and physi­
ological rhythms phase shift. Indeed, glucocorticoids regulate clock 
gene expression in muscle, kidney, and lung, and the powerful syn­
thetic glucocorticoid dexamethasone is often employed in vitro for its 
ability to synchronize (e.g., reset) circadian rhythms of cells, including 
liver cells. Consistent with a role for glucocorticoid regulation of the 
clock, both adrenalectomy, which results in a lack of cortisol, and 
exogenous corticosteroid supplementation significantly disrupt the 
circadian clock system.
Several peripherally produced hormones and peptides are not only 
produced rhythmically but can also feed back to central clocks, includ­
ing within the SCN. For instance, both cortisol and thyroid hormones 
regulate their own rhythmic synthesis by feedback to central brain 
regions, i.e., the hypothalamus (for cortisol) and pituitary (for both 
hormones). Several other peripherally produced factors have been 

Liver
Circadian rhythm
sleep disorders
Dyslipidemia
Steatosis
Metabolic syndrome
Jet lag
Shiftwork
Advanced/delayed
sleep disorder
Adipose
Obesity
Intestine
Steatorrhea
IBD flare
Circadian dysbiosis
Fibroblasts
Thromboembolic events
Hypertension
Increased circulation of
inflammatory cytokines
Tumorigenesis
proposed to influence the central clock, including fatty acids produced 
by the adipose tissue and fibroblast growth factor 21, a hormone pri­
marily produced by the liver. Peripheral hormones that signal energy 
state and hunger also exhibit circadian rhythms that are regulated by 
local tissue clocks. The most extensively studied of these hormones are 
leptin, which is released from white adipose tissue cells, and ghrelin, 
which is released from specific endocrine cells in the upper fundus 
region of the stomach. Ghrelin also exhibits significant peaks related 
to anticipated meal timing, which persist for several days of fasting 
in humans. Circulating rhythms of leptin and ghrelin are disrupted 
in circadian mutant mice and in humans experiencing circadian 
misalignment, with evidence for sex-specific effects. Per and Cry 
mutant mice exhibit severely blunted leptin rhythms, and wild-type 
mice exposed to jetlag (through repeatedly altered light-dark cycles) 
show a reduced wake-associated decrease in leptin. Similarly, humans 
forced to live 28-h days exhibit increased 24-h profiles of ghrelin and 
decreased levels of leptin. Ghrelin and leptin signal to several regions of 
the brain, including integrative appetitive regions of the hypothalamus 
such as the arcuate and paraventricular region. The response to these 
hormones is rhythmically regulated by the molecular clock within sev­
eral such central sites, effectively gating how these hormones influence 
rhythms of food intake and energy homeostasis in a time-of-day– and 
nutrient-dependent manner.
Role for the Clock in Metabolic Homeostasis 
Circadian con­
trol of glucose homeostasis has long been recognized, as early studies 
demonstrated variation in glucose tolerance and insulin action across 
the day. For example, due to a combination of circadian control of both 
peripheral insulin sensitivity and pancreatic β-cell insulin secretion, 
oral glucose tolerance is lower in the evening and afternoon compared 
with the morning. Another example is the “dawn phenomenon,” 
whereby glucose levels peak prior to the onset of activity. Further, 
destruction of the SCN has been shown to abolish circadian regulation 
of glucose metabolism in rats, and daily cycles of insulin secretion and 
glucose tolerance are often perturbed in patients with type 2 diabetes, 
who also exhibit changes in gene expression rhythms in peripheral 
tissues such as adipose tissue. Changes in rhythmic parameters such 
as insulin secretion have also been observed in first-degree relatives

of patients with type 2 diabetes, possibly highlighting a key hereditary 
role for the circadian clock in the pathogenesis of metabolic disease.
Ablating clock genes in mice has revealed a key function for both 
central and peripheral clocks in regulating energy homeostasis. The 
circadian system has been shown to regulate rhythmic insulin secre­
tion from the pancreas via both neural signals and hormonal levels 
(e.g., cortisol and norepinephrine), as well as via cell-autonomous 
clock regulation within the pancreatic β cell itself. An early observa­
tion was that whole-body Clock∆19/∆19 mutant mice developed obesity 
without displaying hyperinsulinemia, a phenomenon that indicated 
concurrent β-cell failure. This was later confirmed using pancreas- 
and β-cell–specific Bmal1-deficient mice, which exhibited glucose 
intolerance, hypoinsulinemia, and impaired glucose-stimulated insulin 
secretion. The molecular clock within other peripheral tissues such as 
liver, adipose tissue, and skeletal muscle also regulates circadian fluc­
tuations in insulin sensitivity and glucose disposal, which are highest in 
the morning and decline toward the evening in humans. Liver-specific 
ablation of Bmal1 in mice has revealed that the liver clock promotes 
gluconeogenesis, glycogenolysis, and mitochondrial oxidative metabo­
lism in the sleep/fasting period, while promoting glycogen synthesis in 
the wake/feeding period. Muscle-specific Bmal1-deficient mice display 
reduced glucose tolerance, concomitant with lower levels of proteins 
involved in glucose uptake by muscle cells (e.g., the glucose transporter 
GLUT4). Ablation of the Cry1 and Cry2 repressors in the negative limb 
of the clock alters glucagon and glucocorticoid signaling in the liver, 
contributing to hyperglycemia and impaired glucose tolerance in these 
mutant mice. Together, these genetic studies in mice suggest a role for 
tissue-specific clocks in the partitioning of energy utilization across the 
sleep-wake cycle.
Importantly, peripheral clocks also interact with other environ­
mental factors such as diet and time of feeding. For example, high-fat 
feeding leads not only to obesity and metabolic syndrome in mice, 
but also to perturbed clock gene expression across multiple peripheral 
tissues and a disrupted sleep-wake/fasting-feeding cycle, as revealed 
by increased activity and feeding during the daytime, the normal rest 
period in mice. Furthermore, mice that are fed a high-fat diet exclu­
sively during their (inactive) light phase gain significantly more weight 
than mice that are fed the same diet during the dark period—the active 
period for mice. Additionally, the metabolic phenotypes arising from 
ad lib high-fat feeding can be significantly ameliorated by restricting 
the time of high-fat feeding exclusively to the dark period. Animals 
with disrupted clock throughout the hypothalamus and SCN exhibit 
mistimed eating and adverse metabolic rhythms that can be restored 
by dark-only feeding. Time-restricted feeding can also increase the 
activity of brown adipose tissue in mice and reduce hepatic glucose 
production to instead promote beta oxidation of fatty acids. The poten­
tial clinical utility of time-restricted eating (TRE) has been corrobo­
rated in human interventional studies. These have demonstrated that 
dietary interventions modulate transcriptional rhythms across tissues 
and that TRE can improve metabolic homeostasis as well as promote 
weight loss. Compared with calorie restriction, TRE has repeatedly 
been shown to promote weight loss by reducing calorie intake without 
the need to actively count calories. Time-restricted eating may also 
modulate the central regulation of sleep and hunger, as studies have 
found that humans who restrict their food intake to a shorter than 
ad lib period also consume fewer daily calories and report both lower 
hunger and improved sleep. In the setting of critical illness, nutrition 
is often provided at the incorrect phase of the light-dark cycle, and 
interventions to align feeding with environmental zeitgeibers may 
improve metabolic health. There is also some evidence that consuming 
a greater proportion of daily calories early compared with later in the 
day confers metabolic advantages, including weight loss. One contrib­
uting mechanism may be that diet-induced thermogenesis (energy 
expenditure elicited by food intake) is higher in the morning compared 
with evening and that daytime hunger ratings are lower when calories 
are preferentially consumed earlier versus later in the day.
Finally, animal studies have further shown that when the light-dark 
cycle is disrupted or when animals are subjected to conditions mimick­
ing “jetlag” by artificially advancing or delaying the daily light period, 

there is desynchronization among circadian clocks and subsequent 
weight gain. Accumulating evidence in humans also finds that circa­
dian misalignment both disrupts and desynchronizes circadian clocks 
across tissues. Clinical studies that have sampled tissues such as blood, 
skeletal muscle, and adipose tissue at regular intervals have observed 
disruptions in the day-night rhythms in clock and metabolic genes 
following sleep-wake interventions. Prolonged circadian misalignment 
using forced desynchrony protocols reduces insulin sensitivity in the 
pre- and postprandial states. Under such conditions, insulin secretion 
fails to suppress glucose levels, suggesting inadequate β-cell compensa­
tion. Moreover, resting metabolic rate declines significantly both in the 
awake and sleeping state, altogether providing potential explanations 
why shift work can increase the risk of obesity, type 2 diabetes, and the 
metabolic syndrome.

Human genetic association studies also support a role for clock 
genes in metabolic homeostasis and β-cell function. Carriers of a 
certain BMAL1 polymorphism have a greater risk of developing type 2 
diabetes, while CLOCK variants have been found to interact with diet, 
such that variants can have a protective effect on insulin sensitivity in 
individuals with high monounsaturated fat intake or in individuals 
provided a low-fat diet. In contrast, the minor allele of another CLOCK 
gene variant has been associated with increased waist circumference, 
but only in those with high saturated fat intake. Similarly, NPAS2 and 
BMAL1 variants have been associated with a greater risk of hyper­
tension. Melatonin receptor MTNR1B gene variants that result in 
increased expression of MTNR1B have been associated with elevated 
fasting blood glucose levels and reduced insulin secretion irrespective 
of their level of glycemic control, although how melatonin regulates 
glucose homeostasis remains incompletely understood. These associa­
tion studies highlight the role of the circadian system in metabolism, as 
well as the potential for interactions of external perturbations—such as 
circadian misalignment—with a protective or adverse genetic profile.
CHAPTER 498
A large proportion of society recurrently shifts sleep-wake and eat­
ing times between working/nonfree days and free days. This social 
jetlag has been increasingly tied to metabolic disruptions, including a 
greater risk of obesity and type 2 diabetes. As this involves recurrent 
phase advances and phase delays—like shift work but often of smaller 
magnitude—it is possible that social jetlag, and often interlinked eat­
ing jetlag, also results in perturbed rhythms of energy expenditure in 
combination with disruptions to the circadian hunger drive, further 
increasing the risk of obesity. Repeated shifts in the food- and SCNdriven rhythm of insulin release may similarly over time increase the 
risk of type 2 diabetes. Shifted feeding rhythms in relation to the sleepwake cycle and the timing of SCN activity may be causally involved in 
this pathogenesis. This is exemplified by the disorders known as nighteating syndrome and sleep-related eating disorder. In the former syn­
drome, a large part of daily calorie consumption occurs in the evening 
and nighttime hours, and this shifted meal pattern has been associated 
with a delayed timing of the internal clock. Some evidence exists that 
these syndromes are associated with obesity. Individuals who report 
sleeping fewer hours or who are subjected to restricted sleep for a 
few consecutive days have also been found to consume more calories, 
especially later in the evening, a period during which prolonged fast­
ing favors oxidative fuel utilization. As such, this may explain why 
sleep restriction increases the risk of obesity. These associations have 
also been observed in individuals with later onset of sleep, i.e., evening 
chronotypes. Night-eating syndrome and later chronotypes have also 
been linked to type 2 diabetes and may be more common than other 
eating disorders such as binge-eating disorder. Both conditions have 
also been found to be associated with impaired glycemic control—such 
as a greater likelihood of hemoglobin A1c values exceeding 7%—in 
patients already suffering from type 2 diabetes. This emphasizes how 
proper alignment of internal circadian rhythms with external factors 
are key contributing factors for long-term metabolic homeostasis.
The Role of Circadian Biology in Health and Disease  
Circadian Clocks in Relation to Brain Health and Cogni­
tion 
Molecular circadian clocks are present not only within the 
extra-SCN regions of the brain, but also in neurons, astrocytes, microg­
lia, and cells of the blood-brain barrier. Emphasizing the functional

significance of properly aligned clocks for brain health, shift work­
ers have been found to have decreased gray matter in brain regions 
involved in memory and executive functions, with more notable effects 
in individuals who had shorter recovery periods between the onset of 
each shift work cycle. Adults performing rotating shift work for many 
years have also been shown to exhibit signs of accelerated cognitive 
aging. Notably, evidence suggests that these effects may be reversible, as 
those who stopped carrying out shift work exhibited normal cognitive 
performance 5 or more years later.

Studies have also uncovered an important role for perturbed circa­
dian and sleep-wake rhythms in neurodegenerative conditions such as 
Alzheimer’s disease (AD), Huntington’s disease (HD), and Parkinson’s 
disease (PD). Amyloid beta (Aβ), a key pathognomonic component 
of AD, normally exhibits circadian fluctuations in the extracellular 
space in the brain, as well as in the cerebrospinal fluid and plasma in 
humans, peaking during the active period and falling during sleep. Of 
note, these daily rhythms of Aβ accumulation are dampened in mice 
that are prone to develop AD; reduced plasma Aβ fluctuations have 
also been noted in older compared with younger individuals. Animal 
studies indicate that removal of Aβ (and other neurotoxic substances) 
during the nighttime sleep period is facilitated by a lymphatic-like 
system that relies on glial cells (the “glymphatic” system). Relevance of 
this system to humans is suggested by the observation that non–rapid 
eye movement (NREM) sleep is accompanied by hemodynamic fluc­
tuations that alter the flow of cerebrospinal fluid, which can remove 
toxins such as Aβ. Consistent with a role for circadian rhythms in the 
pathogenesis of AD, ablation of core clock genes throughout the brain, 
within subregions of the brain or within glia, leads to pathology such as 
oxidative stress, neuronal cell death, and scarring of brain tissue (astro­
gliosis). Furthermore, perturbed light-dark cycles increased pathology 
associated with oxidative stress, and single nucleotide polymorphisms 
in CLOCK and BMAL1 have been associated with increased risk of 
developing AD.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
Evidence also indicates that the relationship between the circadian/
sleep-wake system and AD is bidirectional. For example, patients suf­
fering from AD exhibit several signs of perturbed circadian rhythms, 
the most prominent of such phenomena being “sundowning,” whereby 
AD patients become more agitated and exhibit delirium-like symptoms 
in the afternoon or evening. Studies have furthermore indicated that 
in severe forms of AD, the circadian rhythm is phase delayed. Aged 
AD-prone mice also display perturbed sleep-wake patterns, which can 
be corrected by immunization against Aβ or by an orexin antagonist. 
Further research will help uncover the primary role of the circadian 
system in disease pathology, independent of the contribution from 
perturbed sleep, in conditions like AD. Notably, evidence suggests that 
interventions that increase daytime light exposure and that include 
melatonin supplementation ameliorate symptoms of AD, presumably 
by counteracting disrupted circadian rhythms.
Meta-analyses of cohort and longitudinal studies support an asso­
ciation between shift work and the risk of depression, with greater risk 
in women. This relationship is bidirectional, as disruption of sleep and 
circadian rhythms is a key feature of depression and multiple other 
neuropsychiatric conditions. Two important factors for why mis­
aligned sleep increases the risk of neuropsychiatric conditions may be 
mistimed light exposure and disrupted 24-h rest-activity rhythms. In 
cross-sectional and longitudinal analyses, greater time spent outdoors 
during the day has been associated with fewer symptoms of insomnia, 
lower risk of developing depression, and less need for antidepressive 
medication. Similarly, decreased rest-activity rhythms are associated 
with lower subjective happiness and reaction time and a greater lifetime 
risk of major depressive or bipolar disorder. This may be partly due to 
genetic variation, as clock genes have been implicated in depression 
and mood both in human and genetic animal studies. Polymorphisms 
in genes that regulate sleep and circadian rhythms—for instance, a long 
gene variant of PER3—have also been linked to bipolar disorder and 
schizophrenia, while CRY2 and CLOCK gene polymorphisms are asso­
ciated with seasonal affective disorder, a type of depression arising in 
the fall and winter months when the levels of sunlight are lowest. Bipo­
lar disorder is furthermore often triggered by circadian disruptions 

or curtailed sleep. Both bipolar disorder and schizophrenia have been 
linked to various forms of circadian disruption following disease onset, 
and a critical component of disease treatment often involves normal­
izing sleep and sleep-wake rhythms.
Sleep deprivation by itself is known to reduce alertness, impair 
decision-making, and increase risk for accidents—after 18–24 h of con­
tinuous wakefulness, several skills exhibit the same degree of decline as 
following mild alcohol intoxication. However, cognitive abilities may 
suffer even further when sleep restriction is combined with circadian 
misalignment as in shift work. In one study, participants were subjected 
to ~43-h long days in parallel with reduced sleep (equivalent to 5.6 h of 
sleep in a 24-h period), yielding a forced desynchrony protocol coupled 
with sleep loss. When subjects were tested at the nadir of their circa­
dian period, the subjects’ reaction speed dropped almost by an order 
of magnitude compared with controls. In another study, researchers 
noted almost a 36% greater incidence of serious medical errors in 
resident interns who regularly worked 24-h or longer shifts compared 
with those who were randomly assigned to work up to 16-h-long shifts. 
Furthermore, errors that resulted in patient death were three times 
more likely to occur in residents working extended hours compared 
with those who only worked up to 16-h-long shifts.
Circadian Regulation of Gastrointestinal Homeostasis and 
the Microbiota 
Physiologic aspects of the gastrointestinal (GI) 
tract exhibit day-night variations that anticipate and prepare for food 
intake and digestion during the active period. Gastric emptying and 
colonic motility are considerably greater during the active phase, as 
the phasic motor program supporting movement of digested mate­
rial along the intestine is approximately twice as fast during the day 
compared with night. Bile acid secretion also exhibits circadian rhyth­
micity in the intestine, as do absorption and the expression of many 
nutrient uptake transporters in the intestinal wall, including the main 
glucose transporter protein SGLT1. The permeability of the intestinal 
wall also varies throughout the sleep-wake cycle, and mice exposed to 
chronic sleep fragmentation exhibit increased intestinal permeability, 
which may enable inflammatory molecules from bacteria to reach the 
systemic circulation.
The composition and function of the fecal microbiome (i.e., the gut 
microbiota) also display circadian rhythmicity, orchestrated by both 
host circadian clock gene expression and food intake rhythms. Accord­
ingly, circadian disruption, either by environmental or genetic means, 
perturbs these microbial rhythms, disrupting both bacterial levels and 
the metabolic functions of the gut microbiota. For example, alterations 
in the expression and functions of the gut microbiota have been noted 
in humans exposed to acute jetlag, and evidence suggests that curtail­
ing sleep, which often accompanies shift work and jetlag, can alter the 
gut microbiota. Corroborating the importance of the daily timing of 
food intake, interventions with meals scheduled earlier versus later in 
the day, or that involve time-restricted eating, have been found to alter 
the composition of the gut microbiome in humans, although the causal 
relevance of this remains to be ascertained.
By increasing local and systemic inflammation, circadian disrup­
tion of the gut microbiota may be causally involved in increased risk of 
inflammatory bowel disease (Crohn’s disease and ulcerative colitis) and 
colon cancer in shift workers. Biological sex differences have also been 
reported, as female mice display more pronounced microbial rhythms. 
Interestingly, the gut microbiome has also been shown to influence the 
rhythms of host tissues, such as the intestine and liver, that also appear 
sex-specific. This relationship indicates that a bidirectional interaction 
exists between tissues that regulate metabolic processes and the gut 
microbiome across the sleep-wake cycle. These findings may further­
more have clinical implications, given that the gut microbiome may 
both directly (in the gut lumen) and indirectly (through host-microbi­
ota interactions such as through signaling molecules) impact metabolic 
responses and pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic properties of 
therapeutic drugs across the 24-h day-night cycle.
Cardiovascular Health and the Circadian Clock 
An early 
epidemiologic observation was a greater incidence of myocardial 
infarction in the morning hours, with the lowest risk during the

period preceding sleep. Other cardiovascular outcomes such as sudden 
cardiac death and syncope also exhibit a daily peak in the morning. 
Blood pressure (BP) typically peaks around 2100 h and decreases later 
during sleep. The postexercise recovery response of BP is faster in 
the late afternoon compared with the morning, and the daily timing 
of physical activity has been found to modulate the risk of all-cause 
and cardiovascular disease mortality. The lowering of BP during sleep 
is partially due to a circadian nighttime dip of around 3–6 mmHg in 
systolic BP (SBP) and 2–3 mmHg in diastolic BP (DBP). A dip in BP 
of either <10% or >20% during normal sleep has been associated with 
worse cardiovascular prognosis and risk of dementia. Nighttime BP 
dipping is also often disrupted in sleep-wake disorders and correlates 
with increased cardiovascular disease risk in conditions such as insom­
nia and narcolepsy. Conversely, specifically lowering nighttime BP has 
been found to confer a lower prospective risk of cardiovascular disease.
In addition to BP, heart rate also typically decreases during sleep, 
while mistimed sleep leads to higher heart rate during the sleep period. 
Studies also suggest that heart muscle may be more tolerant to hypoxia 
and thus fare better under surgery scheduled for the afternoon due to 
timing of cellular programs driven by the cell autonomous clock in car­
diomyocytes. Thus, a combination of factors—which may also involve 
altered glucocorticoid levels and increased platelet aggregation—may 
contribute to a greater risk of cardiovascular disease in the morning. 
Subsequent epidemiologic studies also have demonstrated that shift 
work increases the risk of dyslipidemia and hypertension, as well as the 
risk of coronary heart disease, including myocardial infarction. These 
findings are in line with interventional findings in which circadian 
misalignment has been induced either by inverting the sleep-wake 
cycle or by imposing days that are far outside what the endogenous 
circadian clock can adapt to (i.e., either too short [e.g., 20-h] or too 
long [e.g., 28-h]). These studies in healthy human subjects have found 
that circadian misalignment elevates 24-h BP, particularly during sleep. 
These changes may be causally related to how the autonomic system is 
regulated during sleep, as evidenced by reduced vagal cardiac control 
when the sleep-wake cycle is inverted.
Circadian Disruption and Cancer 
In 2007, the International 
Agency for Research on Cancer (part of the World Health Organiza­
tion) declared that shift work that involves circadian disruption is likely 
carcinogenic to humans. While evidence for an association between 
shift work and general cancer incidence is mixed, accruing evidence 
supports a link between shift work and increased risk of developing 
colon and breast cancer, as well as having a poorer cancer prognosis. 
Telomere shortening, a phenomenon in aging that destabilizes the 
genome, has also been observed in shift workers as well as in individu­
als suffering from short sleep. Such changes may reduce the ability of 
damaged or senescent cells to undergo apoptosis and, instead, lead to 
uninhibited cell growth and cancer. An indirect role for the circadian 
clock has also come from retrospective studies on how cancer risk is 
related to food timing and duration of the nighttime fast in humans. 
In combination with interventional studies on time-restricted feeding, 
these findings suggest that limiting food intake to a restricted period 
of the day, optimizes circadian processes thereby reducing the risk of 
potentially carcinogenic cell damage. Studies of recurring fasting have 
also shown that it lowers the risk and delays the onset of cancer.
Experimental genetic evidence has also implicated clock disruption 
as a factor in tumorigenesis. Genetic loss of Per2 or Bmal1 has been 
shown to promote lung tumorigenesis, while studies in Per2 mutant 
mice have also revealed increased radiation-induced lymphoma asso­
ciated with dysregulation of the cell cycle. However, disruption of the 
Cry gene in mice has also been implicated in tumor protection due 
to increased susceptibility to cell death. In contrast, pharmacologic 
overactivation of REV-ERB may impair growth of glioblastomas. While 
epidemiologic, experimental, and chronotherapeutic evidence (see sec­
tion “Chronotherapy and Future Directions”) suggests a link between 
circadian disruption and cancer, the precise role of circadian systems 
in tumorigenesis remains to be determined.
Circadian Regulation of the Immune System 
Circadian mis­
alignment and sleep restriction both alter population levels of immune 

cells and decrease the ability of immune cells to produce reactive radi­
cals, in part likely through disruption of cytokine rhythms. Chronic 
circadian disruption may thereby impair the immune system’s ability 
to conduct immunosurveillance at the proper time of day. This may 
reduce the ability to mount an appropriate pathogen-induced effector 
(cytotoxic T-cell) response during the active period, as well as impair 
the more long-term adaptive immune response, which is favored by the 
cytokine milieu (e.g., surges in prolactin and GH) that accompanies 
the recovery/sleep phase. Instead, circadian misalignment increases a 
range of clinically used inflammatory markers (e.g., C-reactive protein, 
tumor necrosis factor α, and interleukin 6), and such changes have 
been noted even when the sleep-wake cycle is only prolonged to a 
slightly longer than normal 24.6-h day. While similar effects are also 
observed following acute total sleep deprivation or recurrent partial 
sleep restriction, circadian misalignment has been found to promote 
an even more pronounced elevation of such markers. Genetic clock 
disruption in peritoneal macrophages has also revealed clock control 
of Toll-like receptor 9, which is responsible for identifying molecules 
from foreign pathogens. Clock knockout mice also have reduced 
T-cell antigen response, and mice immunized during the day had a 
stronger T-cell response than mice immunized at night, supporting 
regulation of the immune system by the clock. Similar mechanisms 
likely take place in humans, as clinical studies have noted an impaired 
vaccine response following sleep disruption, and several studies show 
improved immunogenic response to various antigens when vaccinated 
in the morning compared with afternoon.

Aging and the Circadian Clock 
Instability in the clock system 
is an often-overlooked hallmark of aging. Aging is associated with 
a decline in the robustness of intrinsic rhythmic processes at the 
behavioral, physiologic, and molecular levels in both human and 
animal models. At the behavioral level, aging leads to reduced and 
fragmented sleep, dampened locomotor activity and feeding rhythms, 
and a reduced ability to entrain to light, as old rodents are 20 times less 
sensitive to the entraining effects of light relative to young animals. 
Even middle-aged individuals exposed to jetlag exhibit more symp­
toms of circadian misalignment, such as increased time awake and 
reduced alertness, compared with young individuals. On a physiologic 
level, some of the hallmarks of aging are a reduction in amplitude 
(e.g., flattening of circadian pattern) of circadian processes, which 
can also be seen at the cellular level in peripheral cells isolated from 
older compared with younger individuals. This dampening of rhythms 
also impacts the circadian signal during the evening period (the wake 
maintenance zone). Epidemiologic evidence indicates that a dampened 
rest-activity amplitude is associated with an increased prospective risk 
of a range of common health conditions, such as dementia, CVD, can­
cer, and all-cause mortality.
CHAPTER 498
The Role of Circadian Biology in Health and Disease  
Aging also results in a phase advance (e.g., a shift in the timing of the 
peak or nadir) in rhythms of the endocrine and neuroendocrine sys­
tems, including sleep onset and offset. For example, cortisol, dehydro­
epiandrosterone (DHEA), and melatonin all have dampened rhythms 
and are phase advanced in aging; the combination of such changes may, 
for instance, contribute to more fragmented sleep and lower levels of 
restorative slow-wave sleep in aged individuals. Relatedly, aging results 
in reduced peptide expression in the SCN (VIP and AVP), cell loss in 
sleep-wake regions (including the SCN), and reduced amplitude of 
rhythms of SCN electrical activity. Further, while the SCN-dependent 
body temperature rhythm—a generally accepted marker for the integ­
rity of circadian rhythms—peaks in the evening and is lowest in the 
early morning in young individuals, aged healthy subjects display a 
phase advance and a decrease in circadian amplitude in body tem­
perature rhythms. Indeed, evidence suggests that internal desynchrony 
between core body temperature rhythms and the sleep-wake cycle may 
contribute to age-associated circadian alterations.
On a molecular level, aging is associated with decreased expression 
and altered diurnal profiles of several of the core clock genes, includ­
ing Clock and Bmal1, within both SCN and peripheral tissues such as 
heart and liver. The acute induction of Per1 in response to light was 
markedly reduced in the SCN of aged mice compared with young mice,

potentially contributing to their delayed response to light entrainment. 
Mice lacking Bmal1 die prematurely compared with control mice, con­
sistent with premature accumulation of reactive oxygen species. These 
mice have an accelerated onset of numerous age-related pathologies, 
including cataracts, sarcopenia, reduced organ size, and decreased hair 
growth. Instead, deficiency of cryptochrome, a repressor of the core 
clock repressor, has been associated with alterations in liver regen­
eration, while BMAL1 and PER2 may be important for proper neuro­
genesis in the hippocampus, a brain region in which adult mammals 
normally exhibit continuous cell division. Altogether, this suggests that 
the highly conserved circadian clock is important for regulating a wide 
range of homeostatic processes, including cell-cycle pathways, which 
when properly phased to each other promote organismal fitness.

Shift workers have been found to exhibit molecular signs of accel­
erated aging, as measured by an accelerated DNA methylation clock. 
Measurements of altered circadian rhythms with age may serve as 
a useful biomarker for aging. An intriguing question is whether the 
decline in amplitude of rhythms correlates with a decline in func­
tion and, importantly, whether restoration of these rhythms with 
age, through either behavioral or pharmacologic intervention, would 
delay the aging process. Studies in mice indicate that behavioral and 
pharmacologic interventions (including exercise) can restore circadian 
oscillations in aging. Restoration of levels of the metabolite NAD+, 
which are reduced with aging, in old mice by supplementation with 
the NAD+ precursor nicotinamide riboside (NR) markedly restores 
rhythms of metabolic and stress response pathways, as well as late 
evening activity rhythms, that decline with aging through inhibition of 
the clock repressor PER2. Similarly, transplantation of the SCN from 
a young rat into an old rat “rescued” the rhythms of both locomotor 
activity and corticotropin hormone (CRH), suggesting that the SCN is 
an important target for age-related changes in clocks. Physical activity 
or targeted therapeutics may therefore ameliorate some of the circadian 
deterioration in aged humans.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
■
■CHRONOTHERAPY AND FUTURE DIRECTIONS
Chronopharmacology, also known as chronotherapy or circadian 
medicine, is a rapidly emerging field that studies how the timing 
of drug administration may impact its effectiveness. Since physi­
ologic processes vary across the day, the timing of administration 
of medication may help optimize patient care. For example, since 
endogenous cholesterol synthesis is rhythmic in liver and peaks dur­
ing the early morning hours, administration of statins (HMG-CoA 
reductase inhibitors) in the evening prior to bedtime has proven to be 
more effective than daytime administration at reducing low-density 
lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) levels because the highest concentra­
tion of medication coincides with the peak in rhythmic endogenous 
cholesterol production. Given that BP exhibits a 24-h rhythm—being 
lowest during sleep—angiotensin-converting enzyme (ACE) inhibi­
tors have been shown to be most effective at night to normalize the 
BP rhythms, restoring the nighttime dip in BP that is foremost tied 
to the occurrence of sleep. Numerous studies have also demonstrated 
that administration of cancer treatments at specific times of the day 
can increase chemotherapy effectiveness while also decreasing toxicity 
for a wide range of drugs. For example, 5-fluorouracil works best to 
treat colorectal cancer when administered at night, a time when the 
cancerous cells are more vulnerable while normal cells are quiescent 
and therefore less sensitive. Doxorubicin administration early in the 
morning to treat ovarian cancer has also been shown to be less toxic, as 
white blood cells recover faster than if the drug is given in the evening. 
Finally, the more severe morning symptoms of rheumatoid arthritis 
are linked to increased inflammation toward the evening; therefore, 
prevention of the nighttime upregulation of the immune/inflammatory 
reaction is more effective when glucocorticoids are administered with a 
nighttime release formulation.
Recognition of circadian rhythms is also critical for diagnoses and 
treatment of endocrine disorders. The diagnosis of Cushing’s syn­
drome, which is characterized by hypercortisolemia, might be missed 
if the patient’s cortisol levels are measured in the morning, when 
endogenous cortisol production peaks. Therefore, clinical diagnosis 

requires cortisol to be measured in the late evening when the levels 
of this hormone should typically be low. On the other hand, adrenal 
insufficiency is diagnosed by measuring cortisol in the morning when 
at its physiologic peak, and glucocorticoid therapy for these patients 
aims to mimic the endogenous rhythms of cortisol, as short-acting 
synthetic glucocorticoids are usually given several times a day in taper­
ing doses, such that the largest amount is taken in the morning and the 
smallest in the evening.
Diabetes is another endocrine disorder intimately tied to circadian 
rhythms. Oral glucose tolerance, which is commonly used to diagnose 
diabetes, is worse in the afternoon and evening compared with the 
morning. This likely stems from greater daytime insulin sensitivity 
within peripheral tissues and reduced insulin secretion during the night. 
Similarly, due to a surge in hormone levels in the morning, diabetes 
patients may suffer from the dawn phenomenon (or dawn effect), an 
abnormally high morning increase in blood glucose due to impaired 
response in insulin secretion. A related phenomenon that can be tied 
to evening timing of insulin doses is the “rebound” or Somogyi effect. 
In this scenario, the initially noted clinical sign in the form of elevated 
glucose levels may be noted in the morning. However, the underlying 
cause is hypoglycemia occurring during the night, which produces a 
counterregulatory hormonal response that subsequently results in morn­
ing hyperglycemia. As patients with type 2 diabetes often have grossly 
impaired daily cycles of insulin secretion and glucose tolerance, this 
further highlights that time of day is an important consideration for the 
diagnosis and treatment of metabolic disorders such as type 2 diabetes. 
Another example of potential clinical relevance is how the pharmacoki­
netics of metformin—the most common treatment for type 2 diabetes—
is significantly impacted by time of day due to rhythmicity in glomerular 
filtration rate and renal plasma flow. Notably, large interindividual vari­
ability in the pharmacokinetics seems to stem mostly from differences 
in chronotype, highlighting the need for patient-specific treatments 
dictated by circadian gene-environment interactions.
Continuous measurements of 24-h glucose have provided insight 
into sleep-wake regulation of glucose metabolism. Compared with day­
time glucose levels, nighttime blood glucose levels have been found to 
more accurately predict a range of glucoregulatory parameters. Emerg­
ing evidence has also indicated that the daily timing of exercise may be 
an important determinant for more efficacious improvements in blood 
triglyceride and glucose levels. Furthermore, consideration of meal 
timing, particularly in the hospital setting, may impact patient health 
or responsiveness to treatments, as food in hospitals is often provided 
either continuously or just during the dark (rest) phase, with the latter 
being common in neonatal intensive care.
As our knowledge of the complexity of how circadian processes mod­
ulate physiology deepens, further advances to rationally develop new 
strategies for treatments of disorders affected by circadian misalignment 
are essential. For example, novel compounds have begun to emerge from 
unbiased drug discovery screens that in cell- and animal-based assays 
impact circadian clock components, either shortening or lengthening the 
period. These compounds include CRY stabilizers and various inhibitors 
of CKIδ, CKIε, and GSK-3. Pharmacologic control of the circadian cycle 
may be useful in the treatment of circadian disorders and metabolic 
disturbances with a circadian component. Understanding how the cir­
cadian clock controls biological functions will shed new light onto the 
pathogenesis of metabolic disorders with a circadian component, such as 
type 2 diabetes and metabolic syndrome, and will yield insight into how 
timing of drug delivery will impact patient care.
Acknowledgment
The authors would like to thank Billie Marcheva for her help with the 
figures and tables.
■
■FURTHER READING
Allada R, Bass J: Circadian mechanisms in medicine. N Engl J Med 
384:550, 2021.
Buxton OM et al: Adverse metabolic consequences in humans of 
prolonged sleep restriction combined with circadian disruption. Sci 
Transl Med 4:129ra43, 2012.

# 08 - 500 Emerging Neurotherapeutic Technologies

## 500 Emerging Neurotherapeutic Technologies

■
■FURTHER READING
Barabasi A-L et al: Network medicine: A network-based approach to 
human disease. Nat Rev Genet 12:56, 2011.
Cheng F et al: Network-based approach to prediction and populationbased validation of in silico drug repurposing. Nat Commun 9:2691, 
2018.
Liu X et al: Robustness and lethality in multilayer biological networks. 
Nat Commun 11:6043, 2020.
Loscalzo J et al (eds): Network Medicine: Complex Systems in Human 
Disease and Therapeutics. Cambridge, MA, Harvard University Press. 
Copyright 2017 by the President and Fellows of Harvard College. All 
rights reserved.
Loscalzo J et al: Human disease classification in the postgenomic era: 
A complex systems approach to human pathobiology. Mol Syst Biol 
3:124, 2007.
Maiorino E, Loscalzo J: Phenomics and robust multiomics data 
for cardiovascular disease subtyping. Arterioscl Thromb Vasc Biol 
43:1111, 2023.
Menche J et al: Disease networks. Uncovering disease-disease rela­
tionships through the incomplete interactome. Science 347:1257601, 
2015.
Oldham WM et al: Network analysis to risk stratify patients with exer­
cise intolerance. Circ Res 122:864, 2018.
Paci P et al: Gene co-expression in the interactome: Moving from 
correlation toward causation via an integrated approach to disease 
module discovery. NPJ Syst Biol App 7:3, 2021.
Wang R et al: Multiomics network medicine approaches to precision 
medicine and therapeutics in cardiovascular diseases Arterioscl 
Thromb Vasc Biol 43:493, 2023.
Jyoti Mishra, Karunesh Ganguly

Emerging Neurotherapeutic 
Technologies
Neurotherapeutic technologies represent a diverse group of very 
promising treatment approaches with a common purpose of improving 
neurologic function. Decades of basic science research have paved the 
path for these novel technologies that have the potential to transform 
the lives of patients with neurologic diseases. A key goal is to minimize 
the consequences of lost abilities, whether they are motor, sensory, or 
cognitive. A common objective is to also harness the inherent plastic­
ity of the nervous system, regardless of age, and even in the face of a 
degenerative process.
The technologies described below are the culmination of both an 
increased understanding of neural plasticity mechanisms in both the 
intact and the injured nervous system as well as advances in technol­
ogy and computational power. While it is also clear that there may be 
fundamental limits on plasticity and repair mechanisms (the closing of 
developmental windows and/or loss of the ability of a network to com­
pensate), the brain remains highly plastic regardless of age and even in 
the face of ongoing injury and/or degenerative processes. Collectively, 
there is now growing evidence to support neurologic restorative efforts 
for both “static” (e.g., stroke) and progressive neurologic disorders.
These technologies may not appear, at first glance, directly relevant 
to traditional medical care, but it is worth noting that clinicians have 
the most knowledge and experience about specific disease processes, 
available treatments, and the expected course of illnesses affecting 
the nervous system. It is thus critical that neurologic specialists and 
other clinicians play an important role in the future adoption of these 
technologies for neurologic rehabilitation. The sections below outline 

emerging diagnostic and therapeutic approaches that have the poten­
tial to transform the lives of patients with neurologic disorders. These 
include technologies to harness plasticity, neuroimaging, neurostimu­
lation, and brain–machine interfaces.

NONINVASIVE TECHNOLOGIES TO 
HARNESS PLASTICITY
Neurologic rehabilitation aims to harness activity-dependent plasticity 
mechanisms to maximize functional restoration. This principle can 
be applied to a diverse range of functional domains such as move­
ment control, sensory processing, language, pain, and cognition. For 
example, recent randomized controlled clinical trials for motor recov­
ery after stroke have suggested that intensity of training may be par­
ticularly important for sustained long-term improvements. Moreover, 
studies of the effects of such training in rodent and nonhuman primate 
models further suggest that plasticity of cortical “motor maps” as well 
as the coordinated firing of neurons in remaining networks underlie 
observed functional improvements with rehabilitation. The incorpora­
tion of technology for neurologic rehabilitation has the great potential 
to revolutionize the delivery of care by significantly increasing access, 
reducing the burden for adherence to high-intensity regimens, and 
maximizing engagement. Below are three examples of how emerging 
technology can be used to harness neural plasticity and maximize 
functional restoration.
■
■ROBOTICS
Rehabilitation robotics for both the upper and the lower limb have 
the potential to improve motor outcomes after stroke or other forms 
of brain injury. There is a growing recognition that focused training 
involving a range of tasks might be important for improved functional 
outcomes. While there is a growing recognition of “sensitive periods” 
that might represent optimal windows for rehabilitation after injury 
(e.g., perhaps the first several months after a stroke), such training 
likely has a role in the chronic period as well (e.g., maintenance therapy 
may also guard against known declines in function over time). Notably, 
the delivery of intensive training is a great challenge from both the per­
spective of the health care system and each patient. Outside of clinical 
trials, such a training program can be quite difficult to implement and 
maintain. It can also be costly and require significant effort.
CHAPTER 500
Emerging Neurotherapeutic Technologies
Motor rehabilitation protocols using robotics have been developed 
and tested for both the upper limb and the lower limb. Such robotic 
therapies have often focused on the delivery of high-intensity move­
ment practice that can surpass what is possible via existing standards 
of care. Moreover, robotic systems are capable of precisely measuring 
movement parameters (e.g., the kinematics of the movements) and 
providing quantitative feedback regarding the changes in performance 
during the training period. A particular focus has been on maximizing 
patient engagement and recruitment of attentional and reward path­
ways, both of which are increasingly recognized to drive neural plastic­
ity. Ongoing advances in design and the user interface will continue to 
improve comfort and support sustained effort. For example, via close 
monitoring of performance and movement parameters, the system 
can aid at key points in order to minimize fatigue and ensure maximal 
engagement. Moreover, antigravity support of the upper limb can allow 
practice and task engagement even in the presence of severe weakness; 
this would be extremely challenging and labor intensive under current 
standards of care. Recent analysis also suggests that robotic devices 
may at least match outcomes realized with existing standards of care. 
However, rehabilitation robotics may also provide more precise feed­
back and permit novel quantitative rehabilitation approaches.
Figure 500-1 shows one example of an upper-limb robotic exoskel­
eton device that is currently being evaluated for training after stroke. 
A randomized, multicenter trial compared treatment with this exo­
skeleton system against conventional therapy provided by physical and 
occupational therapists. Participants were enrolled in the chronic phase 
and all had moderate-to-severe deficits; the groups underwent three 
sessions per week over an 8-week period. For robotic training, subjects 
trained with games to improve mobilization and to practice activities of 
daily living. This study provided evidence that both conventional and

FIGURE 500-1  Photograph of a subject interacting with a complex upper-limb 
exoskeleton and a virtual reality system. (From U Keller et al: Robot-assisted arm 
assessments in spinal cord injured patients: A consideration of concept study. PLoS 
One 10:e0126948, 2015.)
robotic therapy could improve function in patients with chronic stroke. 
Multiple studies have also found similar gains when using either con­
ventional or traditional approaches. Thus, a growing body of research 
supports the idea that such devices might complement conventional 
approaches to rehabilitation. Future work will need to define how reha­
bilitation robotics can optimally use adaptive and quantitative methods 
to further augment the recovery process.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
■
■VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED REALITY
Therapeutic approaches using virtual reality (VR) and augmented 
reality (AR) aim to treat neurologic illnesses by specifically and quan­
titatively altering a patient’s subjective experiences and interactions 
with the environment. Core components of both are advanced hard­
ware and computational methods to generate simulated, yet realistic, 
perceptions. While some applications permit users to dynamically 
change the viewed perspective, other applications are designed to allow 
interactions among multiple users. Visual feedback is often a key com­
ponent; this can include simple computer monitors or more immersive 
“head-mounted” viewers that modify the simulation based on changes 
in perspective. Tracking of movements (e.g., hand and head position) 
is often included. Multiple methods are used to allow a user to interact 
with the environment; interactions can be guided by straightforward 
means such as a keyboard, mouse, or even a joystick. More immersive 
methods are also frequently used. For example, gloves with embedded 
sensors and haptic inputs can allow the user’s hand to be represented 
in real time in the simulated environment. Moreover, haptic interfaces 
can provide sensory feedback, allowing patients to interact with and 
“feel” virtual objects through multiple sensory modalities. A particular 
strength of these approaches is that therapeutic interventions can be 
studied in very controlled environments.
VR enables a user to interact with a simulated reality that can be pre­
cisely and quantitatively controlled. In addition to allowing patients to 
dynamically experience an altered reality, it can simultaneously moni­
tor a subject’s behaviors and responses. Such monitoring can allow 
precise measurements of clinically relevant parameters (e.g., motor 
actions, perception, cognitive processing) and can also be applied in 
specific rehabilitation training to achieve functionally meaningful 
goals. A growing body of literature indicates that VR environments can 
be tailored to individual needs and preferences, thereby maximizing 
engagement, motivation, and adaptation to ensure sufficient difficulty 
of tasks. VR environments can be designed to create powerful “gam­
ing” platforms that are actually targeting clinically relevant parameters. 
For example, the upper-limb robotic systems described previously are 
frequently combined with VR environments that allow interaction with 
virtual objects.
In contrast to VR, AR overlays an artificial filter over a subject’s 
view of the actual physical world, thus providing an “augmented” or 

enhanced view of the world around. AR is being tested in a diverse 
group of patients with neurologic impairments in the motor, sensory, 
or cognitive domains. AR may offer a particularly unique rehabilitation 
intervention for stroke patients. It is widely known that brain injuries 
limit patients’ physical interaction with their environments. Further­
more, physical and cognitive impairments may limit social interac­
tions. Such impoverished experiences are likely to be present during 
both the acute and the chronic phases. Importantly, there is clear basic 
scientific evidence that environmental enrichment can be a key com­
ponent of rehabilitation; such enrichment may offer additive benefits 
to the often-limited formal rehabilitation sessions per week. Consistent 
with this are clinical studies suggesting that motor and cognitive out­
comes may suffer when interactions with the environment are reduced; 
AR may be capable of increasing enrichment. For example, in the case 
of spatial neglect after stroke, the impaired modality may be accounted 
for using AR methods. Similarly, physical impairments that limit walk­
ing speeds can also limit visual feedback; both AR and VR can be used 
to enhance visual feedback during gait training.
Figure 500-2 shows an innovative application of AR for the treat­
ment of “phantom limb” pain. A subset of both upper-limb and lowerlimb amputees experience painful sensations that appear to originate 
from the missing limb. Past research has suggested that mirror therapy 
can be an effective treatment for phantom limb pain. During mir­
ror therapy treatments, patients move their healthy arm in front of 
a mirror to produce a perception of movements of the missing limb. 
Previous studies have suggested that maladaptive plasticity of affected 
sensory cortices may be treated with mirror therapy. Importantly, in 
comparison to mirror therapy, AR-based therapy for phantom limb 
pain can be based on movements of the affected limb, i.e., using the 
remaining portion of the limb as opposed to the unaffected contra­
lateral limb. This study demonstrated a novel treatment in which 
“phantom motor execution” is enabled using sophisticated machinelearning algorithms. More specifically, the study “decoded” phantom 
limb movements by measuring electromyogram (EMG) activity at the 
stump. Importantly, while the distal muscles responsible for move­
ments were lost as a result of amputation, the remaining EMG activity 
could be used to predict presumed distal limb movements. As shown 
in Fig. 500-2, these inferred movements were projected onto an AR 
screen to create the perception of limb movements. The study showed 
that a subset of patients with long-term refractory phantom limb pain 
could experience a significant reduction in pain levels after using the 
AR system.
■
■NEUROGAMING
Computerized programs that harness the power of video games have 
shown some evidence for ameliorating deficits in visual perception, 
age-related degeneration, and neuropsychiatric disorders. An essential 
feature of effective video game training is the progressive adjustment 
of the level of difficulty in line with the cognitive improvement of the 
patient. Important areas of active research include ways to enhance sus­
tainability of neurogame training over long time periods and improv­
ing training transfer, i.e., the generalizability of task-specific training in 
one cognitive domain to more broad-based functional improvements. 
By leveraging video game technology, neurogames allow for dynamic 
user interaction and maintain user engagement across multiple ses­
sions over several days of training. Important game mechanics include 
repetitive practice, performance-adaptive challenges, and several lay­
ers of reward feedback—from moment-to-moment point rewards to 
reward milestones over multiple sessions.
Notably, neurogames have therapeutic potential as they can be 
targeted to specific neurocognitive deficits. For instance, games have 
shown significant benefits in aging, by targeting speed of processing 
and training the abilities to multitask and suppress distractions. In 
each case, selective targeting is achieved by focusing the adaptive chal­
lenges to the neurocognitive domain of interest. Duration of response 
time windows available to the user or the level of interference are 
selectively targeted in the case of speed of processing training and 
interference training, respectively. More recent research demonstrated 
that it is possible to engender focused circuit neuroplasticity using such

A
B
C
D
FIGURE 500-2  Augmented reality (AR) for phantom limb pain. A. A patient is shown a live AR video. B. Electromyography electrodes placed over the stump record muscle 
activation during training. C. The patient matches target postures during rehabilitation. D. Patient playing a game in which a car is controlled by “phantom movements.” 
(M Ortiz-Catalan et al: Phantom motor execution facilitated by machine learning and augmented reality as treatment for phantom limb pain: A single group, clinical trial in 
patients with chronic intractable phantom limb pain. Lancet 388:2885, 2016.)
selective targeting in neurogaming. For example, older adults learned 
to adaptively perform within progressively more challenging distractor 
environments. Neuroplasticity selective to distractor processing was 
evidenced in this study at both the microscale, i.e., at the resolution of 
single neuron spiking in sensory cortex, as well as macroscale, i.e., elec­
troencephalography (EEG)-based event-related potential recordings.
Video games have also shown promise in the treatment of visual 
deficits such as amblyopia, and in cognitive remediation in neuropsy­
chiatric disorders such as schizophrenia. However, while the evidence 
base has been encouraging in small-sample randomized controlled tri­
als (RCTs), larger RCTs are needed to demonstrate definitive therapeu­
tic benefit. This is especially necessary as the commercial brain training 
industry continues to make unsubstantiated claims of the benefits 

CHAPTER 500
Emerging Neurotherapeutic Technologies
of neurogaming; such claims have been formally dismissed by the 
scientific community. Like any other pharmacologic or device-based 
therapy, neurogames need to be systematically validated in multiphase 
RCTs establishing neural target engagement and documenting cogni­
tive and behavioral outcomes in specific disorder populations.
Generalizability of training benefits from task-specific cognitive 
outcomes to more broad-based functional improvements remains 
the holy grail of neurogaming. Next-generation neurogames will aim 
to integrate physiologic measures such as heart rate variability (an 
index of physical exertion), galvanic skin responses, and respiration 
rate (indices of stress response), and even EEG-based neural mea­
sures. The objectives of such multimodal biosensor integration are to 
enhance the “closed-loop mechanics” that drive game adaptation and

hence improve therapeutic outcomes and 
perhaps result in greater generalizabil­
ity. These complex, yet potentially more 
effective, neurogames of the future will 
need rigorous clinical study for demon­
stration of validity and efficacy.

NEUROIMAGING
Feedback
display
(e.g., thermometer)
■
■NEUROIMAGING OF 
CONNECTIVITY
Multimodal 
neuroimaging 
methods 
including functional magnetic resonance 
imaging (fMRI), EEG, and magnetoen­
cephalography (MEG) are now being 
investigated as tools to study functional 
connectivity between brain regions, i.e., 
extent of correlated activity between brain 
regions of interest. Snapshots of func­
tional connectivity can be analyzed while 
an individual is engaged in specific cog­
nitive tasks or during rest. Resting-state 
functional connectivity (rsFC) is espe­
cially attractive as a robust, task-indepen­
dent measure of brain function that can 
be evaluated in diverse neurologic and 
neuropsychiatric disorders. In fact, meth­
odologic research has shown that rs-fMRI 
can provide more reliable brain signals of energy consumption than 
specific task-based fMRI approaches.
FIGURE 500-3  Neurofeedback using functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI). (From T Fovet et al: Translating 
neurocognitive models of auditory-visual hallucinations into therapy. Front Psychiatry 7:103, 2016.)
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
In recent years, there has been a surge of research to identify robust 
rsFC-based biomarkers for specific neurologic and neuropsychiatric 
disorders and thereby inform diagnoses and even predict specific 
treatment outcomes. For many such disorders, the network-level 
neurobiologic substrates that correspond to the clinical symptoms are 
not known. Furthermore, many are not unitary diseases, but rather 
heterogeneous syndromes composed of varied co-occurring symptoms. 
Hence, the quest for robust network biomarkers corresponding to com­
plex neuropsychologic disorders is challenging and still in its infancy; 
yet some studies have made significant headway in this domain. For 
example, in a large multisite cohort of ~1000 depressed patients, Drys­
dale et al. (2017) showed that rsFC measures can subdivide patients into 
four neurophysiologic “biotypes” with distinct patterns of dysfunctional 
connectivity in limbic and frontostriatal networks. These biotypes 
were associated with different clinical-symptom profiles (combinations 
of anhedonia, anxiety, insomnia, anergia, etc.) and had high (>80%) 
diagnostic sensitivity and specificity. Moreover, these biotypes could 
also predict responsiveness to transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS) 
therapy. Another recent study demonstrated utility of rsFC measures to 
predict diagnosis of mild traumatic brain injury (mTBI), which is clini­
cally challenging by conventional means.
Apart from fMRI-based measures of rsFC, EEG- and MEG-based 
rsFC measures are also being actively investigated, as these provide a 
relatively lower-cost alternative to fMRI. While EEG is of lowest cost, 
it compromises on spatial resolution. The major strength of MEG is its 
ability to provide more accurate source-space estimates of functional 
oscillatory coupling than EEG, as well as provide measures at various 
physiologically relevant frequencies (up to 50 Hz shown to be clinically 
useful). In this regard, EEG and MEG are complementary to fMRI, 
which can only be used to study slow activity fluctuations (i.e., <0.1 Hz); 
the potential for EEG/MEG modalities to provide valid diagnostic bio­
markers is currently underexploited and requires further study.
■
■CLOSED-LOOP NEUROIMAGING
Neuroscientific studies to date are predominantly designed as “openloop experiments,” interpreting the neurobiologic substrates of 
human behavior via correlation with simultaneously occurring neu­
ral activity. In recent years, advances in real-time signal processing 
have paved the way for “closed-loop neuroimaging,” wherein humans 

3T MRI
acquisition
Image
reconstruction
The task of the subject
is to lower the temperature display
Real-time
fMRI
can directly manipulate experiment parameters in real-time based on 
specific brain signals (Fig. 500-3). Closed-loop imaging methods can 
not only advance our understanding of dynamic brain function but 
also have therapeutic potential. Humans can learn to modulate their 
neural dynamics in specific ways when they are able to perceive (i.e., 
see/hear) their brain signals in real-time using closed-loop neuroim­
aging-based neurofeedback. Early studies showed that such neuro­
feedback learning and resulting neuromodulation could be applied as 
therapy for patients suffering from chronic pain, motor rehabilitation 
in Parkinson’s and stroke patients, modulation of aberrant oscillatory 
activity in epilepsy, and improvement of cognitive abilities such as 
sustained attention in healthy individuals and patients with attentiondeficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD). These approaches have also 
shown potential for deciphering state-of-consciousness in comatose 
patients, wherein a proportion of vegetative/minimally conscious 
patients can communicate awareness via neuroimaging-based mental 
imagery.
Closed-loop neuroimaging therapeutic studies have utilized realtime fMRI, EEG, and MEG methods. It is common for neural signals 
to be extracted from specific target brain regions for neuromodulation. 
However, given that distributed neural networks underlie behavioral 
deficits, new studies have also explored neurofeedback on combi­
natorial brain signals from multiple brain regions extracted using 
multivariate pattern analysis (MVPA). While early studies indicate 
therapeutic potential, clinical RCTs of closed-loop neuroimaging neu­
rofeedback have shown mixed results. This may largely be because of 
the individual heterogeneity in neuropsychiatric disorders such that 
there is no one-size-fits-all therapy. Closed-loop neuroimaging-based 
therapies need to be more personalized to the preintervention cogni­
tive and neurophysiologic states of the individual, and a better under­
standing developed regarding learning principles and mechanisms 
of self-regulation underlying neurofeedback. Clinical practitioners 
applying these methods also need to be well-educated on the hardware/
software capabilities of these brain–computer interfaces to maximize 
patient outcomes.
NONINVASIVE BRAIN STIMULATION
Noninvasive brain stimulation (NIBS) is widely recognized as having 
great potential to modulate brain networks in a range of neurologic and 
psychiatric diseases; it is currently approved by the U.S. Food and Drug

TMS coil
Magnetic field
TMS coil
(µs)
tDCS
electrodes
tDCS electrode
Current flow
–
+
+
 +
+
+
+
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– +
+
+
(min)
Anode
Cathode
FIGURE 500-4  Illustration of transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS) and 
transcranial direct current stimulation (tDCS) setups. The upper panels show a 
TMS setup. Coils generate magnetic fields that can in turn generate electrical fields 
in the cortical tissue. The lower panels show a tDCS setup. The electrical current 
is believed to flow from the anode (+) to the cathode (–) through the superficial 
cortical areas leading to polarization. (Reproduced with permission from R Sparing, 
FM Mottaghy: Noninvasive brain stimulation with transcranial magnetic or direct 
current stimulation [TMS/tDCS]—From insights into human memory to therapy of its 
dysfunction. Methods 44:329, 2008.)
Administration (FDA) as a treatment for depression. Importantly, there 
is a very large body of basic research indicating that neuromodulation 
of the nervous system with electrical stimulation can have both shortterm and long-term effects. While TMS uses magnetic fields to gener­
ate electrical currents, transcranial direct current stimulation (tDCS), 
in contrast, is based on direct stimulation using electrical currents 
applied at the scalp (Fig. 500-4). TMS induces small electrical currents 
in the brain by magnetic fields that pass through the skull; it is known 
to be painless and therefore widely used for NIBS. Animal research 
suggests that anodal tDCS causes a generalized reduction in resting 
membrane potential over large cortical areas, whereas cathodal stimu­
lation causes hyperpolarization. Prolonged stimulation with tDCS can 
cause an enduring change in cortical excitability under the stimulated 
regions. Further, changes in resting-state fMRI-based activity and 
functional connectivity have also been observed after tDCS. Notably, 
there is uncertainty regarding precisely how much electrical current 
is able to penetrate through the skull and modulate neural networks. 
Indeed, recent work has found that typical stimulation paradigms may 
not generate sufficient electrical fields to modulate neural activity; an 
alternate possibility is that peripheral nerves may be modulated and 
thus affect neural activity.
Neuromodulation via stimulation techniques such as tDCS and 
TMS have shown promise as methods to improve motor function after 
stroke; there are a growing number of studies demonstrating functional 
benefits of combining physical therapy with brain stimulation. Two 
commonly utilized TMS paradigms include low-frequency “inhibi­
tory” stimulation of the healthy cortex or high-frequency “excitatory” 
stimulation of the injured hemisphere. Each aims to modify the 
balance of reciprocal inhibition between the two hemispheres after 
stroke. A meta-analysis of RCTs published over the past decade found 
a significant beneficial effect on motor outcomes. Unfortunately, a 
recent large multicenter trial to assess the long-term benefits of TMS 

on motor recovery after stroke (NICHE trial) did not find a benefit at 
the population level. Ongoing research aims to better understand how 
stimulation can directly affect neural patterns and thus allow more 
customization of stimulation—past trials did not record the neural 
responses to stimulation.

TMS and tDCS interventions are also being applied in psychiatric 
disorders. A substantial body of evidence supports the use of TMS as an 
antidepressant in major depressive disorder (MDD). TMS is also being 
investigated for its potential efficacy in posttraumatic stress disorder 
(PTSD), obsessive compulsive disorder (OCD), and treatment of audi­
tory hallucinations in schizophrenia. Various repetitive TMS (rTMS) 
protocols have shown efficacy in major depression. These include both 
low-frequency (≤1 Hz) and high-frequency (10–20 Hz) rTMS stimula­
tion over the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex (DLPFC). Mechanistically, 
low-frequency rTMS is associated with decreased regional cerebral 
blood flow while high-frequency rTMS elicits increased blood flow, not 
only over the prefrontal region where the TMS is applied but also in 
associated basal ganglia and amygdala circuits. Notably, the differential 
mechanisms of low- versus high-frequency rTMS protocols are associ­
ated with mood improvements in different sets of MDD patients, and 
patients showing benefits with one protocol may even show worsening 
with the other, again pointing to individual heterogeneity in network 
function. EEG-guided TMS is also being investigated in psychiatric 
disorders, for instance, the individual resting alpha-band (8–12 Hz) 
peak frequency to determine TMS stimulation rates. With respect 
to transcranial electrical stimulation in psychiatry, tDCS is the most 
commonly used protocol. In major depression, there is a documented 
imbalance in left versus right DLPFC activity; hence, differential 
anodal versus cathodal tDCS in the left versus right prefrontal cortex 
may be a potentially efficacious approach. Interestingly while metaanalysis shows promise for NIBS methods in psychiatric illness, large 
RCTs have failed to generate benefits compared to placebo treatment. 
Future success may require careful personalized targeting based on 
network dynamics and refinement of protocols to accommodate com­
binatorial treatments.
CHAPTER 500
Emerging Neurotherapeutic Technologies
IMPLANTABLE NEURAL INTERFACES
Fully implantable neural interfaces that can improve clinical function 
already exist. Cochlear implants, for example, are sensory prostheses 
that can restore hearing in deaf patients. Environmental sounds are 
processed in real-time and then converted into patterned stimulation 
delivered to the cochlear nerve. Importantly, even while the patterned 
stimulation remains the same, there are gradual improvements in the 
perception of speech and other complex sounds over a period of sev­
eral months after device implantation. Activity-dependent sculpting 
of neural circuits is hypothesized to underlie the observed perceptual 
improvements. Similarly, the development of deep-brain stimulation 
(DBS) was based on decades of work showing that surgical lesions to 
specific nuclei could alleviate tremor and bradykinesia in animal mod­
els. DBS involves chronic implantation of a stimulating electrode that 
targets specific neural structures (e.g., subthalamic nuclei or the globus 
pallidus in Parkinson’s disease). At least for movement disorders, it is 
commonly thought that targeted areas are functionally inhibited by the 
chronic electrical stimulation.
■
■IMPLANTABLE DEVICES FOR 
NEUROMODULATION
There has been recent progress in the development of implantable neu­
ral interfaces to treat neurologic and psychiatric illnesses. For example, 
for patients with refractory focal epilepsy and clearly identified seizure 
foci, invasive “responsive stimulation” is FDA approved. Responsive 
stimulation is grounded on principles of closed-loop stimulation based 
on real-time monitoring of brain oscillations; specifically, the device 
aims to detect the earliest signatures of the onset of a seizure, usually 
at a stage that is not symptomatic, and then deliver focused electrical 
stimulation to prevent further progression and generalization. A large 
RCT of this device was performed in patients with intractable focal 
epilepsy; they were assigned to either sham or active stimulation in 
response to seizure detection. There was a significant reduction in

seizure frequency in the stimulation group, but it was 
rare for patients to become seizure-free. There were 
also modest improvements in quality of life. Nota­
bly, there was a small increased risk of hemorrhage 
associated with the device. In addition to providing 
clinicians with another treatment option, this device 
has offered important avenues for research and fur­
ther optimization. For example, it is now possible to 
monitor subclinical and clinical seizures and intracra­
nial EEG in patients with chronic epilepsy. This has 
resulted in new knowledge about the association of 
seizures with circadian rhythms and sleep. It is also 
anticipated that a better understanding of the triggers 
of seizures and the development of better stimulation 
algorithms, based on real-world data, can ultimately 
lead to more effective treatments.

Signal
processing
Neural
signals

Action potentials
Field potentials
There is also great interest in the development of 
treatments for refractory depression. One area of focus 
has been on the development of DBS to treat depres­
sion. While early smaller studies were promising, a 
larger study failed to find benefits at the population 
level. Subsequent analysis has suggested the possibility 
that more precise tailoring of stimulation parameters to each individual 
is warranted, both at the level of specific pathways identified through 
neuroimaging as well as network activity biomarkers. Recent studies 
have, in fact, supported the notion that individualized patterns of net­
work activity are predictive of a patient’s symptoms and how the patient 
might respond to stimulation. There are now planned studies that aim 
to tailor stimulation to each individual with severe depression.

FIGURE 500-5  Components of a brain–machine interface (BMI). (Reproduced with permission from 
A Tsu et al: Cortical neuroprosthetics from a clinical perspective. Neurobiol Dis 83:154, 2015.)
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
■
■VAGUS NERVE STIMULATION TO IMPROVE 
RECOVERY AFTER STROKE
Vagal nerve stimulation (VNS) has recently been approved by the FDA 
as a therapy to enhance motor recovery after stroke. Animal studies 
first provided clear evidence that VNS is safe and can enhance plastic­
ity in both intact animals as well as in models of injury. Importantly, 
these studies indicated that precise timing of movements is important 
for efficacy. For example, in animal models of stroke, stimulation of 
the vagus nerve was timed to the end of successful movement repeti­
tions; these studies further indicated that the precise timing of VNS 
during rehabilitation is essential. VNS appears to result in rapid activa­
tion of cholinergic and noradrenergic systems; the activation of these 
neuromodulators may enhance attentional effects and improve “signal 
to noise,” thus facilitating the encoding of relevant task features. This 
basic research culminated in smaller clinical trials and a subsequent 
pivotal randomized trial of VNS in stroke. In this trial, after 6 weeks of 
therapy paired with VNS, participants randomized to the VNS group 
(n = 53) had a significant increase in forelimb function compared to 
the control group. In addition, 90 days after the study was completed, 
a higher percentage of patients in the VNS group maintained clinically 
meaningful responses. Together, this indicates that VNS is a promising 
new therapy to augment rehabilitation after stroke. However, given the 
variability of effects for single patients, additional research is required 
to determine which stroke patients are the most likely to benefit. Future 
advances that allow VNS to be delivered in the home setting should 
also lead to greater use of this approach.
■
■BRAIN–COMPUTER INTERFACES FOR PARALYSIS
Brain–computer interfaces (BCIs) represent a more advanced neural 
interface that aims to restore motor function. Multiple neurologic disor­
ders (e.g., traumatic and nontraumatic spinal cord injury, motor neuron 
disease, neuromuscular disorders, stroke) can result in severe and dev­
astating paralysis. Patients cannot perform simple activities, and they 
remain fully dependent for care. In patients with high cervical injuries, 
advanced amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), or brainstem strokes, the 
effects are especially devastating and often leave patients unable to com­
municate. While there has been extensive research into each disorder, 
clinically effective approaches for rehabilitation of long-term disability 

Device
control

Neural
signals
Control
signals
a
Electrodes
Computer cursor
b
Prosthetic limb
Feedback
are lacking. BCIs offer a promising means to restore function. In the 
patient groups described above, while the pathways for transmission 
of signals to muscles are disrupted, the brain itself is largely functional. 
Thus, BCIs can restore function by communicating directly with the 
brain. For example, in a “motor” BCI, a subject’s intention to move is 
translated in real time to control a device. As illustrated in Fig. 500-5, 
the components of a motor BCI include the following: (1) recordings 
of neural activity, (2) algorithms to transform the neural activity into 
control signals, (3) an external device driven by these control signals, 
and (4) feedback regarding the current state of the device.
Many sources of neural signals can be used in a BCI. While EEG 
signals can be obtained noninvasively, other neural signals require 
invasive placement of electrodes. Three invasive sources of neural sig­
nals include electrocorticography (ECoG), action potentials or spikes, 
and local field potentials (LFPs). Spikes and LFPs are recorded with 
electrodes that penetrate the cortex. “Spikes” represent high-bandwidth 
signals (300–25,000 Hz) that are recorded from either single neu­
rons or multiple neurons (“multiunit”). LFPs are the low-frequency 
(~0.1–300 Hz) components. In contrast, ECoG is recorded from elec­
trodes that are placed on the cortical surface. ECoG signals may be 
viewed as an intermediate-resolution signal in comparison with spikes/
LFPs and EEG. While it is worth noting that there is still considerable 
ongoing research into the specific neural underpinning of each signal 
source, there has been great progress in the ability to decode a user’s 
intention.
A central goal of the field of BCIs is to improve function in patients 
with severe disability. This can consist of a range of communication 
and assistive devices such as a computer cursor, keyboard control, 
wheelchair, or robotic limb. In the ideal scenario, the least invasive 
method of recording neural signals would allow the most complex level 
of control. Decades of research in nonhuman primates and early-phase 
clinical trials have demonstrated the feasibility of direct neural control 
of assistive technology based on recording of neural signals at multiple 
resolutions. There have been numerous examples of human subjects 
with a range of neurologic illnesses (e.g., brainstem stroke, ALS, spinal 
cord injury) who have demonstrated the actual use of implantable neu­
ral interfaces. This includes demonstrations of both the control of com­
munication interfaces as well as robotic limbs. Early pilot clinical trials 
of BCIs based on invasive recordings of neural signals showed that 
relatively high rates of brain-controlled typing are possible (e.g., >30 
characters per minute). A past case study additionally demonstrated 
that a fully implantable BCI system could allow communication in a 
locked-in ALS patient (Fig. 500-6). At the time of the study, the patient 
required mechanical ventilation and could only communicate using 
eye movements. She was implanted with multiple subdural cortical 
electrodes; the neural signals were then processed and sent wirelessly 
to an external augmentative alternative communication (AAC) device.

A
Posterior
Anterior
e1
e2
e3
e4
Electrode strip
D
Tablet
Transmitter
(implanted device)
FIGURE 500-6  Illustration of an amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS) patient with a fully implanted communication interface. A. Illustration of the location of electrodes on 
the brain. B. X-ray of chest showing the wireless module. C. X-ray of leads and wire routing. D. Schematic of the subject performing a typing task. (From MJ Vansteensel 
et al: Fully implanted brain–computer interface in a locked-in patient with ALS. N Engl J Med 375:2060, 2016. Copyright © 2016 Massachusetts Medical Society. Reprinted 
with permission from Massachusetts Medical Society.)
Importantly, she could use the interface with no supervision from 
research staff, albeit with a relatively low communication rate.
Over the past 5 years, there has been tremendous progress toward 
the goal of restoring much higher rates of communication in partici­
pants with severe impairments. These studies have used either ECoG 
or spike-based decoding. One of the first studies indicated that a 
participant with a brainstem stroke and anarthria could communicate 
using a set of 50 words. Two subsequent studies showed that decoding 
a significantly larger set of words is possible, using either spiking or 
ECoG. For example, one study, using spike-based recordings, indicated 
that decoding of a large vocabulary was possible using phoneme-based 
decoding; that is, an arbitrary and a remarkably large set of words 
could be decoded by decomposing into its set of phonemes. Together, 
these studies indicate the real possibility of a clinically viable speech 
neuroprosthetic to restore fast communication in those with anarthria 
or severe dysarthria.
Overall, there has been tremendous progress recently in the transla­
tion of BCIs. There are now also multiple commercial efforts to take 
these findings from pilot studies and to scale them to a commercially 
viable device. In fact, there is already a single participant with tetraple­
gia implanted with a first-in-class commercial device that can record 
spiking activity. While there are still challenges with long-term stability, 
this participant appears to be using this implanted device to control 
a computer (e.g., to control a cursor and to play video games) in the 
home setting. Additional work will be required to fully quantify how 
stable neural interfaces are and the level of performance that can be 
reliably achieved. As these characteristics become increasingly clear, 

B
C
Electrodes
(implanted)
Ventilator
Antenna
CHAPTER 500
Receiver
Emerging Neurotherapeutic Technologies
it should allow targeted clinical translational efforts that are geared 
toward specific patient needs and preferences (e.g., extent of disability, 
medical condition, noninvasive vs invasive). For example, patients with 
high cervical injuries (i.e., above C4, where the arm and the hand are 
affected) have rehabilitation needs different from patients with lower 
cervical injuries (i.e., below C5–C6, where the primary deficits are 
the hand and fingers). Moreover, interfaces to restore communication 
may be different from those aimed toward movement control. We fully 
anticipate that over the next decade there will be larger scale clinical 
studies to demonstrate how BCIs allow participants with severe impair­
ments to experience the ability to communicate and to control assistive 
technology.
■
■FURTHER READING
Baniqued PDE et al: Brain-computer interface robotics for hand 
rehabilitation after stroke: A systematic review. J Neuroeng Rehabil 
18:15, 2021.
Bassett DS et al: Emerging frontiers of neuroengineering: A network 
science of brain connectivity. Annu Rev Biomed Eng 19:327, 2017.
Dawson J et al: Vagus nerve stimulation paired with rehabilitation for 
upper limb motor function after ischaemic stroke (VNS-REHAB): 
A randomised, blinded, pivotal, device trial. Lancet 397:1545, 2021.
Drysdale AT et al: Resting-state connectivity biomarkers define neu­
rophysiological subtypes of depression. Nat Med 23:28, 2016.
Ganguly K et al: Modulation of neural co-firing to enhance network 
transmission and improve motor function after stroke. Neuron 
110:2363, 2022.

# 10 - 502 Metabolomics

## 502 Metabolomics

language processing relied on a specialized architecture called recurrent 
neural networks. Contemporary deep learning methods often leverage 
the transformer model (Table 501-2), which is well-suited to exploit the 
structure of natural language and other text. Text-processing machine 
learning models have been successfully applied to analyze physician 
notes in the electronic health record, detect depression symptom 
severity from spoken language, and scribe patient-physician visits. 
For example, a study by Rajkomar and colleagues analyzed electronic 
health record data from 216,221 adult patients to predict in-hospital 
mortality, 30-day unplanned readmission, and discharge diagnoses, 
among other outcomes, performing at high accuracy, with an AUC 
of 0.93–0.94 for predicting in-hospital mortality. Importantly, much 
of the progress in medical natural language processing has stemmed 
from the widespread availability of datasets, including, for example, the 
Medical Information Mart for Intensive Care (MIMIC) dataset.

Many specialized deep learning architectures have been developed 
for natural language processing applications, including the analysis of 
electronic health record data, using both supervised (e.g., recurrent 
neural network) and unsupervised (e.g., variational autoencoder) 
approaches. Domain-specific language representation models have 
been developed for the purpose of biomedical text mining, serving as 
a substrate for many downstream natural language processing tasks.
Since ChatGPT was introduced in 2022, large language models 
including GPT-4 have rapidly been applied to diagnostic reasoning, 
health care documentation, and many other text-based tasks across 
medical specialties. The wide-ranging linguistic abilities and perfor­
mance of these models across myriad tasks have surprised many physi­
cians and machine learning practitioners alike. In a study by Kanjee 
and colleagues published in JAMA in 2023, the authors evaluated the 
general diagnostic reasoning abilities of GPT-4 on challenging medical 
cases published as part of the New England Journal of Medicine Clini­
copathological Conferences (CPCs), also known as the Case Records 
of the Massachusetts General Hospital. On these challenging cases, 
GPT-4, which was not trained specifically for medical diagnostic rea­
soning tasks, included the correct diagnosis as part of its differential 
diagnosis in 64% of the 70 cases assessed, a surprisingly high accuracy.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
OTHER APPLICATIONS
While medical computer vision and natural language processing tasks 
have been the focus of newer deep learning models due to the exten­
sive structure of imaging and text data, many other application classes 
exist. For example, cardiologist-level performance has been achieved in 
deep learning approaches for detecting arrhythmias from ambulatory 
electrocardiograms, standing in contrast to the rule-based algorithms 
used traditionally to interpret electrocardiographic signals. In genom­
ics, investigators have analyzed tumor genomes with machine learn­
ing methods to predict better survival using both deep learning and 
other machine learning approaches. Machine learning methods have 
also been used to characterize the deleteriousness of single nucleotide 
variants in DNA. Many other applications of machine learning to new 
patient data streams are emerging, for example, machine learning 
applied to wearables (e.g., smartwatches).
CONCLUSION
Modern machine learning offers a powerful set of techniques to learn 
feature representations directly from data, already performing on par 
with expert physicians on select tasks. If carefully trained and judi­
ciously applied to key areas of clinician workflow, the representational 
power of new machine learning methods makes them likely to touch 
every area of clinical practice.
■
■FURTHER READING
Gulshan V et al: Development and validation of a deep learning 
algorithm for detection of diabetic retinopathy in retinal fundus 
photographs. JAMA 316:2402, 2016.
Haug CJ, Drazen JM: Artificial intelligence and machine learning in 
clinical medicine. N Engl J Med 388:1201, 2023.
Kanjee Z et al: Accuracy of a generative artificial intelligence model in 
a complex diagnostic challenge. JAMA 330:78, 2023.

Krizhevsky A et al: 2012 NeurIPS paper: Imagenet classification with 
deep convolutional neural networks. Adv Neural Inf Process Syst 
2012.
LeCun YA et al: Deep learning. Nature 521:436, 2015.
Olah C et al: Feature visualization. Distill. 2017. https://distill.
pub/2017/feature-visualization/.
Rajkomar A et al: Machine learning in medicine. N Engl J Med 
380:1347, 2019.
Ronneberger O et al: U-Net: Convolutional networks for biomedical 
image augmentation, in Medical Image Computing and ComputerAssisted Intervention – MICCAI 2015. Springer International Publish­
ing, 2015, pp. 234–241.
Topol EJ: High-performance medicine: The convergence of human 
and artificial intelligence. Nat Med 25:44, 2019.
Jared R. Mayers, Mathew G. Vander Heiden

Metabolomics
Metabolism, loosely defined, represents the sum of all biochemical 
reactions involving small molecules with a molecular mass of ≤1000 
Da within a given tissue, cell, or fluid. These small molecules are col­
lectively referred to as metabolites and are involved in the biochemical 
processes used to create macromolecules and fulfill the energy needs of 
a cell or organism. Metabolomics, then, represents the measurement of 
metabolites, either qualitatively or quantitatively, often as a way to gain 
insight into the metabolism of a cell, tissue, or organism. No one experi­
mental approach can characterize metabolism in its entirety; metabo­
lomics instead strives to measure a portion of the metabolome, which 
consists of all metabolites in a given biological sample at a given time.
A link to a time-specific context is common to all “-omics” tech­
niques, but is particularly important in metabolomics. As metabolic 
processes are highly connected and interdependent, with individual 
metabolites often being involved in multiple pathways, levels of a 
specific metabolite can vary in response to an alteration in either the 
production or the consumption of that metabolite. Because significant 
changes in metabolite levels can occur over a very short time frame, the 
levels measured can be sensitive to perturbations either upstream or 
downstream of the measured metabolite in a pathway. This sensitivity 
can make measurement challenging, but it also makes metabolomics 
a powerful tool with which to assess either acute or chronic changes 
in cells or tissues. Indeed, the metabolome can be quite dynamic and 
reflective of the current condition of the material being assessed, as it 
ultimately represents an integration of outputs from the genome, epig­
enome, transcriptome, and proteome (Fig. 502-1).
APPROACHES AND SAMPLING 
CONSIDERATIONS
■
■UNTARGETED AND TARGETED METABOLOMICS
There are two distinct approaches to measuring metabolites in biologi­
cal materials: untargeted and targeted metabolomics. These strategies 
differ in whether a predetermined subset of metabolites is intention­
ally sought in a sample, with the choice of approach dictated by the 
question under investigation. Regardless of the method utilized, it 
is important to recognize that no single metabolomics technique is 
comprehensive. Technical considerations heavily influence metabolite 
measurement, even with untargeted metabolomics, and no one method 
is able to capture the entire metabolome. In this respect, metabolo­
mics contrasts with some other -omics techniques, like genomics or 
transcriptomics—i.e., in metabolomics, if something is not measured, 
its absence cannot necessarily be assumed.

Genome
Epigenome
Transcriptome
Proteome
Metabolome
Phenotype
FIGURE 502-1  The metabolome is downstream of the outputs measured by other “-omics” technologies. Thus, the state of the metabolome can more closely reflect clinical 
and experimental phenotypes.
Untargeted Metabolomics 
Untargeted metabolomics is the com­
prehensive analysis of as many measurable analytes in a sample as 
possible, irrespective of their identity (Fig. 502-2). Among the benefits 
of this approach is that it is agnostic in its measurement of the metabo­
lome. Thus, it allows for the discovery of novel or unexpected mol­
ecules for further study. Coverage of the metabolome in an untargeted 
approach is influenced by the techniques used for sample preparation, 
metabolite separation prior to detection, and the inherent sensitivity 
and specificity of the analytical technique(s) employed (see “Metabolo­
mics Technologies,” below).
A major drawback of untargeted metabolomics is that molecules 
of interest can be measured with less confidence or missed entirely 
because this approach carries an inherent bias toward the detection 
of high-abundance molecules. Handling and interpretation of data 
also represent a major challenge, as each sample run generates large 
amounts of data whose analysis can be both complicated and time 
consuming. Identifying each metabolite measured requires database 
searching, and further experimental investigation is often needed to 
confirm the exact identity of a signal of interest. Finally, in most cases, 
this technique yields only relative metabolite quantification, thereby 
rendering it most useful for comparisons between biological samples.
Targeted Metabolomics 
Targeted metabolomics involves the 
measurement of a predefined group of chemically characterized 
metabolites—typically dictated by a hypothesis or predetermined plat­
form—with the aim of covering a select portion of the metabolome. 
The metabolites measured represent only a subset of those that would 
be measured by an untargeted approach; thus, a targeted approach 
generates a much smaller data set in which individual metabolites 
are detected with higher confidence (Fig. 502-2). Because the iden­
tity of each signal is known in advance, standards can be added to 
provide absolute quantification of each metabolite measured in the 
sample, although the use of targeted metabolomics to compare rela­
tive metabolite levels across samples is common. In addition, sample 
preparation and chromatographic separation before measurement can 
be optimized to improve detection of specific metabolites, enabling 
assessment of less abundant molecules.
The key downside of targeted metabolomics is that information is 
gained about only those metabolites targeted by the analytical method.
FIGURE 502-2  Untargeted metabolomics strives to measure as much of the metabolome as possible within a given biological sample, whereas targeted metabolomics 
focuses on measuring a predetermined subset of the metabolome. In untargeted metabolomics, a large number of signals corresponding to metabolites is generated, and 
further investigation is often necessary to assign a particular signal to a specific metabolite. Targeted metabolomics allows investigators to definitively measure signals 
that correspond to specific metabolites of interest.

■
■SAMPLING CONSIDERATIONS
Regardless of the approach used, it is important to consider potential 
sources of error that can influence the conclusions drawn from a 
metabolomic analysis. Because of the dynamic nature of the metabo­
lome, numerous biological confounders inherent to the samples them­
selves can affect levels of the metabolites measured. For this reason, the 
inclusion of controls or reference populations to account for these con­
founders can be critical for data interpretation. Established biological 
confounders for patient-derived material include age, sex, body mass 
index, time of day collected, fasting status and/or dietary differences, 
and comorbid conditions such as diabetes or smoking. For example, 
metabolites commonly altered with respect to aging are those in anti­
oxidant and redox pathways as well as breakdown products of macro­
molecules. Sex differences influence a number of different metabolites, 
most prominently those involved in steroid and lipid metabolism. Per­
haps it is not surprising that diet can also affect the metabolome, and 
fasting has been shown to impact almost every category of metabolite 
frequently measured in biological fluids.
Differences in sample handling and processing also influence 
metabolite measurements. Work using metabolomics to analyze mate­
rial from large prospective cohort studies has shown that changes in 
metabolite levels introduced by sample handling can lead to falsely 
positive associations between specific metabolite changes and disease 
risk. Specific considerations include the large geographic area of distri­
bution from which patients are drawn—e.g., a sample, such as blood, is 
collected locally and then exposed to variable conditions before being 
sent to a central lab for further processing. Moreover, because of the 
costs associated with obtaining and storing samples, often only one 
sample is available for each individual.
CHAPTER 502
Metabolomics
Time is a key variable in metabolite measurements, and efforts 
to assess the impact of sample handling and processing have led to 
improved analysis pipelines. For example, comparison of metabolites 
measured in samples undergoing immediate versus delayed processing 
can provide insight into those metabolites most affected by pre-pro­
cessing storage under varying conditions. More specifically, because 
metabolism occurs on a very rapid time scale, some metabolite levels 
will continue to change after sample collection even if the sample is 
stored on ice. Therefore, metabolism is ideally halted or “quenched” 
Untargeted
metabolomics
Targeted
metabolomics

immediately via rapid freezing or chemical extraction, but practical 
considerations involved in the collection of material from patients 
can sometimes make rapid quenching impossible. Therefore, focus­
ing analysis on only those metabolites that are less sensitive to change 
due to delays in processing time may be important to gain biological 
insight.

Sequential metabolomic analyses of the same type of biological 
material from a patient can explore how metabolite levels vary over 
time. It is interesting that, when measured, many metabolites are found 
to be relatively stable. However, the extensive variability exhibited by 
some metabolites indicates that findings involving those metabolites 
should be interpreted with caution.
Finally, the method of sample processing can affect which metabo­
lites are extracted from the material and thus influence what is 
measured.
METABOLOMICS TECHNOLOGIES
Metabolomics relies heavily on the intersection of instrumentation, 
software, and statistical and computational approaches for measure­
ment of metabolite levels and downstream data analysis. While the 
development of new and emerging techniques to assess the metabo­
lome is ongoing, the current, clinically applicable approaches can 
be separated into two broad categories: nuclear magnetic resonance 
(NMR)–based approaches and chromatography/mass spectrometry 
(MS)–based approaches. Each of these two approaches has its own set 
of advantages and disadvantages.
■
■NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE
NMR is a technique that, at its core, exploits intrinsic magnetic proper­
ties of atomic nuclei to generate data. Nuclei with an odd total number 
of protons and neutrons (such as 1H, 13C, 15N, and 31P) have a non-zero 
spin, and this spin generates a magnetic field that can interact with 
externally applied electromagnetic fields. NMR places compounds 
into a magnetic field that induces the smaller magnetic fields to align 
with the larger one. Samples are then exposed to a perpendicular elec­
tromagnetic field; the frequency of electromagnetic radiation needed 
to flip the spin of a nucleus in the exact opposite direction represents 
the frequency at which an atom “resonates” and can be measured. The 
resonance frequency of a given atom is affected by adjacent atoms 
and is ultimately unique for a given arrangement of atoms (i.e., each 
metabolite). This distribution or “spectrum” of signals is measured and 
recorded in an NMR experiment.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
With respect to clinical applications, the primary benefits of 
NMR-based approaches are that they are nondestructive and can be 
performed on living samples, such as patients, cells, or tissues. They 
are also highly reproducible and require minimal sample preparation. 
Measurements are necessarily quantitative as the signal measured 
directly reflects concentration. These features ensure that multiple, 
comparable measurements can be made in a given sample either at 
a single point in time or across time. In addition, given that spins of 
different elements require sufficiently disparate resonance-inducing 
radiofrequencies in order to be entirely distinguishable, multiple ele­
ments can be assessed in a sample; this feature allows multidimensional 
Extraction
Derivatization
Chromatography
Mass spectrometry
data analysis
FIGURE 502-3  Metabolite measurement by chromatography/mass spectrometry–based approaches involves multiple steps, and decisions made at each step influence 
what is measured. First, metabolites are extracted from a biological sample in a manner that is destructive of the original sample. This process stops biochemical activity 
and creates metabolite samples that can be analyzed, sometimes after a chemical derivatization step that alters a subset of metabolites in a manner that facilitates their 
downstream analysis. Second, metabolites in the sample are separated via chromatography. Finally, the chromatographically separated compounds are analyzed by mass 
spectrometry. Each signal detected corresponds to a metabolite’s characteristic mass per unit charge while the amplitude of that signal reflects the abundance.

TABLE 502-1  Comparison of Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR)-
Based and Mass Spectrometry (MS)-Based Approaches to Metabolomic 
Analyses
FEATURE
NMR
MS
Reproducibility
High
Lower
Sensitivity
Low (low μM)
High (low nM)
Selectivity
Untargeted
Targeted >> untargeted
Sample preparation
Minimal
Complex
Sample measurement
Simple: single prep
Multiple preps
Metabolites per sample
50–200
>1000
Identification
Easy, using one- or twodimensional databases
Complex; need standards 
and additional analyses
Quantitation
Inherently quantitative; 
intensity proportional to 
concentration
Requires standards 
because of varying 
ionization efficiency
Sample recovery
Easy, nondestructive
No
Living samples
Yes
No
cross-referencing of signals such as hydrogen and carbon. In an 
untargeted analysis, these multidimensional data can then be used 
for definitive metabolite identification, with comparison of results to 
known databases in which spectra for many metabolites in the human 
metabolome have been systematically recorded.
Despite all these benefits, the primary challenge of NMR-based 
approaches is a lack of sensitivity. Because the time required to detect 
a signal is proportional to concentration, assessment of less abundant 
species is impossible or impractical. For example, while a typical NMRbased metabolomics analysis will return data on up to a couple of hun­
dred metabolites at concentrations of >1 μM, the MS-based approaches 
discussed below can distinguish more than 1000 metabolites at concen­
trations one to two orders of magnitude lower (Table 502-1).
■
■CHROMATOGRAPHY/MASS SPECTROMETRY
A distinguishing feature of chromatography/MS–based approaches 
is that a multistep process that destroys the material is necessary to 
generate a sample for analysis. In addition, each step of the sample 
preparation process involves decisions that influence the metabolites 
measured at the time of analysis. In general, once a sample to be ana­
lyzed is prepared, that material is subjected to a combined chemical 
and temporal separation of compounds via chromatography, with the 
output delivered to a device for performance of mass-based detection 
(technically, measurement of a mass-to-charge [m/z] ratio)—i.e., mass 
spectrometry. Finally, data collected by the mass spectrometer are 
analyzed (Fig. 502-3).
Sample Preparation 
Although occasionally a part of NMR-based 
metabolite detection protocols, MS-based approaches almost uni­
formly require an initial sample-preparation phase called extraction. 
This technique destroys the original sample by partitioning metabolites 
into distinct immiscible phases, such as polar and nonpolar. These

phases are then mechanically separated and processed further for 
analysis. Given the nature of this extraction process, it is critical to 
determine in advance the general class of metabolites to be measured. 
This information will help to determine the optimal extraction pro­
tocol for specific types of metabolites of interest and to shape further 
downstream decisions regarding the chromatography/MS technique 
that also influences metabolite detection. In addition, depending on 
the metabolites to be analyzed and the method of separation and/
or analysis used, extracted samples sometimes are processed further 
in a preparative step called derivatization: extracted metabolites are 
chemically modified by the addition or substitution of distinct, known 
chemical moieties that facilitate separation or detection of types of 
metabolites. By changing the chemical properties of metabolites, 
derivatization may improve stability, solubility, or volatility or facilitate 
separation from closely related compounds, enhancing measurement 
of specific metabolites.
Chromatography 
Chromatography is a ubiquitous approach used 
in chemistry for the separation of complex mixtures. The mixture of 
interest in a mobile phase is passed over a stationary phase such that 
compounds in the mixture interact with the stationary phase and 
transit through that stationary phase at different speeds, allowing their 
consequent separation. Two general types of chromatography are typi­
cally used in metabolomics.
LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY  Liquid chromatography–mass spec­
trometry (LC-MS) is the most commonly used approach in MS-based 
metabolomics. In this case, chromatography is characterized by a 
mobile phase that is a liquid and a stationary phase that is a solid. In 
liquid chromatography in particular, the choice of the solid and liquid 
phases can dramatically influence the types of compounds separated 
for input into the mass spectrometer. In general, LC-MS metabolomics 
is highly sensitive and versatile in allowing detection of a broad range 
of metabolites. A downside, however, is variability in exact separation 
timing, especially between different instruments; which metabolites 
are measured is impacted by the chromatography used and how well 
molecules are separated.
GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY  Gas chromatography–mass spectrometry 
(GC-MS) involves chromatography in which the mobile phase is a gas. 
In contrast to LC-MS, GC-based approaches have a narrower range 
of applications because only volatile metabolites that enter a gaseous 
phase are separated. When combined with appropriate derivatization, 
GC-MS is a robust way to detect many organic acids, including amino 
acids, and molecules of low polarity, such as lipids. GC-MS is more 
reproducible than LC-MS across platforms and requires less expen­
sive instrumentation and less specialized training, but it also typically 
measures a much more restricted range of metabolites in a sample than 
does LC-MS.
Mass Spectrometry 
Once the metabolites in a sample have been 
separated by chromatography, they are sent into the mass spectrometer 
for analysis and measurement. The first step in this stage of the process 
is to generate charged ions, as mass spectrometers measure compounds 
on the basis of their m/z ratio. Charge can be imparted through various 
techniques, although most commonly it is attained by either applying a 
high voltage to a sample or striking it with a laser.
A number of different types of mass spectrometer can be employed 
for metabolomics. Three of the most commonly available types are 
discussed below.
TANDEM MASS SPECTROMETRY  Tandem MS relies on three sets of 
quadrupole magnets arranged in series. The power of this arrangement 
lies in its specificity through two sequential mass analyses of the same 
starting compound. In the first quadrupole, the “parent” or full ion is 
measured before being bombarded by an inert gas in the second quad­
rupole; this process fragments the compound into characteristic smaller 
“daughter” ions. The third quadrupole then measures these daughter ions.
TIME-OF-FLIGHT MASS SPECTROMETRY  While there are multiple 
types of time-of-flight (TOF) mass spectrometers, they all operate on 
similar principles. Most simply, lighter metabolites travel faster and 

heavier metabolites travel more slowly. TOF machines have high mass 
accuracy and sensitivity while also acquiring data quickly.

ION TRAP MASS SPECTROMETRY  Ion trap mass spectrometers, of which 
the orbital trap is a subtype, offer perhaps the highest degree of flexibility 
when it comes to MS-based metabolomics. In general, these machines 
can select for a specific mass range of metabolites at multiple levels, first 
by filtering with a single quadrupole and then by trapping and accumu­
lating metabolites of a particular mass or range of masses. This accumu­
lation can be applied to low-abundance compounds, allowing increased 
sensitivity. It also allows repeated fragmentation of metabolites (called 
MSn) to produce characteristic “daughter” ions, increasing the specificity 
of the analysis. Given this versatility coupled with high mass accuracy, 
the development of these machines is advancing rapidly; however, access 
to the latest versions can often be limited by cost.
CURRENT CLINICAL APPLICATIONS
Tests to assess small molecules are ubiquitous and well established 
throughout medicine. These include assays to measure select metabo­
lites of known clinical relevance, such as glucose, lactate, and ammonia. 
Of note, many standard tests assess these metabolites one at a time; 
however, metabolomics can allow the assessment of many metabolites 
in a sample and provide more information on metabolic state at a given 
point in time. In some cases, metabolomics is used to detect molecules 
for which there is not a robust single analyte test or when multiple 
species measured in a sample might provide new information. Here 
we will focus specifically on some applications of metabolomics tech­
niques in current clinical practice.
CHAPTER 502
■
■MAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY
Magnetic resonance spectroscopy (MRS) is an adaptation of magnetic 
resonance imaging (MRI), a widely used technology in clinical prac­
tice. MRI, at its core, is essentially proton (1H) NMR with the result­
ing data rendered spatially to generate an image. Recall that NMR is 
nondestructive and can be applied to living samples. MRS, then, is a 
capability built into almost every MRI machine. In practice, radiolo­
gists can focus on specific volumes of interest within a patient’s imag­
ing and perform additional sequences to obtain an NMR spectrum in 
that space that can allow for the identification and quantification of 
specific metabolites in that space. With this approach, several different 
metabolites across diverse classes, including lipids, sugars, and amino 
acids, can be measured at a given time.
Metabolomics
Extensive work has correlated different biological processes with 
altered levels and/or ratios of metabolites measured via MRS. One 
well-established application is in the diagnosis of brain masses. More 
specifically, N-acetylaspartate (NAA) is an amino acid derivative that 
is abundant in neurons, whereas choline is a metabolite whose level, 
as measured by MRS, correlates with cellularity and/or proliferation. 
Thus, an increase in the ratio of choline to NAA (and even loss of NAA 
signal entirely) correlates with cancer; tumors biologically are associ­
ated with the properties of increased cellularity from proliferation and 
the concurrent exclusion of normal neurons. A different process—for 
example, a brain abscess—does not result in increased choline levels 
(which instead may actually decrease), but does exclude neurons, 
resulting in an isolated NAA decrease. Metabolites such as lactate can 
also be helpful, depending on the clinical context, in providing insight 
into the metabolism of a tumor or identifying areas of early hypoxic 
brain injury after a stroke. Finally, among the several amino acids that 
can be measured, high levels of glutamine/glutamate can be helpful in 
a patient with altered mental status as changes in these amino acids 
are associated with hyperammonemia. (Glutamate serves as the cen­
tral nervous system sink for ammonia, generating glutamine in the 
process.)
■
■NEWBORN SCREENING PROGRAMS
Newborn screening programs are used to identify diseases within the 
first few days of life such that they can be treated or managed with early 
intervention. Among the classes of disease targeted by newborn screen­
ing programs are many inborn errors of metabolism, which often lead 
to changes in the levels of specific metabolites in blood or urine. One

of the first newborn screening programs tested for phenylketonuria, 
which results from the inability to metabolize phenylalanine resulting 
in high blood and urine levels of particular metabolites. Since that time, 
the panel used by programs throughout the United States and around the 
world has expanded dramatically. The general protocol is to collect a 
blood sample from infants in the first few days of life (often by heel 
prick on a piece of paper). These samples are sent to a central lab for 
analysis, which typically includes metabolomics measurements with 
targeted LC–tandem MS. Specific inborn errors of metabolism are sug­
gested by abnormal levels of a given metabolite or set of metabolites.

■
■METABOLITE MEASUREMENTS IN CHILDREN 
AND ADULTS
Outside the window of newborn screening, direct clinical measure­
ment of metabolite levels is also used in pediatric and adult patients. 
In these cases, clinical samples such as serum, cerebrospinal fluid, or 
urine are typically subjected to targeted LC–tandem MS to measure 
metabolites such as amino acids, acylcarnitines, and fatty acids. These 
measurements can help diagnose milder cases of inborn errors of 
metabolism that may have been missed by newborn screening. They 
can also help identify secondary metabolic defects, such as those that 
are related to nutritional deficiencies or are acquired in the setting of 
additional pathology. For example, these measurements are useful in 
determining the etiology of noncirrhotic hyperammonemia exposed 
by a catabolic stressor such as sepsis in a patient with a previously 
unknown subclinical or acquired urea-cycle defect.
MS-based metabolomics is used by various athletic organizations for 
detection of metabolites associated with banned substances and by the 
pharmaceutical industry for assessment of levels of pharmaceuticals 
and their metabolites in both blood and tissues. Such analyses can 
provide key pharmacokinetic information to guide drug dosing and 
illuminate toxicology. These approaches can also be useful in clini­
cal practice. For example, chronic pain and its management remain 
a challenge, and the sequelae of opiate/opioid use and abuse are of 
concern to many providers, their patients, and their patients’ families. 
Therefore, many electronic medical records systems strive to ensure 
appropriate and consistent patient access to pain medications, while 
providers may need a means to ensure that patients are adhering to 
their prescribed regimens. One way to monitor drug use is to perform 
targeted LC–tandem MS for detection of specific drug metabolites in 
patients’ urine. This approach is more sensitive than first-generation 
immunoassays and can detect a range of metabolites associated with 
other drugs beyond the one prescribed. Given that the first-generation 
immunoassays also often rely on confirmatory MS testing, upfront 
metabolomics reduces lab turnaround time and may also reduce costs 
by limiting multiple tests on the same sample.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
EMERGING AND EXPERIMENTAL 

CLINICAL APPLICATIONS
The current clinical applications of metabolomics are largely limited to 
the indications described above. However, ongoing efforts are aimed 
at expanding the use of metabolomics for detection of biomarkers that 
can help with disease diagnosis or prognostication.
■
■METABOLITES AS BIOMARKERS OF DISEASE
There has been increasing work in prospective human cohort stud­
ies on the use of metabolomics, primarily MS-based approaches, to 
empirically identify small groups of metabolites whose altered levels 
are associated with the development or progression of disease. Efforts 
to characterize these “metabolic signatures” have been focused primar­
ily on common, multifactorial diseases such as diabetes, cardiovascular 
disease, and various cancers that are well represented in large prospec­
tive cohort studies. These studies have, for example, identified altered 
levels of amino acids that are associated with a future diagnosis of 
diabetes or pancreatic cancer. Similar efforts have proliferated across 
conditions ranging from chronic lung diseases to neurologic/develop­
mental disorders.
Additional efforts have been made to assess the metabolome in 
patient samples at the time of an acute presentation. Because altered 

metabolite levels can be associated with a specific clinical diagnosis 
and/or outcome, the idea is to identify a metabolite signature that 
facilitates diagnosis or provides prognostic information. This approach 
has been studied, for example, in the context of sepsis and septic shock, 
in which blood lactate levels are assessed in combination with the use 
of clinical tools such as the Acute Physiology and Chronic Health 
Evaluation (APACHE II) or the Sequential Organ Failure Assessment 
Score (SOFA). More recent efforts have identified a strong asso­
ciation between mortality and certain modified amino acids linked to 
mitochondrial dysfunction, highlighting a potential mechanistic link 
between sepsis pathogenesis and metabolic alterations.
One key limitation in all of these studies is that researchers are pri­
marily assessing correlations between blood plasma metabolite levels 
and complex, multisystem diseases. It remains difficult to obtain a 
biological understanding of the mechanisms driving these changes or, 
even more simply, the primary tissue source(s) of these alterations from 
human data alone, without further experimentation in model systems.
■
■REFINING DIAGNOSIS AND PREDICTION 

OF DRUG SUSCEPTIBILITY
In contrast to the above-described use of metabolomics-based 
approaches in multifactorial diseases, the application of these approaches 
in some specific contexts can yield an immediate diagnosis and suggest 
actionable therapeutic interventions. One specific example in oncology 
involves an understanding of the pathogenesis of oncogenic mutations 
in the metabolic enzyme isocitrate dehydrogenase (IDH) isoforms 1 and 
2. The normal function of these enzymes is to interconvert isocitrate 
and α-ketoglutarate; however, cancer-specific point mutations in these 
enzymes alter the enzymes’ function in a manner conferring neomor­
phic activity that converts isocitrate into 2-hydroxyglutarate (2-HG). 
2-HG is a metabolite that is typically present only at very low levels in 
cells, but when mutant IDH protein is present, 2-HG is produced and 
accumulates to high levels. Elevation of 2-HG can promote changes that 
directly contribute to malignancy; IDH mutations and 2-HG accumu­
lation are found in several human cancers, including specific clinical 
subsets of acute myeloid leukemia and glioma. Given the unique and 
specific accumulation of 2-HG in these mutant tumors, detection of this 
metabolite by LC-MS and NMR-based approaches has been studied both 
for diagnostic purposes and as a means of assessing drug response. For 
example, researchers have applied MRS-based approaches to assess the 
accumulation of 2-HG in gliomas, as this finding can noninvasively iden­
tify patients with an IDH-mutant subset of this cancer (Fig. 502-4). This 
diagnosis provides prognostic information and determines if a patient 
could benefit from drugs targeting mutant IDH that have been shown to 
benefit patients with IDH-mutant gliomas. In principle, metabolomics 
may identify other disease biomarkers to aid with diagnosis or therapy 
assessments in similar ways.
■
■PHARMACOMETABOLOMICS
The previous example positions metabolomics as a possible mecha­
nism for achieving a more personalized approach to medicine. The 
emerging field of pharmacometabolomics aims to take personaliza­
tion further by making this approach more widely applicable across 
drugs and disease states. The general idea is to link pharmacokinetics 
(PK) and pharmacodynamics (PD) data with baseline metabolomic 
profiling, with the goal of generating a predictive model for individual 
PK and PD responses based on a naïve patient’s metabolomic profile. 
Ideally, this approach would allow clinicians to take a baseline set of 
measurements and then—a priori—choose a specific dose of a specific 
drug to produce the desired effect in that specific patient. If successful, 
this method could limit both prolonged titration of medications and 
medication switching, dramatically shortening and simplifying the 
current approach to medical therapy.
EMERGING TECHNIQUES
While efforts to improve the existing capabilities discussed above are 
ongoing, innovations in instrumentation and computation are allowing 
collection and analysis of metabolite information that previously was 
not possible.

A
B
C
FIGURE 502-4  In vivo 1H spectra and analysis demonstrating 2-hydroxyglutarate (2-HG) detection in isocitrate dehydrogenase (IDH)-mutant brain tumors. A–C. In vivo 
spectra from normal brain (A) and tumors (B–C) are shown. Components of 2-HG, γ-aminobutyric acid (GABA), glutamate, and glutamine are displayed. Measurement 
location is indicated by yellow box (voxel). 2-HG is seen only in mutant IDH brain tumors, but not normal brain or wild-type tumors. Shown in brackets is the estimated 
metabolite concentration (mM) ± standard deviation (s.d.). Cho, choline; Cr, creatine; Glu, glutamate; Gln, glutamine; Gly, glycine; Lac, lactate; Lip, lipids. Scale bars, 1 cm. 
(Reproduced with permission from C Choi et al: 2012.)
■
■MASS SPECTROMETRY IMAGING
Most clinical metabolomics relies on analysis of bulk material, but 
in an individual patient, there are areas of normal and diseased tis­
sue, and understanding the differences in metabolism in these areas 
requires both spatially sensitive resolution (imaging) and interrogation 
(metabolomics). While MRS can perform some of these functions, 
it is limited to macroscopic imaging (MRI) and relatively insensitive 
metabolomics approaches (NMR). In contrast, MS-based approaches, 
while more sensitive, by their nature rely on specimen destruction and 
homogenization. The premise of mass spectrometry imaging (MSI) 
is to overcome these limitations of MRS and mass spectrometry. MSI 
combines histologic evaluation of tissue with MS-based approaches to 
assess spatial differences in metabolites. MSI as a technique has been 
most highly refined in the neurosciences and can provide subcellular 
resolution. In general, thin slices of tissue are mounted on a slide, and 
metabolomics is performed at defined points across the slide, yielding 
spatial information on where in the tissue section metabolites are mea­
sured. One specific approach utilizes matrix-assisted laser desorption/
ionization (MALDI) coupled to MS. In MALDI, tissues are coated with 
a special matrix and the MALDI laser scans point-by-point across a tis­
sue slice, ionizing the metabolites at each location for analysis by a mass 
spectrometer. These data can then be referenced back to an image of the 
original tissue slice (Fig. 502-5). This approach is being tested for defin­
ing tumor margins in real time during resection and thereby providing 
insight into boundaries between normal and abnormal tissues.
■
■INTEGRATION WITH ADDITIONAL “-OMICS” 
TECHNIQUES
There is increasing interest in integrating metabolomics data with data 
derived from other “-omics” techniques evaluating, for example, the 
Ionization
FIGURE 502-5  Mass spectrometry imaging provides spatial information around metabolites in tissues. Tissue is mounted onto a slide, and a laser or another method is 
used to ionize metabolites in a discreet section of the tissue for detection by mass spectrometry. The process is repeated as the laser scans across the tissue, generating 
an “image” based on the levels of a metabolite detected at each point in the tissue section.

transcriptome or proteome (Fig. 502-1), an approach referred to as 
“multi-omics analysis.” Integrated multi-omics may provide a more 
complete understanding of the biological mechanisms underpinning 
observed phenotypes and is being used to study heterogeneity across 
cell populations determined via spatial and single-cell approaches. 
Additionally, when applied to complex communities like the gut 
microbiome, these approaches can aid in the discovery of previously 
uncharacterized metabolic pathways that impact human health.
CHAPTER 502
■
■IMPROVING UNTARGETED METABOLOMICS
Identifying unknown signals in an untargeted metabolomics analysis 
remains one of the central challenges in the field. As discussed above, 
NMR can definitively identify unknown signals but is inferior to MSbased approaches in its sensitivity and therefore in the number of signals 
it can detect in a given sample. To leverage the sensitivity of MS-based 
detection and overcome the challenge of metabolite identification, 
researchers are applying computational techniques, using networkstyle analyses and machine learning based approaches to streamline the 
process. The general approach is to combine information from known 
biological perturbations (e.g., changes in experimental conditions or 
disease states), empirical mass and structural information from MS 
analysis, and correlations with known metabolites/pathways to place 
unknown metabolites within existing metabolic networks.
Metabolomics
The growing interest in machine learning (a subset of artificial intel­
ligence), which focuses on the training of algorithms to analyze large 
amounts of data, has led to it being applied to facilitate analysis and 
interpretation of metabolomics data. These algorithms can be used to 
identify unknowns in untargeted metabolomics datasets and find pat­
terns of linked metabolites, or between metabolites and other data, that 
might otherwise be missed by traditional approaches.

# 12 - 504 Protein Folding Disorders

## 504 Protein Folding Disorders

Richard I. Morimoto, G. Scott Budinger

Protein Folding Disorders
Many hundreds of human diseases, collectively known as protein con­
formational diseases or protein folding disorders, result from protein 
misfolding due to intrinsic and extrinsic errors amplified by aging and 
exposures to environmental and physiologic stress conditions. Such 
events challenge the functional integrity of the proteome and can lead 
to dysfunction, enhanced aggregation of proteins, mislocalization, and 
premature or inhibition of protein clearance, thus affecting cellular 
robustness, health, and longevity. Mismanagement of the proteome 
is therefore the basis of a broad class of diseases that includes orphan 
lysosomal storage diseases, type 2 diabetes mellitus, cystic fibrosis, 
some fibrotic diseases, metabolic diseases, muscle-wasting diseases, 
cancer, and neurodegenerative diseases exemplified by Alzheimer’s 
disease, frontal temporal dementia, Parkinson’s disease, amyotrophic 
lateral sclerosis (ALS), and Huntington’s disease (Fig. 504-1). For each 
of these diseases and many others described in this textbook, aging is 
the major contributing risk factor.
The challenge at the biochemical and molecular level is for the 
cell to achieve and maintain a stable and functional proteome during 
development that persists through young adulthood and is maintained 
throughout aging. For humans, this is essential for the operational 
health of each of the tens of trillions of cells that comprise our ~80 
organs for health span and lifespan. To achieve this, our cells have 
evolved a remarkably efficient proteostasis network (PN) composed of 
~3000 molecular chaperones and other highly conserved components 
essential for protein synthesis, folding, translocation, and degradation 
(Fig. 504-2) that balances input with output and ensures that every 
protein is functional. The PN is, therefore, essential for the robust­
ness of all tissues and for the diverse protein-protein interactions in 
cell signaling, biosynthetic processes, and the structural demands and 
mechanical requirements for tissue shape and function. An equal, if 
not more important, role for the PN is to detect, prevent, and remove 
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
Eye
Neuronal tissue
Cataracts
Corneal lactoferrin
amyloidosis
Hereditary lattice
corneal dystrophy
Lung
Pulmonary alveolar
proteinosis
Cystic fibrosis
Muscle
Inclusion body
myositis/myopathy
Aortic medial
amyloidosis
Cardiac amyloidosis
(e.g., transthyretin
cardiomyopathy)
FIGURE 504-1  Diseases of protein folding. A representative list of tissues affected and known folding diseases.

misfolded and aggregated proteins that accumulate in stress, aging, and 
disease and interfere with cellular health. Understanding how proteo­
stasis is achieved and maintained is of fundamental biological interest 
and essential to prevent age-associated protein folding disorders. Con­
sequently, there is tremendous interest in the detection and treatment 
of these diseases, in particular as the human population continues to 
live longer.
All organisms express an evolutionarily conserved set of molecular 
machines for the synthesis, folding, transport, and removal of unneces­
sary and damaged proteins. The PN is adapted for the highly specific 
physiologic requirements of tissues and the expression of abundant 
and rare proteins with wide-ranging solubilities, folding requirements, 
stability, and structural demands. Added to this complexity of natural 
clients for the PN is the additional load generated by genetic mutations 
carried in natural populations together with diverse environmental 
stressors that challenge PN capacity. Despite the central role of proteins 
as the workhorse of the cell, they are also highly susceptible to molecu­
lar damage, whether due to intrinsic metastability or to genetically 
inherited mutation or error-prone synthesis. Hence, dysfunction in the 
PN may clinically manifest as a gradual decline in homeostatic func­
tion in aging as occurs with genetic mutations or a loss of resilience 
in the face of environmental stressors. Thus, clinicians see the con­
sequences of proteostasis failure and cellular dysfunction in both the 
myriad disorders that present to physicians as age-associated clinical 
problems and the increased morbidity and mortality associated with 
trauma, infection, and other acute illness requiring hospitalization in 
older individuals.
PROTEIN QUALITY CONTROL 
MECHANISMS
The PN monitors and controls the flux of protein synthesis to promote 
functional folding and to minimize the accumulation of off-pathway 
aggregation-prone intermediates by their selective disaggregation or 
degradation. However, unlike an automobile assembly plant for which 
each part is designed and engineered for a specific use and precise 
assembly, the PN has built-in functional redundancy with properties 
to tolerate tremendous chemical noise and sequence diversity gener­
ated by coding region polymorphisms 
and biosynthetic errors among its client 
components. The PN has the ability 
to recognize and remove kinetically 
unstable conformational states of pro­
teins that accumulate in aging and that 
would otherwise compromise assembly 
and function. Proteins are highly sensi­
tive to fluctuations in their intracellular 
environment caused by shifts in ener­
getics, pH, and oxidizing and reducing 
conditions in addition to the myriad 
small molecules and metabolites that 
affect folding and function. Added to 
changes are the effects of external stress 
conditions caused by elevated tempera­
tures, infection, oxidizing and reducing 
environments, or osmolytes that can 
have profound consequences on pro­
tein folding thermodynamics, kinetics, 
and function. These intracellular and 
extracellular stress conditions, if not 
properly responded to, are predicted to 
further amplify protein instability from 
sequence polymorphisms and biosyn­
thetic errors that contribute to the stress 
of protein misfolding. The PN is orga­
nized at the cellular level into a series of 
highly coordinated molecular machines 
that direct the expression, biogenesis, 
and functional health of essentially all 
Alzheimer’s disease
Amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
Familial British dementia
Familial Danish dementia
Parkinson’s diease
Huntington’s disease
Thyroid
Medullary thyroid carcinoma
Immune system
Systemic AL amyloidosis
Multiple myeloma
Pancreas/islet a cells
Type 2 diabetes mellitus
Liver
α1 Antitrypsin deficiency
Systemic diseases
Lysozyme storage diseases
p53-dependent cancers

Molecular
chaperones
Unfolded nascent
polypeptide
Native state
Intermediate
folded states
Chaperones
Autophagy
Proteasome
Normal turnover
Misfolded states
Degradation
Toxic folds
Improper trafficking
Cystic Fibrosis
Amyloidoses
Emphysema
Abeta, tau, Huntington,
SOD1, α-synuclein
α1 Antitrypsin
Cystic fibrosis
transmembrane
conductance regulator
FIGURE 504-2  The proteostasis network (PN) and folding diseases. Protein 
biogenesis through the action of molecular chaperones ensures the transition of 
the nascent polypeptide to on-pathway intermediates and the folded functional 
native state. Such proteins then have a normal turnover mostly through the 
ubiquitin-proteasome system. Off-pathway species are prevented by the actions of 
chaperones and the recognition of nonnative misfolded states by the autophagiclysosomal pathway and the ubiquitin-proteasome system. When misfolded species 
escape quality control or overwhelm the PN, they can then become improperly 
trafficked as occurs for α1 antitrypsin associated with emphysema; for toxic folds 
as occurs for abeta, tau, Huntington, and SOD1 in amyloidogenic neurodegenerative 
diseases; and prematurely degraded as occurs for CFTR associated with cystic 
fibrosis.
proteins (Fig. 504-2). More than to regulate and orchestrate these 
highly synchronized events, the PN is essential for protein quality 
control and for the prevention of the appearance of off-pathway con­
formational states and condensates, with accumulation of aggregates 
and amyloid species. Proteome health involves the constant exchange 
between the intrinsic physicochemical properties of polypeptides and 
the biological milieu of the cellular environment in which protein 
sequences and function evolved.
Beginning with the synthesis of the nascent polypeptide on the 
ribosome, ribosome quality control (RQC) together with cytoplasmic 
chaperones of the HSP70, HSP90, DNAJ/HSP40, chaperonin/HSP60, 
and small HSPs (sHSPs) family ensure co- and posttranslational fold­
ing for the cell. Approximately 60% of the proteome resides in the 
cytoplasm and nucleus, for which the RQC, HSP70, HSP90, and HSP60 
chaperones together with co-chaperones regulate the folded state of cli­
ent proteins through cycles of ATP binding and hydrolysis. Chaperones 
of the HSP70 and J-domain family are particularly well studied for 
their ability to interact transiently with short dispersed hydrophobic 
regions of nascent polypeptides using the energy from nucleotide 
hydrolysis to regulate the release of partially folded intermediates that 
either reenter the chaperone cycle or are released in a folded native 
state. For other chaperone clients, such as transcription factors, kinases, 
phosphatases, and signaling molecules, their folding to the functional 
state is highly regulated and dependent upon interactions with the 
HSP90 chaperone and other regulatory co-chaperones to form stable 
heteromeric complexes that hold the client in a partially folded state 
primed for subsequent regulated release.
Consistent with the recognition that the formation of off-pathway 
aggregates is a kinetic component of proteostasis are the concerted 
activities of chaperone machines with disaggregase activity that unravel 
protein aggregates for refolding. These disaggregases include the AAA+ 
protein, ClpB in bacteria, Hsp104 in yeast and plants, and the function­
ally analogous metazoan disaggregase composed of HSP70, HSP110, 
and specific J-domain proteins.
The subcellular organelles mitochondria and endoplasmic reticu­
lum (ER) account for ~20% of the proteome. Chaperone interactions 
are essential for mitochondrial-targeted proteins to maintain the 
extended polypeptide chain in a recognition-competent state for the 

organellar receptors for translocation across membranes. Upon import, 
each translocated polypeptide is met by organellar-specific chaperones 
of the HSP70 and J-domain family for folding and assembly. While the 
mitochondrial genome encodes 13 proteins required for electron trans­
port, the great majority of mitochondrial proteins are encoded by the 
nuclear genome, synthesized in the cytosol, and imported across the 
outer and inner mitochondrial membrane. Hence, maintenance of 
the mitochondrial proteome relies on the coordinated efforts of both 
the cytosolic and mitochondrial PN. For translocation into the lumen 
of the ER, the extended polypeptide interacts with a set of glycosyl­
transferases, calnexins, calreticulins, disulphide isomerases, and lumen 
localized chaperones. Proteins that misfold in the ER are recognized 
and retro-translocated to the cytoplasm where they are directed to the 
ubiquitin-proteasome system (UPS) for unfolding, ubiquitination, and 
degradation.

The PN is balanced by the essential catabolic processes of the UPS 
and the autophagy-lysosomal pathway (ALP), which recognizes pro­
teins for degradation and recycling. The UPS is generally considered 
the primary pathway by which most proteins are recognized and 
tagged for degradation, and the ALP is highly responsive to nutrient 
deprivation and damage to recognize large aggregates and inclusions 
and engulf organelles and other subcellular compartments. In addition 
to their role in the regulated turnover of cellular proteins, these degra­
dation systems are essential for protein quality control and for limiting 
the accumulation of misfolded and aggregated proteins during stress 
conditions, aging, and disease. Protein turnover by the UPS involves an 
enzymatic cascade of E1, E2, and E3 enzymes that utilize ubiquitin and 
the recognition selectivity of E3s to tag clients, followed by degrada­
tion of the polyubiquitinated substrates by the 26S proteasome in the 
cytoplasm. Client specificity involves the large family of ~750 ubiquitin 
E3 ligases. In addition to their role of marking proteins for degradation, 
the ubiquitination machinery has numerous additional functions in 
cellular processes. For example, the ubiquitin ligase listerin is associ­
ated with the ribosome to ubiquitinate nascent chains that stall during 
protein synthesis to prevent the accumulation of aberrant polypep­
tides that would subsequently aggregate. Ubiquitination of nonnative 
aggregated clients by the ubiquitin ligase activity of the cochaperone 
carboxyl terminus Hsc70 interacting protein (CHIP) is central to the 
triage decision of the HSP70/HSP90 complex between client fold­
ing and proteasome-mediated degradation. ER-targeted clients that 
are misfolded are retro-translocated to the cytoplasm where they are 
polyubiquitinated and degraded by cytosolic proteasomes in a process 
termed ER-associated degradation (ERAD). Ubiquitination also pro­
vides crosstalk between the proteasome and autophagy pathways by 
targeting clients for lysosomal degradation and for endosomal sorting. 
Chaperones co-label a protein as damaged, recruiting other proteins 
that place ubiquitin chains on the damaged protein for degradation by 
the proteasome. Alternatively, chaperones can label proteins or protein 
aggregates to target them to the lysosome, and in this process, damaged 
proteins are degraded by the lysosome, an intracellular organelle with 
an acidic environment enriched in proteases through autophagy.
CHAPTER 504
Protein Folding Disorders
While there is a comprehensive understanding of the process of in 
vivo chaperone-dependent protein folding, the details of how these 
decisions are made for each client, whether and for how long to be 
maintained in a nonnative folding state through chaperone interactions 
in a nucleotide-independent state, or how to assemble into a stable 
chaperone complex for subsequent assembly into a functional state or 
to interact with chaperones to directly fold to a native state remain to 
be fully addressed.
CELL STRESS RESPONSES: SENSORS AND 
REGULATORS OF PROTEIN DAMAGE
Cell stress responses are ancient genetic networks that detect, adapt, and 
protect all cells against toxic environmental stressors and physiologi­
cally relevant changes in their cellular environment, including changes 
induced during development and tissue repair after injury (Fig. 504-3). 
At the core of these cell stress responses are molecular switches: (1) the 
heat shock response (HSR) that protects proteins in the cytoplasm and 
nucleus regulated by HSF-1; (2) the unfolded protein response (UPR)

Stress responses
Programmed
Repression of
the Heat Shock
Response, UPR,
and Oxidative
Stress Response
Molecular chaperones
Protein quality control
Proteostasis
Disease
Aging
Reproduction
Development
High
Risk
Low
Risk
FIGURE 504-3  Aging and protein folding diseases. Aging is the major risk factor 
for degenerative diseases. Cell stress responses (heat shock response and the 
unfolded protein responses [UPR] in the endoplasmic reticulum and mitochondria) 
decline at reproductive maturity in studies from Caenorhabditis elegans and prevent 
adaptive and protective increased expression of molecular chaperones to prevent 
protein misfolding.
of the ER (UPRER) controlled by XBP1, ATF6, and ATF4; (3) the UPR 
of the mitochondria (UPRmt) controlled by ATFS1; (4) the DAF-16/
FOX-O stress response pathway associated with insulin signaling; (5) 
the integrated stress response (ISR) controlled by PERK, PKR, HRI, 
GCN2, and ATF4; and (6) the antioxidant stress response regulated 
by NRF-2. Collectively, these cell stress responses and their respective 
transcription factors (TFs) are essential for all cells and tissues regu­
lated both autonomously and cell nonautonomously across tissues in 
metazoans to detect proteotoxic stress, to adapt and protect the cell 
against the toxic consequences of protein damage, and to regulate 
changes in the proteome necessary for differentiation. While each 
of these cell stress pathways can be activated independently, they are 
also induced in different combinations according to the chemical 
and physiologic properties of the stress signal(s) and provide crossprotective mechanisms.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
The HSR is an evolutionarily conserved cellular defense mech­
anism that protects cells against proteotoxicity associated with 
misfolding, aggregation, and proteome mismanagement. HSF-1 
inducibly regulates the transcription of genes encoding molecular 
chaperones and components of the PN. In unstressed cells, HSF-1 
exists in an inert monomeric state in the cytoplasm or nucleus where 
it is negatively regulated by the molecular chaperones, HSP70 and 
HJD-1. Upon exposure to heat shock, HSF-1 undergoes a series of 
molecular transformations and rapidly trimerizes to acquire DNAbinding activity, undergoes extensive posttranslational modifications 
by phosphorylation and sumoylation, binds to heat shock elements in 
promoters of heat shock responsive genes, and associated with these 
events, forms nuclear stress bodies. Upon dissipation of the stress 
signal, the HSR attenuates by the active repression of HSF-1 DNA 
binding by acetylation and loss of HSF-1 transcriptional activity. 
This is accomplished by binding of HSF-1 with HSP70, HDJ-1, and 
HSBP1, leading to its dissociation from the trimer to the monomeric 
state. In addition to HSF-1 being essential for the HSR and cell and 
organismal stress resilience, HSF-1 is essential during early develop­
ment in metazoans, functions as a maternal factor for gametogenesis, 
regulates oocyte maturation by activating genes that function in the 
meiotic cell cycle, is constitutively activated in cancer, and is neces­
sary to maintain NAD+ and ATP levels.
In the ER, the UPRER involves three stress response arms regulated 
by the transcription factors XBP1, ATF6, and ATF4 that bind to specific 
cis- elements for these ER-stress-responsive pathways. XBP1 is activated 
by IRE1, which is a transmembrane protein with kinase and endoribonu­
clease (RNase) activity that senses misfolding in the ER directly, leading 
to its autophosphorylation, oligomerization, and acquisition of RNase 
activity. This allows active IRE1 to cleave XBP1 mRNA, generating a 
spliced transcript (XBP1s) that encodes XBP1 to induce the transcription 

of UPR target genes. ER stress also promotes the relocalization of ATF6 
from the ER membrane to the Golgi apparatus, where it is cleaved by 
the proteases SP1 and SP2, generating a cytosolic fragment of ATF6 that 
translocates to the nucleus to direct transcription of a complementary set 
of UPR genes. Together, XBP1 and ATF6 induce the expression of genes 
involved in protein folding, ER-associated protein degradation, and lipid 
metabolism. A third ER transmembrane protein, PERK, also induced by 
ER stress, phosphorylates the translation initiation factor eIF2α, linking 
activation of the UPRER with the ISR.
In the mitochondria, the UPRmt response involves ATFS1, which 
contains a mitochondrial targeting sequence and a nuclear localiza­
tion signal. Under normal cellular conditions, ATFS1 is imported into 
mitochondria and degraded, but upon mitochondria stress, ATFS1 is 
directed only to the nucleus to regulate transcription of genes encod­
ing mitochondrial chaperones, mitochondrial import machinery, and 
glycolysis. In mammals, the UPRmt is regulated by ATF5, which is the 
orthologue of ATFS1 in Caenorhabditis elegans. Inhibitors of mito­
chondrial electron transport in mammals also activate the ISR through 
the release of a protease OMA1 that cleaves a cytosolic protein DELE1 
to activate HRI.
The ISR is induced by one or more of four kinases: PKR, PERK, 
HRI, or GCN2. All four of these kinases phosphorylate eIF2a, a key 
protein in the ternary complex that regulates protein synthesis. The 
resulting global inhibition of protein synthesis paradoxically pro­
motes translation of mRNA molecules with specific sequences in their 
upstream open reading frames. These include the transcription factor 
ATF4, which induces the expression of a gene program that maintains 
metabolism to preserve stress resilience. Activation of ATF4 also 
induces its expression and the expression of Ddit3 (CHOP), lowering 
the threshold for apoptosis, and Gadd45a, a phosphatase that dephos­
phorylates eIF2a to restore translation. The ISR is linked to ER stress 
through PERK and to mitochondrial stress through HRI. GCN2 is 
activated by amino acid deprivation, and PKR is activated during viral 
infection. Of particular note has been the development of ISRIB, a 
small molecule that partially inhibits the activity of the ISR with salu­
tary effects across diverse animal models of age-related degenerative 
diseases. These findings suggest that cell stress pathways that are pro­
teome protective in youth might become pathologic in aging, making 
them attractive targets for therapeutic intervention. Indeed, activation 
of the ISR has been shown to impair stem cell differentiation, perhaps 
linking mitochondrial dysfunction with aging, proteostasis, and stem 
cell dysfunction.
In metazoans, the integration of stress survival strategies includes 
the antioxidant factor SKN-1/NRF2, the insulin-signaling factor DAF16/FOXO, and the tissue identity factor PHA-4/FOXA. Oxidative 
and xenobiotic stresses activate OxR, which controls the expression 
of redox-regulatory proteins and components of protein degrada­
tive pathways mediated in mammals by NRF1/NFE2L1 and NRF2/
NFE2L2, which corresponds to SKN-1 in C. elegans. NRF1 is an ERresident factor that undergoes regulated proteolytic cleavage upon 
activation to control expression of genes encoding subunits of the pro­
teasome and the UPS. NRF2 in the cytoplasm is negatively regulated by 
the redox-sensitive ubiquitin ligase KEAP-1; consequently, inactivation 
of KEAP-1 by oxidative and electrophilic stress leads to stabilization 
and nuclear translocation of NRF2, which in turn induces the expres­
sion of antioxidant proteins and detoxification enzymes.
ORGANISMAL PROTEOSTASIS IN 

AGING AND DISEASE
Much of our understanding of protein quality control mechanisms has 
come from in vitro studies with purified molecular chaperones or com­
ponents of the UPS, complemented with cell extracts and cell-based 
assays using yeast or mammalian tissue culture cells. A common theme 
that emerges from these studies is that of hormesis, in which chronic 
low-level activation of the HSR, UPRER, and UPRmt is protective against 
subsequent exposures to extreme and lethal cell stress conditions.
The importance of these pathways is further highlighted by studies 
in metazoans that indicate that cell stress responses are regulated at 
the organismal level by neuronal signaling. At the organismal level in

C. elegans, the HSR, UPRER, and UPRmt are regulated by cell-nonauton­
omous control by specific sensory neurons. When neuronal signaling is 
impaired, the HSR reverts to cell-autonomous control. Likewise, neu­
ronal signaling regulates the UPRmt with disruption of mitochondrial 
function in C. elegans neurons activating the UPRmt in nonneuronal tis­
sues, supporting a role for a mitokine signal. Perturbation of the mito­
chondrial electron transfer chain (ETC) was shown to increase lifespan 
in both invertebrates and rodents through the activation of the UPRmt. 
The response to mitochondrial dysfunction in C. elegans depends on 
the severity of mitochondrial impairment, with a mild reduction of 
ETC or reduction of mitochondrial proteostasis having hormetic 
effects on organismal stress resilience, proteostasis, and longevity 
by resetting the cytoplasmic HSR through HSF-1, independent of 
ATFS-1 and the UPRmt. Mild perturbation of the ETC in Drosophila 
muscle also has systemic benefits on organismal health and lifespan 
involving the insulin signaling pathway. Communication between 
neurons also regulates the UPRER in peripheral tissues of C. elegans. 
During infection of C. elegans by pathogens, induction of the UPRER 
in nonneuronal tissues is mediated by sensory neurons, suggesting 
an organismal stress response. Cell-nonautonomous regulation of 
the UPRER has also been observed in mice, where overexpression of 
active XBP1 in pro-opiomelanocortin neurons activates the UPRER 
in the liver.
Several other forms of intertissue communication regulate proteos­
tasis with beneficial effects on organismal health in model organisms. 
For example, muscle cell proteostasis in C. elegans is regulated by cho­
linergic signaling across the synaptic junction through modulation of 
HSF-1 activity. Transcellular chaperone signaling between somatic tis­
sues, and between somatic tissues and neurons, of C. elegans communi­
cate proteotoxic stress signals via the tissue code factor PHA-4/FOXA 
to control systemic expression of HSP90. In Drosophila, overexpression 
of small HSPs only in the flight motor muscle cells protects neurons 
and glial cells from elevated temperature-induced death. Enhanced 
expression of DAF-16/FOXO in the intestine enhances proteostasis 
in distant muscle cells of C. elegans, and likewise, overexpression of 
dFOXO/4E-BP in Drosophila muscle influences proteostasis in retina, 
brain, and adipose tissues to delay the age-dependent accumulation of 
protein aggregates.
Cell stress responses and proteostasis decline in aging with insights 
on the relationships between processes coming primarily from studies 
using C. elegans with support from other invertebrate and vertebrate 
model systems and human cells. Endogenous metastable proteins 
that harbor temperature-sensitive properties misfold in C. elegans at 
the permissive temperature in early aging associated with a decline in 
the HSR. This functional decline of proteostasis in C. elegans aging is 
regulated by cell-nonautonomous control, from the germline stem cells 
to the somatic tissues for the programmed repression of the organismal 
HSR, resulting in the loss of stress resilience and proteostasis caus­
ing age-associated protein aggregation. This HSR repressive switch 
is regulated by signaling from the germline stem cells to the somatic 
tissues, resulting in the timed placement of repressive H3K27me3 
chromatin marks at the promoters of heat shock genes, causing chro­
matin inaccessibility for HSF-1. This age-dependent decline in the 
HSR can be reversed either by blocking the signal from germline stem 
cell signal(s) or preventing the epigenetic repressive marks. The rela­
tionship between reproduction and inducibility of the HSR observed 
in animals at reproductive maturity suggests that the age-associated 
events of cellular failure and loss of tissue robustness during aging are 
not random processes but rather highly regulated, perhaps to ensure 
that somatic tissues are programmed to decline after reproduction, 
consistent with the germline soma theory of aging.
Proteostasis represents one of the primary hallmarks of the biology of 
aging, which together with genomic instability, telomere attrition, epi­
genetic alterations, deregulated nutrient sensing, mitochondrial dysfunc­
tion, cellular senescence, stem cell exhaustion, and altered intercellular 
communication provides a mechanistic basis for the aging process. The 
programmed decline of proteostasis in early adulthood would support 
the hypothesis that failure in protein quality control would have negative 
consequences on the other pillars of geroscience. Whether proteostasis 

collapse is the first to fail or among the earliest events that fail in aging, it 
is consistent with very large number of human degenerative diseases in 
aging associated with protein misfolding.

PROPERTIES OF PROTEIN 

FOLDING DISEASES
The complexity that arises with protein folding diseases is that all 
tissues are at risk and all proteins are at risk for misfolding and lossof-function or gain-of-function proteotoxicity. Added to this is the 
effect of aging and that each protein folding disease exhibits a highly 
variable age of onset for pathology. There is additional complexity in 
classification regarding whether to organize folding diseases by tissues 
(i.e., muscle proteinopathies or neurodegenerative diseases), according 
to the specific protein that misfolds such as α1-antitrypsin deficiency, 
or by the biophysical nature of the misfolded or aggregated species in 
amyloidoses.
Disorders in which a specific mutation leads to protein misfolding 
or the formation of a specific insoluble protein aggregate likely repre­
sent only the tip of the iceberg of protein folding disorders. Mutations 
in aggregation-prone proteins coupled with changes in the cellular 
environment and effects on the capacity of the PN will promote mis­
folding and aggregation in affected tissues. Chronic stress may cause 
the aberrant cell stress responses and protein quality control pathways, 
causing further collateral damage and aggregation of other at-risk 
proteins. Such a mechanism may only manifest clinically after a seem­
ingly random systemic stress like pneumonia, large bone fracture, or 
ischemic vascular event, possibly explaining the rapid (1–2 years) 
accumulation of age-related morbidities in the year following a 
major biologic stress, marked by a need for hospitalization. As such, 
the age-related decline in the function of any of the components of 
the PN could underlie the compounding multiple morbidity that 
limits health span and lifespan in many elderly individuals. Within 
this framework, it is useful to discuss some of the better understood 
mechanisms of proteostasis dysfunction that have been causally 
linked to diseases in humans.
CHAPTER 504
Protein Folding Disorders
■
■DISORDERS THAT ENHANCE CLIENT 
MISFOLDING AND CAUSE PREMATURE 
DEGRADATION (CYSTIC FIBROSIS)
Cystic fibrosis (CF) is a recessive disorder caused by mutations in both 
alleles of the cystic fibrosis transmembrane conductance regulator 
(CFTR) gene that encodes a multidomain membrane-spanning chlo­
ride ion channel protein. Thousands of mutations in CFTR have been 
identified that affect CFTR biosynthesis, folding, trafficking, and func­
tion, leading to chronic obstructive lung disease, intestinal obstruction, 
liver dysfunction, exocrine and endocrine pancreatic dysfunction, and 
male infertility. CF is a folding disease due to its recognition by the 
PN as misfolded protein. The most prominent mutation is deletion of 
phenylalanine 508 (F508del), present in ~90% of CF patients. Mutant 
ΔF508 retains partial channel function, but because it is recognized as 
misfolded in the ER and the cytoplasm, it is marked with ubiquitin for 
degradation by the UPS. Combinations of small molecules that protect 
the misfolded CFTR protein from degradation and enhance its func­
tion have led to substantial improved outcomes in many patients with 
CF (Chap. 302).
■
■DISORDERS THAT INDUCE TOXIC AGGREGATES 
AND LOSS OF FUNCTION IN MULTIPLE TISSUES 
(`1-ANTITRYPSIN DEFICIENCY)
α1-Antitrypsin deficiency (AATD) is a co-dominant inherited disease 
with an increased risk of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, liver 
disease, and inflammation of the blood vessels. Pulmonary problems 
are more frequent in adults, whereas liver and skin problems may occur 
in adults and children. α1-Antitrypsin is encoded by the SERPINA1 
gene and secreted into the circulation by the liver and is responsible 
for inactivating endogenous proteases, particularly those secreted by 
neutrophils and other inflammatory cells in the lung. Patients with 
AATD harbor mutations in SERPINA1 that cause misfolding in the ER. 
The two major phenotypes resulting from this abnormality highlight

the diverse consequences of misfolding on different cells and organs. 
In the liver, misfolding of the mutant protein results in the formation 
of toxic aggregates and hepatocyte death, manifest as liver injury and 
eventually cirrhosis—a gain-of-function toxicity. In the lung, the fail­
ure to secrete sufficient α1 antitrypsin may lead to unchecked proteo­
lytic damage to the delicate architecture of the alveolus, a process that 
is markedly worsened when neutrophils are recruited to the lung in 
response to cigarette smoking. This loss-of-function phenotype mani­
fests pathologically as emphysema and clinically as chronic obstructive 
pulmonary disease.

■
■INTERACTIONS WITH PN COMPONENTS 

THAT CHANGE CONFORMATION, STABILITY, 

OR FUNCTION (CANCER)
Mutations in the tumor suppressor p53 are among the most com­
mon mutations observed in patients with cancer. Deletion of p53 
combined with overexpression of an oncogene is sufficient to drive 
metastatic cancer formation in mice, causally linking p53 mutations 
with cancer. Normally, p53 functions as a transcription factor that 
suppresses the transcription of genes involved in apoptosis resistance. 
While myriad mutations in p53 have been described, some result in 
an alternate conformation that interacts with different HSP70 chap­
erones within the PN. Binding of the mutant p53 protein to these 
chaperones affects the DNA binding property necessary for its tumor 
suppressor function and facilitates binding to other domains, result­
ing in changes in gene expression that protect malignant cells from 
apoptosis.
■
■STRONGLY ENHANCED AGGREGATION 
PROPENSITY AND AMYLOID FORMATION 
(ALZHEIMER’S DISEASE, PARKINSON’S 
DISEASE, AMYOTROPHIC LATERAL SCLEROSIS, 
HUNTINGTON’S DISEASE, TYPE 2 DIABETES 
MELLITUS)
In some individuals, native or mutant proteins include sequence 
motifs that promote a highly ordered aggregation state when the 
cellular environment is altered. The most common of these motifs 
is the beta sheet, which, when exposed to the solvent environment 
of the cell, forms intermolecular species that bind in an iterative 
process that can accommodate many thousands of molecules that 
form cross-beta sheet amyloids. These intracellular aggregates are 
described as oligomers (2–24 molecules), protofibrils (rods 4–11 nm 
wide and 200 nm long), and amyloid fibrils with a similar width to 
protofibrils but microns in length. While the formation of oligo­
mers is thermodynamically unfavorable, polymerization is favorable, 
causing aggregates to seed slowly but grow exponentially. In some 
cases, for example in Huntington’s disease and familial forms of 
Alzheimer’s disease and ALS, aggregation is accelerated by mutations 
or expansion of homopolymers. However, in many cases, the aggre­
gates contain other cellular proteins that share biophysical proper­
ties of aggregation propensity or reflect dysfunction in the PN that 
facilitates their seeding or propagation (see below). While in most 
instances, damage caused by protein aggregates is localized to the 
cells in which they form, as occurs with islet amyloid peptide in some 
patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus, amyloidogenic proteins asso­
ciated with neurodegenerative diseases have been shown to spread 
between cells and, in the case of transthyretin amyloidosis, can cause 
pathology in many tissues. Pathologists use staining of tissues with 
Congo red, which detects beta sheets, to make this diagnosis. Dam­
age to neurons by aggregates in Alzheimer’s disease can elicit a local 
inflammatory response by resident immune cells in the brain, both of 
which contribute to pathology. Much effort has been directed toward 
the detection of aggregates and amyloid and the development of small 
molecules or antibodies that block further growth or enhancing the 
cellular activities of the PN to suppress protein misfolding.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
■
■SECRETED AGGREGATED AND AMYLOID SPECIES 
CAUSING SYSTEMIC AMYLOIDOSIS
In patients with systemic amyloidosis, the secretion of large amounts 
of aggregation-prone proteins results in the deposition of aggregates in 

many tissues. These proteins can include immunoglobulins secreted 
from plasma cells in patients with systemic inflammation or multiple 
myeloma or other aggregation-prone proteins including transthyretin. 
Similar to other aggregate-induced diseases, mutations in transthyretin 
that enhance polymerization are associated with an increased risk of 
developing systemic amyloidosis with advancing age. These aggregates 
induce cellular toxicity, inflammation, and matrix reorganization, 
which interfere with function in an organ-specific manner.
■
■NATIVE PROTEINS PRONE TO AGGREGATE 

WHEN THE CELLULAR ENVIRONMENT IS 

ALTERED BY STRESS AND AGING
While well-defined genetic abnormalities have been essential in 
elucidating the molecular mechanisms that underlie the formation 
of protein aggregates and causally linking them to disease, many if 
not most clinical diseases associated with the formation of protein 
aggregates develop in patients without identified mutations. In these 
patients, a decline in the chaperone and quality control mechanisms 
of the PN allows exposure of aggregation-prone domains of normal 
proteins to the solvent environment of the cell. Once seeded, these 
protein aggregates can expand rapidly to induce local or systemic 
injury. The decline in function of the PN that allows these aggregates 
to form might develop gradually with advancing age or might occur 
suddenly in response to an age-triggered biologic program, as occurs 
in C. elegans.
■
■INFECTIOUS DISEASES AND IMBALANCED 

CELL STRESS RESPONSES IN AGING
The response to infectious diseases and the disproportionate morbidity 
and mortality in older individuals exposed to systemic stress are likely 
associated with the decline in robustness of cell stress responses and 
proteostasis. While these stressors include infections, surgical or acci­
dental trauma, sepsis, and myocardial infarction, among others, pneu­
monia, the most common cause of death from an infectious disease 
in the United States, provides an illustrative example. As was evident 
during the COVID-19 pandemic, pneumonia morbidity and mortal­
ity disproportionately affect the elderly. Viral pneumonias, including 
those caused by influenza viruses and SAR-CoV-2, are primarily local­
ized to the lung, where they activate a local and systemic inflammatory 
response and denude the alveolar lining. The resulting hypoxemia and 
systemic inflammatory response injure distant organs independent 
of viral injury. Impaired function of the PN during the stress might 
allow seeding of tissues with toxic aggregates with long-term conse­
quences. Repair of the damaged lung and distant organs represents 
a major challenge to proteostasis that might be overcome in younger 
individuals but fails in those who are older with poor stress resilience. 
This loss of proteostasis resilience necessary to limit damage and allow 
repair could explain clinical observations in pneumonia survivors who 
develop persistent lung injury, skeletal muscle dysfunction impairing 
mobility, chronic kidney disease, cognitive dysfunction, and dementia 
and an increased risk of ischemic cardiovascular events in the year after 
hospital discharge.
■
■FURTHER READING
Balch WE et al: Adapting proteostasis for disease intervention. 
Science 319:916, 2008.
Balchin D et al: In vivo aspects of protein folding and quality control. 
Science 353:aac4354, 2016.
Chiti F, Dobson CM: Protein misfolding, amyloid formation, and 
human disease: A summary of progress over the last decade. Annu 
Rev Biochem 86:27, 2017.
Costa-Mattioli M, Walter P: The integrated stress response: From 
mechanism to disease. Science 368:eaat5314, 2020.
Eisele YS et al: Targeting protein aggregation for the treatment of 
degenerative diseases. Nat Rev Drug Discov 14:759, 2015.
Finley D, Prado MA: The proteasome and its network: Engineering 
for adaptability. Cold Spring Harb Perspect Biol 12:a033985, 2020.
Labbadia J, Morimoto RI: The biology of proteostasis in aging and 
disease. Annu Rev Biochem 84:43, 2015.

# 13 - 505 Novel Approaches to Diseases of Unknown Etiology

## 505 Novel Approaches to Diseases of Unknown Etiology

Levine B, Kroemer G: Biological functions of autophagy genes: A 
disease perspective. Cell 176:11, 2019.
Mallucci GR et al: Developing therapies for neurodegenerative disor­
ders: Insights from protein aggregation and cellular stress responses. 
Annu Rev Cell Dev Biol 36:165, 2020.
Song J et al: Quality control of the mitochondrial proteome. Nat Rev 
Mol Cell Biol 22:54, 2021.
David R. Adams, Camilo Toro, Joseph Loscalzo

Novel Approaches to 

Diseases of Unknown 

Etiology
THE UNDIAGNOSED DISEASE STATE
The term disease, etymologically meaning “lack of ease” or the presence 
of discomfort, is defined as an abnormal state that negatively affects the 
structure or function of all or part of an organism and that is not due to 
any immediate external injury. When referring to a person experienc­
ing a disease, the word patient is used in its original, meaning “the one 
who endures suffering.” These terms are well suited to patients with 
undiagnosed diseases. A patient with an undiagnosed disease is one 
for whom a medical diagnosis is not discerned after reasonable efforts 
utilizing established methods and procedures. Multiple factors may 
contribute to a failure to reach a diagnosis (Table 505-1). Patients who 
are affected by an undiagnosed disease for a protracted period exist in 
an undiagnosed state, which presents characteristic challenges for the 
patients, their families, and their medical providers.
■
■THE MEANING AND CONTEXT OF A DIAGNOSIS
A diagnosis often entails hierarchical levels of information specific­
ity with varying levels of relevance to the users (consumers) of such 
information (e.g.) patients and their families, health care providers, 
government health care agencies, insurers, epidemiologists, genetic 
counselors, pharmacologists, biologists). As an example, a diagnosis 
of Parkinson’s disease in an adult is based on the progressive emer­
gence of signs and symptoms of bradykinesia, rigidity, asymmetric rest 
tremor, and postural instability (clinical diagnosis), which are typically 
responsive to the administration of L-dopa (a therapeutic response 
biomarker). Together, these are cardinal features of striatonigral degen­
eration (a mechanistic diagnosis), a process associated with neuronal 
α-synuclein deposition and Lewy body pathology (histopathologic 
diagnosis) often based on a genetic susceptibility conferred by muta­
tions in genes such as synuclein (SYNCA, a molecular diagnosis) and 
likely influenced by environmental exposures (e.g., manganese or other 
neurotoxins).
With ongoing advances in medical science and technology, the 
standard for what constitutes a reasonable diagnosis continues to 
evolve toward higher levels of specificity. For example, the utility of an 
antisense oligonucleotide therapy may be restricted to a specific subset 
of mutations associated with a given, monogenic, heritable disease. 
Efforts to adopt the principles of precision medicine include a growing 
emphasis on the context of disease within the genomic landscape, envi­
ronment, social factors, medical history, nutrition, and the microbiome 
of any given individual. Examples include cancer susceptibility, geneti­
cally determined idiosyncratic reactions to medications, and unique 
pathogen susceptibilities in patients with certain immune deficiencies.
■
■UNDIAGNOSED RARE DISEASES
Most chronically undiagnosed diseases are rare. While individual rare 
diseases have a low prevalence, they are numerous in aggregate. It is 

TABLE 505-1  Factors Contributing to the Presence of an 

Undiagnosed Disease
FACTOR
EXAMPLE
Misleading information
False-negative and false-positive test results
Rare disorder
Many inherited disorders have only been 
identified in a few individuals. For example, 
sialuria, a well-understood disorder of sialic acid 
metabolism, has been reported in 10 individuals 
(OMIM 269921).
Unusual causes of common 
diseases, including atypical 
course of illness
Insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus may be 
the presenting feature for the relatively rare 
autoimmune polyendocrinopathy syndrome, type 
I (OMIM 240300).
Presence of multiple 
disorders (blended 
phenotypes)
For an example, see PubMed ID 24863970.
Lack of characteristic 
symptoms of known disease
Diseases are commonly ascertained via 
cardinal signs or symptoms leading to 
incomplete ascertainment of all possible disease 
presentations. For instance, not all persons with 
Marfan’s syndrome are tall relative to other family 
members. For progressive diseases, pathognomic 
signs and symptoms may be missing in early 
stages of disease.
New disease
No prior knowledge or record of such disease
Incorrect affected status 
assignments in family history
A heritable disorder may be inappropriately 
excluded if family history information is incorrect.
Primary disease 
manifestations obscured by 
other factors
Maladaptive behavior, medication effects, and 
secondary disease manifestations may obscure 
signs and symptoms of a primary disorder.
CHAPTER 505
Disease not expected in 
region or population
Cystic fibrosis in persons of African ancestry, 
sickle cell disease in persons of northern 
European ancestry; infectious agents with 
marked geographical incidence patterns
Diseases thought to be 
eradicated
Poliomyelitis
Novel Approaches to Diseases of Unknown Etiology  
Diseases occurring in 
unexpected time of life
Parkinson’s disease in children, lysosomal 
storage disease in adults
Malingering
Feigned disease features intended to achieve 
secondary gain (Munchausen syndrome)
Rare disease mechanisms
Transmitted or sporadic prion disease, unusual 
zoonotic diseases
Abbreviation: OMIM, Online Mendelian Inheritance in Man.
estimated that >6000 rare diseases affect millions of people throughout 
the world. Estimates of aggregate population prevalence range from 
6 to 10%. Many rare diseases have a genetic basis and onset in child­
hood. As the cloud of uncertainty inherent in the undiagnosed disease 
state is removed, new disease-specific counseling, therapies, resources, 
community engagement, and advocacy opportunities become possible.
■
■THE EFFECT OF THE UNDIAGNOSED 

DISEASE STATE ON THE PATIENT
Patients with an undiagnosed disease are frequently driven to under­
stand the basic nature of their ailment (what, when, where, how, etc.). 
Individuals, families, physicians, and society, however, might have a 
wide range of tolerance to the uncertainties associated with the undi­
agnosed disease state. Being undiagnosed has profound detrimental 
effects. Patients can go undiagnosed for decades, leading to personal 
and family uncertainty, high levels of stress, decreased productiv­
ity, limited accessibility to disease-specific counseling and resources, 
decreased quality of life, and excess utilization of medical services.
APPROACH TO CHALLENGING DISEASES 
OF UNKNOWN ETIOLOGY
Approaches to a patient with an undiagnosed disease can be separated 
into two categories. The first is a new assessment by a consultant, new 
provider, or diagnostic referral center. The second is periodic reassess­
ment by an existing provider for a patient who remains undiagnosed.

TABLE 505-2  Essential Records for Undiagnosed Disease Patients
1.	 Any narrative summaries that detail the course of the illness
2.	 Copies of original test results with names, dates, testing circumstances, 
normal ranges, and test facility information
3.	 Electronic copies of imaging studies
4.	 Consultation notes
5.	 Hospitalization intake and discharge summaries
6.	 Accurate family history accounts and family relations
Optional but potentially useful records include:
1.	 Photographs and/or videos of disease manifestations
2.	 Longitudinal data (growth charts, symptom logs, serial lab measurements)
3.	 Data or specimens that could be reanalyzed, including pathology specimens 
and genomic sequencing of raw data
■
■COMPREHENSIVE DATA COLLECTION
A potentially time-consuming but critical initial step is the gathering 
of all available medical data. Essential records are listed in Table 505-2.
The overall goal of data collection is a full understanding of the 
course of the disease and a verification of critical data elements used 
for diagnostic decision-making. Incorrect or partial second-hand 
accounts of prior test results contribute substantively to incorrect or 
missed diagnoses.
Analysis of the collected data allows for reconstruction of the 
process by which previous disease presentation, diagnostic thought 
processes, and test interpretation led to the current understanding of a 
patient’s illness. Unintentional obfuscation of the history and findings 
can result from missing records, incomplete recall by the patient and 
fragmentation, and propagation of information (and misinformation) 
in the medical record. Optimally, the presence and character of key 
features of the illness will be reinforced by perspectives derived from 
multiple evaluations.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
■
■VALIDATION OF SUBJECTIVE AND 

OBJECTIVE FINDINGS
Teasing apart the layers of a patient’s presentation often uncovers a 
variety of adaptive (and maladaptive) coping strategies. Some are 
idiosyncratic to the disease state (e.g., sun avoidance in a patient with 
xeroderma pigmentosum), whereas others are driven by psychoso­
cial factors and could become primary drivers of the phenotype. It is 
important to consider, however, that patients believed to have “functional” 
or “somatoform” disorders may have unrecognized underlying ill­
nesses, e.g., nonepileptic events (pseudo-seizures), frequently have 
concurrent bona fide epileptic events. Careful consideration of clinical 
phenomenology and associated findings on physical examination and 
ancillary investigations may provide clarity, affirmation, and effective 
redirection. Distinct clinical, radiographic, and laboratory abnormali­
ties provide entry points to the generation of a differential diagnosis 
and could become effective biomarkers of disease progression and 
response to interventions.
Testing Strategies and New Technology 
The historical exclu­
sion of a diagnostic hypothesis may be based on testing that is no lon­
ger state of the art. For example, congenital disorders of glycosylation 
(CDG) were historically diagnosed using transferrin isoelectric focus­
ing. It was subsequently found that the diagnosis of many CDG types 
required mass spectrometric and molecular approaches. The initial 
assessment of a patient with an undiagnosed disease should include 
a reassessment of the diagnostic logic and data used in past decisionmaking. In the absence of concrete diagnostic leads, the use of broad 
scope screening tools may prove beneficial in generating meaningful 
diagnostic hypotheses (Table 505-3). In some cases, newer testing 
options may be difficult to obtain and/or be costly. Prior probability of 
disease and available resources will factor in determining whether new 
diagnostic testing is practical.
Molecular Approaches, Including Genomics 
The availability 
and variety of clinical molecular modalities have transformed diag­
nostic testing in many settings. These advances have arisen from both 

TABLE 505-3  Clinically Available Tests with Notable Utility for 
Undiagnosed Cases
TEST
TARGET PHENOTYPES
RATIONALE
Single nucleotide 
polymorphism microarray 
and/or karyotype
Dysmorphic features, 
cognitive impairment, 
neurodevelopmental 
disorders
Genomic structure 
abnormalities may be 
missed by other testing
Exome or genome 
sequencing
Any undiagnosed disease 
that is chronic and not 
clearly acquired
Tests a broad range of 
potentially unconsidered 
diagnostic entities
Lysosomal storage 
diseases (LSDs), 
molecular or enzymatic 
tests. urine organic 
acids, urinary 
glycosaminoglycans 
(GAGs), oxysterols
Progressive neurologic 
disorders, psychiatric 
disorders
Some LSDs have 
nonspecific 
presentations, and adultonset cases are often 
missed
Congenital disorders 
of glycosylation, Apo 
CIII and N-glycan mass 
spectrometry
Pediatric-onset 
disorders, cognitive 
impairment, neurologic 
phenotypes
Large group of disorders; 
phenotypes for many still 
being characterized
Biochemical disorders, 
ammonia, serum polyols, 
urine purines and 
pyrimidines, plasma 
amino acids, very-longchain fatty acids
Neurologic phenotypes, 
especially with waxing 
and waning course, 
selective speech 
involvement, or patients 
with unusual selfselected diets
Metabolic disorders 
may have nonspecific 
symptoms, and adultonset cases are often 
missed
Mitochondrial 
sequencing and 
mitochondrial depletion 
studies; biochemical 
screening with serum 
lactate, blood pyruvate, 
plasma amino acids, and 
GDF-15
Complex multisystem 
disorders with 
neurometabolic, 
endocrine, and 
gastrointestinal 
symptoms, muscle 
dysfunction, and 
waxing and waning or 
progressive course
Large group of disorders 
with a wide range of 
presentations; yield is 
improved by studies in 
affected tissue (e.g., liver 
or muscle)
Cerebrospinal fluid 
(CSF) studies including 
amino acids (AAs), 
lactate, pterins, 
methyltetrahydrofolate 
(MTHF), or special CSF 
flow studies
Synthetic 
neurotransmitter 
defects in patients with 
unexplained fluctuating 
encephalopathy/
movement disorders or 
patients with atypical 
neuroinflammatory 
syndromes
Patterns of profiles 
point to particular 
enzymatic deficits 
in neurotransmitter 
synthesis or 
characterization of 
unique immunologic 
profiles of inflammatory 
central nervous system 
diseases
testing scope, such as exome-wide, genome-wide, and transcriptome 
(RNA sequencing [RNA-Seq]) sequencing, and new medical knowl­
edge, such as new disease-gene associations and molecular interaction 
networking (network medicine). Complementary screening tools, 
such as metabolomics, show diagnostic promise, particularly when 
combined with sequencing data to generate a fuller picture of disease 
manifestations. Simultaneous consideration of multiple data types can 
provide a means of appreciating overlapping and reinforcing evidence, 
with the potential to inform both hypothesis-driven and agnostic 
approaches to diagnosis.
HYPOTHESIS-DRIVEN MOLECULAR TESTING  Hypothesis-driven test­
ing implies that a defined set of heritable (or potentially heritable) dis­
orders is the principal impetus for testing. Selection of a targeted gene 
sequencing panel, ideally augmented with structural variant detection, 
may allow for improved sensitivity, lower cost, and fewer unrelated 
(secondary) findings relative to full exome or genome sequencing stud­
ies. In the setting of an initial undiagnosed disease evaluation, prior 
sequencing panels may not include recently discovered genes. Testing 
with an updated panel or targeted sequencing of a newer gene is an 
option for consideration. In some cases, sequencing panels are gener­
ated by selective reporting of relevant genes within an exome dataset. 
In such cases, it may be possible to expand the analyses to new genes 
of interest without additional sequencing.

AGNOSTIC MOLECULAR TESTING  Agnostic testing typically uses data 
from a broad testing platform, such as exome or genome sequencing, 
and considers all detectable diagnoses, even those with a low pretest 
probability of being present. This approach can also generate hypoth­
eses for potentially new disease-gene associations. Analysis of the 
sequencing data typically includes an unrestricted search throughout 
the entire human genome or exome space. DNA sequence variants 
with potential medical relevance are identified first by bioinformatic 
characteristics, including known association with disease, predicted 
importance for protein function, interspecies conservation, popula­
tion frequency, and an evolving list of other associated or functional 
factors. The list of candidate variants is then subject to expert review 
(i.e., curation). The interpretation of test results in this setting is highly 
influenced by both the adequacy of communication between the clini­
cal and testing teams and the information content of the data sources 
used to annotate each of the thousands of variants generated in the 
course of sequencing.
There is a rapid proliferation of new testing platforms and analytical 
tools with the potential to contribute to solving undiagnosed diseases, 
but it remains challenging to judge their broad utility. While awaiting 
systematic validation and practice standards, novel techniques may 
be considered in special cases where a diagnostic hypothesis is closely 
aligned with the type of data generated by a specific testing strategy 
(Table 505-4).
■
■PERIODIC REEVALUATION
The cornerstone for the care of a patient in an undiagnosed disease 
state is a plan for periodic reevaluation. The Undiagnosed Diseases 
Network (UDN), a 10-year National Institutes of Health–sponsored 
national program, was specifically designed to evaluate undiagnosed 
patients. The overall diagnostic rate of the UDN, including periodic 
reevaluation of early enrollees, was reported as ~30%. This finding 
TABLE 505-4  Emerging or Special Testing Strategies and Related 
Diagnostic Questions
AVAILABLE 
CLINICALLYa
TESTING STRATEGY
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC QUESTION
Transcriptomics, 
RNA-Seq
Relevance of splice, regulatory, and other 
noncoding variants; correlated changes 
in gene expression within pathways
Yes
Metabolomics
Hypothesis generation via nontargeted 
approaches, correlated pathway 
changes, correlation with molecular 
findings
Yes
Epigenetics
Diseases known or suspected to be 
caused by methylation or parent-of-origin 
effects
Yes
Transcriptional 
profiling
Search for profile particular to certain 
disease states, e.g., interferon-inducible 
gene panels (interferon signature) in 
certain autoinflammatory disorders
Some
Specialized, diseasespecific testing
Prion-related diseases, metabolic 
diseases, and many other assays
Some
Functional validation
Model organisms, cell biology, and other 
approaches to validating a hypothesized 
gene-disease association
No
Metagenomics
Search for molecular fingerprints of other 
organisms (e.g., infectious agents) within 
human samples
Yes
Long-read 
sequencing 
technology
Accurate resolution of low-complexity 
regions of the human genome (repeat 
expansion disorders) and complex 
genome structural rearrangements
No
Deep sequencing
Accurate resolution of low levels of 
mosaicism
Some
Optical genome 
mapping
High-resolution chromosomal structure
Yes
aAvailable clinical tests are often a small subset of approaches available via 
research collaboration. Clinical testing offerings are evolving rapidly and should be 
reassessed periodically.

illustrates the fact that many affected individuals remain in an undi­
agnosed state for a protracted period. For a medical provider, the care 
of an undiagnosed patient includes a program for symptomatic care, 
support related to the undiagnosed state itself, and plans for a regular 
reevaluation strategy seeking new insights into the diagnosis by follow­
ing its time trajectory. Reevaluation is guided by emerging knowledge 
in the field, disease progression, and the development of new signs and 
symptoms. The appearance of a similar disease in a sibling or close 
relative may provide critical insight. Communication with the patient 
is an essential component. Many individuals with an undiagnosed dis­
ease report feeling abandoned by their providers once initial diagnostic 
ideas have been exhausted. Providers themselves may feel discouraged 
in being unable to provide a diagnosis. The institution and discussion 
of a well-defined plan for periodic reassessment and communication 
can help reinforce the patient-provider relationship and set reasonable 
expectations.

Reevaluation of Differential Diagnosis 
The key to success for a 
planned reevaluation visit is preparation. The problem and differential 
diagnosis lists should be subject to careful, evidence-based review. New 
or resolved clinical features may add or remove diagnostic consider­
ations. The passage of time may result in the emergence of distinct new 
phenotypic manifestations that serve as new clues in the formulation 
of a definitive diagnosis. Special consideration should be given to the 
effects of reaching maturity and aging. The establishment of a pheno­
type as being static versus progressive has prognostic value. Careful 
documentation of the rationale for including or excluding individual 
disorders will streamline the process for both future reevaluations and 
the need for consultants. Concurrent development of common diseases 
should be thoughtfully considered as a possible component of the 
primary undiagnosed condition. For example, emergence of insulindependent diabetes mellitus in an undiagnosed patient with a complex 
phenotype could be a feature of the rare autoimmune polyendocrinopa­
thy associated with mutations in the autoimmune regulator gene AIRE.
CHAPTER 505
Novel Approaches to Diseases of Unknown Etiology  
New Literature 
Keeping abreast of current literature is an impor­
tant and challenging activity for all medical providers as the body of 
medical knowledge continues to grow exponentially. For undiagnosed 
diseases, newly reported disorders and disease-gene associations are an 
important source of diagnostic resolution. Literature search tools such 
as PubMed can be augmented by online resources that connect clinical 
signs and symptoms (phenotypes) to disorders. For example, using the 
search terms “cardiomyopathy arthropathy diabetes hyperpigmenta­
tion” in the Online Mendelian Inheritance in Man website (https://
omim.org) produces a list of disorders that includes hemochromatosis. 
In the context of an undiagnosed disease, this type of phenotypedriven approach can be used to search for new, relevant publications 
and disorders. Tools for search automation continue to be developed 
in both open-source and commercial settings. The success of these 
approaches is augmented by iterative application, ideally as part of 
formal, periodic reevaluation of the undiagnosed patient.
■
■GENOMICS
The use of medical testing based on the determination of DNA 
sequence and structure (sometimes referred to as molecular testing) 
has proliferated in recent years. A wide variety of approaches are 
available to the clinician, from single-gene sequencing to exome or 
genome sequencing. RNA sequencing and optical genome mapping 
have recently become available as clinical tests. Many reviews of this 
topic are available (see Marwaha et al., 2022, in “Further Reading”). 
Consultation with colleagues trained in genetics can be useful when 
developing an optimal testing approach.
In some cases, genetic testing results may already exist in the medi­
cal record during the initial evaluation of an undiagnosed patient. This 
is increasingly true for younger patients; exome and genome sequenc­
ing are being used earlier, and with increasing frequency, for complex 
diagnostic challenges. Reanalysis of previously obtained exome and 
genome data should start with consideration of both the age and qual­
ity of the study and the reported patient phenotype at the time of the 
study report. For sequence results generated in a clinical laboratory,

a discussion between the provider and the laboratory director often 
answers important questions about recommended next steps. The dis­
cussion should touch on how technologic advances have affected the 
utility of the older data and whether the laboratory offers reanalysis 
of the data. At a minimum, the provider, the testing laboratory, or an 
identified subspecialist should review previously reported DNA vari­
ants of unknown significance considering interval reports about the 
gene in question. More advanced reanalysis strategies are emerging and 
may be offered by the testing laboratory.

Some laboratories offer release of raw DNA sequencing data to their 
patients on request. The utility of raw data varies and depends on the 
identification of bioinformatics collaborators willing to reanalyze the data. 
Sequencing data obtained as part of a research study may not be suitable 
for clinical diagnostic purposes. In practice, raw and research-generated 
sequencing data are most useful when a collaborating researcher can be 
identified.
When considering a new sequencing test, the inclusion of the par­
ents and siblings of the proband has the potential to provide enormous 
value in some situations. Discussion of an optimal approach with an 
expert colleague or the testing laboratory is encouraged.
■
■EXPOSOME
In many cases, a detailed occupational and environmental expo­
sure history should be obtained. Some rare disease phenotypes are 
pathognomonic of specific toxicant exposures (e.g., mesothelioma 
and asbestos exposure, clear cell adenocarcinoma of the vagina and 
intrauterine diethylstilbestrol [DES] exposure, chloracne and exposure 
to halogenated aromatic hydrocarbons). For the most part, however, 
chemical toxicant exposures do not produce unique phenotypes. 
Rather, chemical exposures operate in conjunction with lifestyle 
factors (e.g., smoking, alcohol intake, and nutritional status), dif­
ferential host susceptibility (determined by age, sex, comorbidities, 
genetics, etc.), and nonchemical stressors (e.g., psychosocial stress) 
to produce (1) common, readily diagnosed medical diseases (e.g., 
asthma); (2) unusual or nonspecific phenotypes (e.g., erethism and 
metallic mercury exposure); or (3) atypical presentations of otherwise 
well-characterized disease states, initially considered an undiagnosed 
disease (e.g., manganese-induced parkinsonism). The nonspecificity 
typical of chemical-induced disease risk is further complicated by lack 
of exposure biomarkers for many common environmental toxicants 
(e.g., volatile organics), the short half-life of some contaminants (e.g., 
arsenic), and the possibility of decades long latency between exposure 
and disease onset (e.g., chemical carcinogenesis or dietary exposures 
to specific biochemical risk factors for atherothrombosis). In addition, 
we live in an era in which new chemicals are introduced into consumer 
products and the environment at a pace well beyond our capacity to 
characterize their toxicity. Within this context, one of the most power­
ful tools for ascertaining chemical-related disease risk is a systematic 
exposure history. Although there are no standardized instruments for 
this purpose, there are published guidelines to implement exposure 
assessments (Goldman and Peters, 1981; see “Further Reading” below). 
These include a multistep approach to exposure assessment including 
a job history; a review of exposures at work and at home or via hobbies 
and recreation; ascertainment of any temporal relationship of symp­
toms or disease onset to work, home, or recreational activities; and the 
food frequency questionnaire. If this screening identifies a potential 
exposure or exposures of concern with respect to patient symptoms 
and phenotype, a second step of evaluation involves a more detailed 
history to identify specific suspect agents, options for quantitative 
environmental exposure assessment (e.g., household tap water sam­
pling, review of workplace Material Safety Data Sheets [MSDSs]) and 
biomonitoring, and etiologic plausibility for at least some aspects of the 
patient’s phenotype.
PART 20
Emerging Topics in Clinical Medicine
The traditional approach to focused external exposure assessment 
proposed above does not, however, provide an integrated, quantitative 
measure of all exposures over the life course, an exposure characteriza­
tion of particular interest for the risk of chronic diseases such as cancer 
or atherothrombosis. The exposome has been proposed as a promising 
means for capturing the totality of human exposure over a lifetime 

(analogous to the totality of genetic exposure assessed via genomic 
analyses), including not only external chemical or dietary/foodome 
(Barabasi et al., 2020; see “Further Reading” below) exposures but 
also internal (e.g., metabolic, hormonal, microbiome) influences and 
psychosocial factors. However, techniques for measuring the expo­
some are in relatively early stages of development, are limited by the 
substantial variability in human exposure experience, and have not yet 
been designed to capture complex combinations commonly encoun­
tered in environmental or occupational exposure settings (Peters et al., 
2012; Wild, 2012; Brunekreef 2013; Barabasi et al., 2020; see “Further 
Reading” below). This important element of assessing patients with 
undiagnosed disease is, however, evolving rapidly and offers the prom­
ise of becoming a more formal part of the evaluation of many patients 
with undiagnosed disease.
■
■ENGAGEMENT OF RESEARCH APPROACHES
Establishing a research collaboration for a patient with undiagnosed 
disease can be both challenging and rewarding. Time and effort 
resources are likely to limit this approach to a subset of patients with 
particularly compelling clinical presentations and a strong hypothesis 
about disease causation. The process must include early and detailed 
communication with the patient. Several approaches may be consid­
ered. Undiagnosed disease medicine, as a focus of specialized study, 
investment, and infrastructure, has proliferated around the world in 
the last decade, with numerous centers providing support for evaluat­
ing qualifying individuals and families.
Leveraging Phenotypic and Genotypic Similarities 
For a 
patient with a rare or undiagnosed disease and distinct presenting fea­
tures, finding similarly affected individuals adds substantial benefits. 
It can encourage research, provide a community for affected patients, 
and improve the chances of finding commonalities in pathogenesis 
and therapeutic strategies. Phenotypic aggregation may also allow the 
patient to connect with consortia invested in related medical presenta­
tions. Examples include organizations dedicated to the study of related 
diseases such as leukodystrophies, autoinflammatory disorders, and 
even undiagnosed diseases; NORD, the National Organization for Rare 
Disorders (rarediseases.org), can be a useful starting point. The Office 
of Rare Disease Research within the National Center for Advancing 
Translational Science supports consortia under the Rare Disease Clini­
cal Research Network program. Building patient cohorts may also be 
based on specific biological mechanisms or pathways, for example, the 
United Mitochondrial Disease Foundation.
Data Sharing 
The proliferation of DNA sequencing technology and 
the subsequent generation of many DNA variants of unknown clinical 
significance have prompted the creation of data-sharing resources spe­
cifically designed to match similar cases submitted by clinicians and 
researchers around the world. For example, a clinical exome report 
may identify variants in a gene with a potential but unproven relation­
ship to the patient’s presenting illness. The clinician could enter the 
gene name into a gene-matching database, and if the same gene name 
had been already entered by a different submitter, the database would 
flag a match and send contact information to both submitters. The 
matching procedure has the potential to identify additional cases of 
an ultrarare or newly described condition, while avoiding the shar­
ing of the patient’s personal health information. Embellishments of 
this approach involve inclusion of phenotypic features, data entry by 
families, and specific details of sequence variants. Example systems 
include GeneMatcher (the most populated database for single-gene 
submissions) and DECIPHER (which adds expended utility for larger 
structural variants). As an illustration of their utilization at the time of 
this chapter’s publication, GeneMatcher has single-gene submissions 
for almost 70% of all known protein coding genes.
Collaboration 
Collaborations around undiagnosed disease 
patients may take many forms. Studies focusing on related medical 
conditions can sometimes be identified using the https://clinicaltrials.
gov website, which lists many U.S. and non-U.S. clinical studies. Data­
bases of clinical information (e.g., this textbook, GeneReviews) can 
be used to identify subject matter experts for related conditions. Such

No diagnosis after
comprehensive evaluation
Symptomatic care,
consider empiric treatments
Consultative assessment
Iterative assessment
Comprehensive review and
re-evaluation of evidence
for prior conclusions
Review new records, signs,
symptoms, and
environmental history
Testing to validate key
results and evaluate new
diagnostic hypotheses
Consider new literature and
availability of new or
updated testing strategies
Consider hypothesisgenerating tests including
genomic sequencing
Reformulate differential
diagnosis
DIAGNOSIS?
Yes
No
Document reasoning and
supporting evidence
Consider collaboration to
explore hypotheses
Work with patient to define
concrete follow-up plan
FIGURE 505-1  Approach to the patient with an undiagnosed disease.
experts can be queried about ongoing studies. In some cases, a willing­
ness to work with consenting families to provide biological specimens 
can open additional avenues for collaboration.
■
■CHALLENGES
Data Portability 
Obtaining specimens, data, and records for 
a chronically undiagnosed patient can be time-consuming and 

challenging. Families may be charged fees for obtaining copies of old 
studies. Although continuing advances in record access are occurring, 
families should be encouraged to collect and maintain an updated col­
lection of medical records. These should include copies of consultation 
notes, original laboratory results, and radiology studies (the latter pref­
erably in electronic form). These record collections are useful for con­
sultation, second opinions, and transitions between primary providers.

Managing Illness Behaviors, Expectations, and Secondary 
Manifestations 
Patients with undiagnosed diseases may present 
in any stage of the grieving process. Coping with uncertainty, loss of 
abilities, work, relationships, autonomy, and financial security com­
pound the primary manifestation of the disease. Patients may have a 
wide range of expectations about the possible benefits of achieving a 
diagnosis, including successful therapy. Patients of reproductive age 
may find that their greatest uncertainty surrounds the potential herita­
bility of their disorder, its effects on future reproductive decisions, and 
the potential risk it may represent to their children and living relatives. 
These factors may be equally or more disabling than the primary illness 
and require an individualized and multidisciplinary approach.
CONCLUSION
Chronically undiagnosed diseases present a complex challenge to 
patients, medical providers, and society at large. Development of a 
comprehensive plan for evaluation, reevaluation, and support requires 
a substantial investment of time and effort (Fig. 505-1).
Achieving an accurate diagnosis removes at least one level of uncer­
tainty and allows for disease-specific counseling, therapies, resources, 
community engagement, and advocacy opportunities otherwise not 
afforded to undiagnosed patients.
CHAPTER 505
■
■FURTHER READING
Barabasi AL et al: The unmapped chemical complexity of our diet. 
Nat Food 1:33, 2020.
Brunekreef B: Commentary: Exposure science, the exposome, and 
Novel Approaches to Diseases of Unknown Etiology  
public health. Environ Mol Mutagen 54:596, 2013.
Goldman RH, Peters JM: The occupational and environmental 
health history. JAMA 246:2831, 1981.
Lee CE et al: Rare genetic diseases: Nature’s experiments on human 
development. iScience 23:101123, 2020.
Marwaha S et al: A guide for the diagnosis of rare and un-diagnosed 
disease: Beyond the exome. Genome Med 14:23, 2022.
Peters A et al: Understanding the link between environmental expo­
sures and health: Does the exposome promise too much? J Epidemiol 
Community Health 66:103, 2012.
Splinter K et al: Effect of genetic diagnosis on patients with previously 
undiagnosed disease. N Engl J Med 379:2131, 2018.
Wild CP: The exposome: From concept to utility. Review. Int J Epide­
miol 41:24, 2012.

This page intentionally left blank